JP2021010547A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To enhance interest in a performance regarding a game machine capable of changing a setting value.SOLUTION: A game machine executes a first setting suggestive performance when a variation pattern is a non-ready-to-win or a normal ready-to-win, and executes a degree-of-expectation notice performance when a variation pattern is a super-ready-to-win. A specific performance state in which a degree of expectation toward control to an advantageous state is higher than a normal performance state is a performance state in which the number of at least partial colors to be displayed including specific display is less than that in the normal performance state. While a display color of specific display is changed to a display color corresponding to a degree of expectation to be controlled to an advantageous state in execution of a changing performance in the normal performance state, a display color of specific display is set to a common display color without any change regardless of a degree of expectation toward control to an advantageous state in execution of a changing performance in the specific performance state. A display color of specific display is displayed in a display color corresponding to a degree of expectation toward control to an advantageous state when shifting from the specific performance state to the normal performance state.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 9-5

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine capable of playing a game.

As shown in Patent Document 1, a gaming machine that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player and displays a character image according to the setting values before and after the setting change. Proposed.

JP-A-2010-200902 (Fig. 12)

As for a game machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of set values as described in Patent Document 1, there is room for improving the interest of the production.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to improve the interest of a game machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of set values.

The gaming machine of means A1 (pachinko gaming machine 1) is
A setting means (game) that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player (setting values 1 to 6 having a different range of random numbers for jackpot determination). Control microcomputer 100) and
The effect control means (CPU 120 for effect control) that controls the effect,
A display means (CPU 120 for effect control, image display device 5) is provided.
The effect control means can execute the first setting suggestion effect related to the setting suggestion in a specific display area in the display area of the display means (mini slot symbol display area 5L1 of the mini slot 16TM030 at the lower part of the screen of the image display device 5). In 5C1 and 5R1, by stopping and displaying the combination of [bell], [bell], and [bell] mini-slot symbols as the same symbol combination, it is possible to execute the effect of establishing the role of "bell"). , The second setting suggestion effect regarding the setting suggestion can be executed in a predetermined display area in the display area of the display means (the effect of displaying the variation number display 16TM040 in the setting suggestion mode at the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5 can be executed. ) And
The execution ratios of the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect are different from each other (as shown in FIG. 9-6 (G), the execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect is 3% (setting value 1). While it is ~ 8% (set value 6), as shown in FIG. 9-7 (M), the execution rate of the second setting suggestion effect is 10% (set value 1) to 20% (set value). 6)),
The display means (effect control CPU 120, image display device 5) hides the first setting suggestion effect when a specific effect (battle effect in super reach) is executed (see FIGS. 9-10 (12)). As shown, in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 of the image display device 5, the combination of mini-slot symbols corresponding to the first setting suggestion effect (in this example, [bell] [bell] [bell]) is (Hidden),
further,
Specific display means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control that performs hold display or active display) capable of displaying specific display related to variable display on display means, and
It is provided with a change effect executing means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the process of 074AKS035) capable of executing a change effect that changes the display color of the specific display.
The display color of the specific display differs depending on the degree of expectation controlled by the advantageous state (for example, when the active display (including the case where it changes at the hold display stage) changes up to the "red" stage). , The variable display result will always be a "big hit", etc.),
There are a normal effect state and a specific effect state in which a transition from the normal effect state can be performed and the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than that of the normal effect state (for example, a monochrome effect is executed). In that case, the expectation that the variable display result will be a big hit is higher than when the monochrome effect is not executed),
The specific effect state is an effect state in which at least a part of the colors of the display target including the specific display displayed by the display means is displayed less than the normal effect state (for example, the effect). It is an effect of changing the target image displayed on the image display device 3 to a monochrome mode by performing monochrome output processing on the control board 12 side, and is used when displaying a pre-stored effect image. It is a production that displays the number of colors to be performed with a smaller number of colors than the normal production state),
When the change effect is executed by the change effect executing means in the normal effect state, the display color of the specific display is changed to a display color according to the degree of expectation controlled in the advantageous state. When the change effect is executed by the change effect means in the specific effect state, a common display color is used without changing the display color of the specific display regardless of the degree of expectation controlled by the advantageous state. (For example, during the specific effect state (when the monochrome effect flag is on), the monochrome output process is performed, so even if the change effect of the success mode is executed, it is held regardless of the jackpot expectation. The display and active display are displayed in "white". On the other hand, in the normal effect state in which the monochrome effect is not being executed, the display color is displayed according to the expected degree according to the display mode change pattern),
When shifting from the specific effect state to the normal effect state, the display color of the specific display is displayed in a display color according to the degree of expectation controlled in the advantageous state (for example, in a monochrome mode in step 074AKS032). The number of colors used for the target image that was the display target returns to the normal number of colors, and the hold display or active display whose display mode has changed due to the change effect is displayed in the changed display color, etc.),
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, since the execution ratios of the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect are different, it is possible for the player to guess the setting by combining the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect. Can be improved. Further, the expectation degree notification by color can be suitably performed, and the game entertainment can be improved.

The game machine of means A2
It is a game machine of means A1 and
Equipped with an effect control means (CPU 120 for effect control) for controlling the effect
When the variable display (variable display) by the variable display means (microcomputer 100 for game control, CPU 120 for effect control) is executed, the effect control means suggests the first setting at a different ratio depending on the set value. It is determined whether or not to execute the effect (whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect is determined for each variation display (step S16TM2000), and as shown in FIG. 9-6 (G), according to the set value. The execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect is different)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the player can infer the set value when the variable display is executed.

The game machine of means A3
A gaming machine of means A1 or means A2,
Equipped with an effect control means (CPU 120 for effect control) for controlling the effect
The effect control means suggests the first setting at a different rate depending on the set value when the variable display (variable display) by the variable display means (game control microcomputer 100, effect control CPU 120) is executed. It is determined whether or not to execute the effect, and after making the decision, it is determined whether or not to execute the second setting suggestion effect (as shown in FIG. 9-5, the first setting suggestion effect is performed in step S16TM2000. After deciding whether or not to execute the second setting suggestion effect in step S16TM2070)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, after deciding whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect, it is determined whether or not to execute the second setting suggestion effect. Therefore, it is appropriate to give priority to the first setting suggestion effect. Production control is possible.

The game machine of means A4
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to means A3.
The display means (effect control CPU 120, image display device 5) hides the first setting suggestion effect when a specific effect (battle effect in super reach) is executed (FIG. 9-10 (12)). As shown in, in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 of the image display device 5, a combination of mini-slot symbols corresponding to the first setting suggestion effect (in this example, [bell] [bell] [bell]) Will be hidden)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the player can pay attention to the specific effect.

The game machine of means A5
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to means A4.
The variable display means (CPU 120 for effect control) can execute variable display of decoration identification information (variable display of decorative symbols).
The display means (effect control CPU 120, image display device 5) is a variable display (mini slot symbol) of information different from the decorative identification information in a specific area (mini slot symbol display area 5L1, 5C1, 5R1, or 5LCR1). (Variable display of) can be executed, and special display (combination of mini-slot symbols whose winning combination is "bell") or specific display (establishing combination is "watermelon", "cherry", or "7 sets" , Or a combination of "CHANGE", "super heat", or "FEVER" character symbols, or a predetermined display (a combination of mini-slot symbols whose winning combination is "off", or " It is characterized in that it is possible to display a "no display" symbol).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the production performed in a specific area of the display means.

The game machine of means A6
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to means A5.
The variable display means (CPU 120 for effect control) can execute variable display of decoration identification information (variable display of decorative symbols).
The display means (effect control CPU 120) can execute variable display (variable display of the mini-slot symbol) of information different from the decorative identification information in a specific area (mini-slot symbol display area 5L1, 5C1, 5R1). ,
When the variable display mode executed in the specific area becomes a special mode (freeze mode), the ratio controlled to the advantageous state (big hit gaming state) is higher than that when the special mode (freeze mode) does not occur. High (As shown in FIG. 9-7 (K), the winning combination when the mini-slot symbol performs a variable display of the freeze mode is "cherry (freeze)" or "7 sets (freeze)", and "cherry". Since the above-mentioned winning combination (“cherry” or “7-match”) is confirmed, the expectation that the mini-slot symbol will be controlled to the jackpot game state is higher than when the variable display of the normal mode is performed).
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the variable display mode becomes a special mode, so that the player can pay attention to the display means.

The game machine of means A7
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to means A6.
There are multiple types of the specific display (there are "watermelon", "cherry", and "7 sets" as the winning combination, and the display results include "no display", "CHANGE", "super heat", and "FEVER". ),
The ratio controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the type of the specific display (as shown in FIG. 9-7 (K), the expectation degree controlled to the jackpot gaming state is "watermelon"<"cherry"< It is higher in the order of "7 sets")
It is characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to be interested in the type of specific display.

The game machine of means A8
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to means A7.
A storage means (RAM 122 of the effect control board 12) for storing the display history of the special display (the cumulative number of times the combination of mini-slot symbols whose winning combination is "bell" is stopped and displayed)
When the predetermined condition is satisfied (when the menu screen is displayed, the icon of "mini reel information" is selected by operating the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B), the information regarding the display history (the establishment combination is It is characterized by including a history display means (an image display device 5 for displaying mini reel information 16TM200) capable of displaying a "winning probability of becoming a bell").
According to such a configuration, the player can easily grasp the information regarding the display history of the special display in order to estimate the set value.

The game machine of means A9
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to means A8.
A variable display means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing variable display of decorative identification information (decorative symbol) and variable display of reduced identification information (small symbol) having lower visibility than the decorative identification information.
A special variable display execution means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing variable display of special identification information (mini-slot symbol) different from decorative identification information and reduced identification information, and
An advantageous state control means (microcomputer 100 for game control) that can control an advantageous state (big hit game state) that is advantageous for the player, and
With display means,
The variable display means can execute the variable display of the decoration identification information in the first area (decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R in the center of the screen) of the display area of the display means, and also can execute the reduced identification information. The variable display can be executed in the second area (small symbol display area 5l, 5c, 5r in the upper right part of the screen) of the display area of the display means.
The special variable display executing means can execute variable display of special identification information in a third area (lower center of the screen) of the display area of the display means.
The display related to the setting suggestion can be displayed in the first area and the third area of the display means, while the display related to the setting suggestion is restricted in the second area (small symbol display area 5l, Images corresponding to setting suggestions such as mini slot symbols are not displayed on 5c and 5r)
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in suggesting the setting, and it is possible to appropriately execute the variable display of the reduced identification information in the second region.

The game machine of means A10
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to means A9.
A setting means (game control microcomputer 100) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (setting values 1 to 6 having different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination) having different advantages for the player.
Variable display means (microcomputer 100 for game control, CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing variable display (variable display), and
An advantageous state control means (microcomputer 100 for game control) that can control an advantageous state (big hit game state) that is advantageous for the player, and
A display means (CPU 120 for effect control, image display device 5) is provided.
The display means includes a special display corresponding to a setting suggestion related to the setting means (combination of mini-slot symbols whose winning combination is "bell") and a specific display corresponding to the suggestion of controlling an advantageous state (establishing combination is "bell"). It is possible to display "watermelon", "cherry", or a combination of mini-slot symbols that are "7 sets", "no display", "CHANGE", "super heat", or "FEVER" symbol).
When the variable display period is a predetermined period, the special display can be displayed (when the fluctuation pattern (variation time) is non-reach off (10 seconds), normal reach off (30 seconds), or normal reach jackpot (30 seconds). It is possible to stop and display the combination of mini-slot symbols whose winning combination is "bell"), and when the variable display period is longer than the predetermined period, the special display can be displayed and then the specific display can be displayed. (When the fluctuation pattern (variation time) is out of super reach (120 seconds) or super reach jackpot (120 seconds), the winning combination is "bell" after the combination of mini-slot symbols whose winning combination is "bell" is stopped and displayed. Stop and display the combination of mini-slot symbols that are "watermelon", "cherry", or "7 sets", and stop and display the "no display", "CHANGE", "super heat", or "FEVER" symbol. It is possible).
According to such a configuration, since the special display can be displayed with priority over the specific display, it is possible to improve the interest in setting suggestion.

The gaming machine of means B1 (pachinko gaming machine 1) is
A setting means (game control microcomputer 100) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (setting values 1 to 6 having different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination) having different advantages for the player.
Variable display means (microcomputer 100 for game control, CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing variable display (variable display), and
An advantageous state control means (microcomputer 100 for game control) that can control an advantageous state (big hit game state) that is advantageous for the player, and
A display means (CPU 120 for effect control, image display device 5) is provided.
The display means includes a special display corresponding to a setting suggestion related to the setting means (combination of mini-slot symbols whose winning combination is "bell") and a specific display corresponding to the suggestion of controlling an advantageous state (establishing combination is "bell"). It is possible to display a combination of mini-slot symbols that are "watermelon", "cherry", or "7 sets", "no display", "CHANGE", "super heat", or "FEVER" symbol) in a specific area. ,
Corresponding display means (CPU 120 for effect control, image display device 5) capable of displaying the corresponding display (active display 16TM003) corresponding to the variable display, and
The specific display is displayed in the specific area (as shown in FIG. 9-9 (8), a combination of mini slot symbols whose winning combination is "cherry" is provided in the mini slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1. After the stop display is displayed, as shown in FIG. 9-10 (10), the mode of the corresponding display is changed in response to the stop display of the character symbol of "super heat" in the mini slot symbol display area 5LCR1). Change effect to be made (as shown in FIGS. 9-10 (11) and (12), a second change effect is added to the active display 16TM030 with a character icon indicating the same character as the character of the mini-slot pattern (“super heat”)). A gaming machine characterized by comprising an effect executing means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing the above.
According to such a configuration, a gaming machine capable of displaying a special display corresponding to a setting suggestion can perform a change effect in response to the specific display being displayed in a specific area. Can be improved.

The game machine of means B2
It is a game machine of means B1
As the corresponding display (active display) mode, there are a plurality of types of special modes (normal mode, blue mode, red mode).
The effect executing means (effect control CPU 120) is a gaming machine capable of executing a special effect (first change effect) that changes the special aspect of the corresponding display.
According to such a configuration, the player can be expected to change the corresponding display of the special aspect.

The game machine of means B3
A gaming machine of means B1 or means B2.
The effect executing means (effect control CPU 120) can execute an effect acting on the corresponding display (active display) that is the target of the change effect as the change effect (second change effect) (FIG. 9-10). As shown in (11) and (12), an effect indicating that the mini-slot symbol (“super heat”) stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 jumps out of the mini-slot 16TM30 and hits the active display 16TM003. After the image is displayed, a character icon indicating the same characters as the characters (“super heat”) of the mini-slot symbol stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 is added to the active display 16TM030).
It is characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of change production.

The game machine of means B4
A game machine according to any one of means B1 to means B3.
There are a plurality of types of the specific display (the first mini-slot variable display has "off", "watermelon", "cherry", and "7 sets" as the winning combination, and the second mini-slot variable display has "7 sets" as the display result. There are "No display", "CHANGE", "Intense heat", "FEVER"),
Depending on the type of the specific display, the mode of the corresponding display to be the target of the change effect is determined at a different ratio (as shown in FIGS. 9-7 (K) and (L), the first in the expectation notice effect. The winning combination of the 1 mini slot variable display is determined to be "out of place", "watermelon", "cherry", or "7 sets", and the second mini slot is determined according to which winning combination is determined. The selection ratio of whether the display result of the variable display is "no display", "CHANGE", "super heat", or "FEVER" is different, and the display result of the second mini slot variable display and Since it matches the mode of the character icon added to the active display 16TM003, it is added to the active display 16TM003 depending on which combination of the first mini-slot variable display in the expectation notice effect is determined. The ratio of the mode of the character icon is different)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to have a relationship between the type of the specific display and the mode of the corresponding display, and it is possible to improve the interest of the production.

The game machine of means B5
Any gaming machine selected from means B1 to means B4.
Equipped with an effect control means (CPU 120 for effect control) for controlling the effect
When the variable display (variable display) by the variable display means (microcomputer 100 for game control, CPU 120 for effect control) is executed, the effect control means displays the special display at a different ratio according to a set value. It is determined whether or not to perform the determination, and after the determination is made, it is determined whether or not to display the specific display (as shown in FIG. 9-5, whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect is determined in step S16TM2000. Later, in step S16TM2020, it is determined whether or not to execute the expectation notice effect).
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, after deciding whether or not to display the special display, it is decided whether or not to display the specific display, so that appropriate effect control in which the special display is prioritized becomes possible.

The game machine of means B6
Any gaming machine selected from means B1 to means B5.
The variable display means (CPU 120 for effect control) can execute variable display of decoration identification information (variable display of decorative symbols).
The display means (effect control CPU 120, image display device 5) is a variable display (mini slot symbol) of information different from the decorative identification information in a specific area (mini slot symbol display area 5L1, 5C1, 5R1, or 5LCR1). (Variable display) can be executed, and the special display (combination of mini-slot symbols whose winning combination is "bell") or the specific display (establishing combination is "watermelon", "cherry", or " A combination of mini-slot symbols that will be "7 sets", or a combination of "CHANGE", "super heat", or "FEVER" character symbols), or a predetermined display (a combination of mini-slot symbols whose winning combination is "off"), or , "No display" pattern) can be displayed.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the production performed in a specific area of the display means.

The game machine of means B7
Any gaming machine selected from means B1 to means B6.
The variable display means (CPU 120 for effect control) can execute variable display of decoration identification information (variable display of decorative symbols).
The display means (effect control CPU 120) can execute variable display (variable display of the mini-slot symbol) of information different from the decorative identification information in a specific area (mini-slot symbol display area 5L1, 5C1, 5R1). ,
When the variable display mode executed in the specific area becomes a special mode (freeze mode), the ratio controlled to the advantageous state (big hit gaming state) is higher than that when the special mode (freeze mode) does not occur. High (As shown in FIG. 9-7 (K), the winning combination when the mini-slot symbol performs a variable display of the freeze mode is "cherry (freeze)" or "7 sets (freeze)", and "cherry". Since the above-mentioned winning combination (“cherry” or “7-match”) is confirmed, the expectation that the mini-slot symbol will be controlled to the jackpot game state is higher than when the variable display of the normal mode is performed).
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the variable display mode becomes a special mode, so that the player can pay attention to the display means.

The game machine of means B8
Any gaming machine selected from means B1 to means B7.
There are multiple types of the specific display (there are "watermelon", "cherry", and "7 sets" as the winning combination, and the display results include "no display", "CHANGE", "super heat", and "FEVER". ),
The ratio controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the type of the specific display (as shown in FIG. 9-7 (K), the expectation degree controlled to the jackpot gaming state is "watermelon"<"cherry"< It is higher in the order of "7 sets")
It is characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to be interested in the type of specific display.

The game machine of means B9
Any gaming machine selected from means B1 to means B8.
A storage means (RAM 122 of the effect control board 12) for storing the display history of the special display (the cumulative number of times the combination of mini-slot symbols whose winning combination is "bell" is stopped and displayed)
When the predetermined condition is satisfied (when the menu screen is displayed, the icon of "mini reel information" is selected by operating the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B), the information regarding the display history (the establishment combination is It is characterized by including a history display means (an image display device 5 for displaying mini reel information 16TM200) capable of displaying a "winning probability of becoming a bell").
According to such a configuration, the player can easily grasp the information regarding the display history of the special display in order to estimate the set value.

The game machine of means B10
Any gaming machine selected from means B1 to means B9.
The display means (effect control CPU 120) can display a special display (variation number display 16TM040) suggesting a set value in a special area (lower left of the screen of the image display device 5).
The ratio at which the special display is displayed is different from the ratio at which the special display is displayed (the first setting suggestion effect is an execution lottery for each variable display, and the second setting suggestion effect is 25 times. A lottery is held for each variable display),
The ratio of the set value suggested by the special display corresponding to the set value of the game machine is different from the ratio of the set value suggested by the special display corresponding to the set value of the game machine (FIG. 9-6). As shown in FIG. 9-7 (M), while the execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect is 3% (set value 1) to 8% (set value 6) as shown in (G). In addition, since the execution rate of the second setting suggestion effect is 10% (setting value 1) to 20% (setting value 6), the actual effect execution rate between the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect. The ratio of the set value estimated based on is different from the set value of the game machine is different)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the ratio of the suggested set value corresponding to the set value of the game machine differs depending on whether the display is the special display or the special display. You can pay attention to what is suggested.

In addition, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the inventions according to the following means (1) to (7). Conventionally, in a game machine, when the stop symbol mode when the variable display of the display symbol in the variable display game is completely stopped as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-2224 becomes a specific display mode. , It becomes an advantageous state (big hit game state) which is advantageous for the player. For example, a gaming machine that is in a big hit game state opens a special electric accessory called a big winning opening or an attacker, and continuously provides a player with a state in which winning a game ball is extremely easy for a certain period of time. To do. In such a game machine, various kinds of effects are executed to notify the player of the expectation degree controlled in an advantageous state before the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed.

As such a game machine, for example, there is a machine that reduces the number of colors used and executes an effect in a black-and-white mode.

However, since the number of colors was simply reduced, there was room for improvement in terms of improving the game entertainment. This was done in view of the above situation, and the purpose is to provide a game machine that can improve the game entertainment.

(1) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be variably displayed and controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player as a gaming machine according to another aspect for achieving the above object.
Specific display means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control that performs hold display or active display) capable of displaying specific display related to variable display on display means, and
It is provided with a change effect executing means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the process of 074AKS035) capable of executing a change effect that changes the display color of the specific display.
The display color of the specific display differs depending on the degree of expectation controlled by the advantageous state (for example, when the active display (including the case where it changes at the hold display stage) changes up to the "red" stage). , The variable display result will always be a "big hit", etc.),
There are a normal effect state and a specific effect state in which a transition from the normal effect state can be performed and the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than that of the normal effect state (for example, a monochrome effect is executed). In that case, the expectation that the variable display result will be a big hit is higher than when the monochrome effect is not executed),
The specific effect state is an effect state in which at least a part of the colors of the display target including the specific display displayed by the display means is displayed less than the normal effect state (for example, the effect). It is an effect of changing the target image displayed on the image display device 3 to a monochrome mode by performing monochrome output processing on the control board 12 side, and is used when displaying a pre-stored effect image. It is a production that displays the number of colors to be performed with a smaller number of colors than the normal production state),
When the change effect is executed by the change effect executing means in the normal effect state, the display color of the specific display is changed to a display color according to the degree of expectation controlled in the advantageous state. When the change effect is executed by the change effect means in the specific effect state, a common display color is used without changing the display color of the specific display regardless of the degree of expectation controlled by the advantageous state. (For example, during the specific effect state (when the monochrome effect flag is on), the monochrome output process is performed, so even if the change effect of the success mode is executed, it is held regardless of the jackpot expectation. The display and active display are displayed in "white". On the other hand, in the normal effect state in which the monochrome effect is not being executed, the display color is displayed according to the expected degree according to the display mode change pattern),
When shifting from the specific effect state to the normal effect state, the display color of the specific display is displayed in a display color according to the degree of expectation controlled in the advantageous state (for example, in a monochrome mode in step 074AKS032). The number of colors used for the target image that was the display target returns to the normal number of colors, and the hold display or active display whose display mode has changed due to the change effect is displayed in the changed display color, etc.),
It is characterized by that.

According to such a configuration, the expectation degree notification by color can be preferably performed, and the game entertainment can be improved.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above
The common display color is a display color that is displayed at a high rate before the change effect is executed in the normal effect state and the specific effect state (for example, it is displayed in "white").
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, the expectation degree notification by color can be preferably performed, and the game entertainment can be improved.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
Further equipped with a light emitting means (for example, a game effect lamp 9) capable of emitting light according to the effect being executed,
In the specific effect state, the light emitting means emits light with a number of colors corresponding to the number of colors to be displayed displayed by the display means (for example, in step 074AKS056, it corresponds to the number of colors of an image in a monochrome mode. (For example, the number of colors used),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to make it stand out that it is in a specific production state, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above.
In the specific effect state, the number of colors of the specific display and the background image displayed by the display means is reduced as compared with the normal effect state (for example, in the process of step 074AKS056, the monochrome effect is executed. By starting (monochrome output processing), the target image in monochrome mode such as hold display, active display, background image, etc. is displayed in monochrome mode),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to make it stand out that it is in a specific production state, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above.
In the specific effect state, the effect sound output in the normal effect state can be silently controlled, while when the change effect is executed in the specific effect state, the change effect is started. (For example, the output sound is muted during the specific effect state, and only the execution start sound is output and the success sound or the failure sound is not output for the change effect).
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to make it stand out that it is in a specific effect state, and it is possible to recognize the start of execution of the change effect.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above.
When the change effect is executed in the specific effect state and the display color of the specific display changes when the specific effect state is changed to the normal effect state, the specific display is displayed at the timing of the change. Outputs a change notification sound that notifies that the display color of is changed (for example, a success sound or a failure sound is output when the monochrome effect is completed).
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to easily recognize that the specific display has changed, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above.
The number of colors of special information that does not suggest the degree of expectation controlled in the advantageous state is not reduced even in the specific effect state (for example, the main board 11 is not an image that is drawn and displayed according to the degree of expectation). The image for displaying the information by the command etc. sent from the side of is not in monochrome mode, etc.),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, the content suggested by the special information can be recognized even in the specific production state, and it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the game interest.

In addition, the present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, and has a configuration other than the invention-specific matters together with the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention. It may be a thing.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of 1st special symbol process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure example of a pachinko game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure of the payout control board. It is a rear view which shows the pachinko game machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. (1) to (3) are explanatory views showing the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect, and (4) is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on. It is a timing diagram which shows the output period of a security signal. It is explanatory drawing which shows the notification example when the setting changing flag is set at the time of power-on. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on. (1) is an explanatory diagram showing control when a power cut occurs before the set value is fixed, and (2) shows control when a power cut occurs after the set value is fixed. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of each display information displayed on an image display apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the change effect determination process executed at the time of a start winning a prize. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining the final display mode of the active display, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining a change pattern of the active display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for determining the change pattern of the hold display. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect determination process executed at the start of fluctuation. (G) is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion, and (H1) and (H2) are expected degree notices used when executing the first setting suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for deciding whether or not the effect is executed, and (I1) and (I2) are for deciding whether or not the expectation notice effect is executed, which is used when the first setting suggestion effect is not executed. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table of, (J) is explanatory drawing which shows the table for determining the effect mode of the 2nd change effect. (K) is an explanatory diagram showing a winning combination determination table of the expectation degree advance notice effect used when executing the first setting suggestion effect, and (L) is used when not executing the first setting suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the establishment combination determination table of the expectation degree notice effect, and (M) is the explanatory diagram which shows the table for determining whether or not the second setting suggestion effect is executed. It is a time chart showing the execution timing of various effects. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode about various productions. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode about various productions. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the mini reel information. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing in the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the start winning prize determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the random value value determination processing at the time of winning. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variation pattern setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the variation pattern determination table according to the variable display result. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the command buffer at the time of a start winning. It is explanatory drawing explaining an example of the effect control command received on the effect control board side, and the processing content which is executed in the command analysis process according to the received effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the lookahead notice setting process. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the active display mode determination table. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the display mode change pattern determination table when the number of hold is 4. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the display mode change pattern determination table when the number of hold is 4. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the display mode change pattern determination table when the number of hold is 3. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the display mode change pattern determination table when the number of hold is 3. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the display mode change pattern determination table when the number of hold is 2. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a monochrome effect setting process. It is a figure which shows the determination example of whether or not the monochrome production is executed. It is a figure which shows the determination example of the end timing of a monochrome production. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the change effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect processing during variable display. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect operation when the monochrome effect and the change effect are executed. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect operation when the monochrome effect and the change effect are executed. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the lookahead notice setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the setting process such as a monochrome effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the display mode change pattern determination table and the active display change timing determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the change effect setting process. It is a figure which shows an example of the change pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect operation when the monochrome effect and the change effect are executed. It is a flowchart which shows a part of an effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows the lookahead notice setting process. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the display pattern of the lookahead notice effect. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the suggestion effect determination processing in the rear variable display. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio and the effect pattern of the effect to execute as a suggestion effect in the rear variable display. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the production pattern of the jackpot suggestion effect. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the production pattern of the setting suggestion effect. It is a flowchart which shows the suggestion effect decision processing in front part variable display. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the effect to be executed as a suggestion effect in the front variable display, the effect pattern, and the execution expectation degree. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the effect pattern of a character effect, the determination rate of the effect pattern of a timer effect, and the content of each effect pattern of a timer effect. It is a figure which shows the effect execution period in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the execution decision ratio as the suggestion effect in front variable display of a character effect and a timer effect in a modification, and the execution expectation degree of a setting suggestion effect. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the hold memory display and the effect image in the modification. It is a figure which shows the execution period of the setting suggestion effect in the variable display of a normal reach, a non-reach without shortening, and a non-shortening non-reach in a modification.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko gaming machine 1 etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting the game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area.

A variable display (also referred to as a special figure game) of a special symbol (also referred to as a special figure) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the right side of the game area). The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to be performed are provided. Each of these consists of 7-segment LEDs and the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Fluctuations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. When the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later is changed, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbols described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. The variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). In addition, the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variable display.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

Further, below the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, a right-handed display 26 for prompting a right-handed operation of aiming at the right side of the game area and performing a firing operation is provided. There is. The right-handed display 26 is composed of, for example, LEDs, and is lit and controlled by a game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) mounted on the main board 11 (see FIG. 2).

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effects images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variable display. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to as simply variable display.

Further, for example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying the hold display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is held is provided. In this example, the first hold display area 5A for displaying the hold display corresponding to the variable display of the first special figure and the second hold display for displaying the hold display corresponding to the variable display of the second special figure. A region 5B is provided. A display area for displaying an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5. Hold display and active display are collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

Further, on the right side of the image display device 5, a right-handed notification LED 37 for prompting a right-handed operation is provided. The right-handed notification LED 37 is lit and controlled by the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 (see FIG. 2).

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of stored items on hold. The number of reserved storages corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storages corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as a total reserved storage number.

Further, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided, and the first hold indicator 25A has the number of LEDs lit. The first hold storage number is displayed, and the second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LED lights.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A having a first starting winning opening is provided. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening is guided to the back surface of the game board 2 and is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A. When a game ball is detected by the first start port switch 22A, a predetermined number (1 piece) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

Further, a row of nails 19 is provided on the right side of the first start winning opening, so that the game ball flowing down from the right side of the game area does not enter the area provided with the first starting winning opening. Has been done. In this way, by providing the row of nails 19 for preventing the game ball flowing down from the right side of the game area from entering, the game ball is launched by aiming at the left side of the game area (so-called left-handed strike). The game ball can be won in the first starting winning opening only when the operation) is performed.

In this example, since the row of nails 19 is provided, the game ball can be won in the first start winning opening only when the left-handed operation is performed. Not limited to. For example, since the first start winning opening is provided on the left side of the game area, the game ball may be configured to be able to win the first starting winning opening only when the left-handed operation is performed, or the first starting winning opening may be won. A game ball may be configured to be able to win a prize in the first starting winning opening only when the left-handed operation is performed by providing the mouth on the left side of the game area and also providing the row of nails 19.

A passing gate 41 is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. The game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21.

Below the passing gate 41, a special variable winning ball device 7 that forms a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 extends in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state, and moves the plate-shaped bottom member formed as the bottom surface of the flow path through which the game ball flows in the front-rear direction to move the bottom surface. The large winning opening located below the member is changed into an open state (also referred to as an open state) in which the game ball can win a prize and a closed state (also referred to as a closed state) in which the game ball cannot win a prize. The special variable winning ball device 7 moves the bottom member forward in the jackpot game state that occurs when a specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. The bottom member is moved backward from the closed state in which the bottom member is moved forward toward the rear, and the opening control is executed so that the large winning opening, which is the winning area, is opened.

Below the special variable winning ball device 7, a special variable winning ball device 17 forming a special winning opening for small hits and a variable winning ball device 6B having a second starting winning opening are provided. FIG. As shown in, a special variable winning ball device 17 is arranged on the left side, and a variable winning ball device 6B is arranged adjacent to the right side thereof. The special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B extend in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state, and have a plate-shaped bottom member formed as the bottom surface of a flow path through which the game ball flows in the front-rear direction. By moving forward and backward, the game ball can be won in the special winning opening and the second starting winning opening located below the bottom member (also called the open state) and the game ball cannot be won in the closed state (closed state). Change to). The special variable winning ball device 17 has a bottom member in a small hit game state that occurs when a predetermined display result (small hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. The bottom member is moved backward from the closed state of being moved forward toward the front, and the opening control is executed to open the special winning opening which is the winning area. Further, the variable winning ball device 6B moves the bottom member backward from the closed state in which the bottom member is moved forward toward the front when the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 20. The opening control for opening the second starting winning opening, which is the winning area, is executed.

In this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed so as to have the same structure. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, since the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 7 is formed so as to be slightly inclined from the upper left to the lower right, the game ball dropped on the special variable winning ball device 7 is formed. If the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the closed state, it moves on the special variable winning ball device 7 from the upper left to the lower right, and falls on the variable winning ball device 6B below it.

Further, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 17 is slightly larger than the variable winning ball device 6B. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, since the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed in such a manner that the bottom surface member is slightly inclined from the upper right to the lower left, the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 17 are formed. The game ball on the winning ball device 6B moves from the upper right to the lower left on the special variable winning ball device 17 or the variable winning ball device 6B when the special variable winning ball device 17 or the variable winning ball device 6B is closed. Go. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, since the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are arranged adjacent to each other, the special variable winning ball device 7 is placed on the variable winning ball device 6B without winning a prize. If the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B is moved backward and the second starting winning opening is in the open state, the gaming ball wins the second starting winning opening and the special variable winning ball The game ball does not flow toward the device 17. On the other hand, if the second starting winning opening is not in the open state, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B and is guided toward the special variable winning ball device 17. At this time, if the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 17 is moved backward and the special winning opening is in the open state, the game ball wins the special winning opening. Further, if the special winning opening is not open, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 17 and falls toward the out opening as it is.

Further, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed with a plurality of regulatory pieces for reducing the flow speed of the game ball flowing down on the bottom surface member. There is. In this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are provided with a restricting piece, so that the game flows down from the upper left to the lower right or from the upper right to the lower left. The flow direction of the game ball is changed so that the ball meanders with the movement of the front-back component, and the time required for the flow is delayed as compared with the case without the regulation piece.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 17 is arranged on the left side and the variable winning ball device 6B is arranged on the right side. However, the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 17 are arranged. The bottom member of the ball device 6B is formed so as to gently incline from the upper right to the lower left, and when the bottom member is not retracted and is in the closed state, the variable winning ball device 6B is used as the special variable winning ball device. Since the game ball is configured to flow toward 17, in this sense, the variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the upstream side, and the special variable winning ball device 17 is provided on the downstream side. It can be said that it is.

A switch (first count switch 23) capable of detecting a winning game ball in the large winning opening is provided in the large winning opening. When a game ball is detected by the first count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information. Therefore, if the special variable winning ball device 7 is open-controlled and the large winning opening is opened, it is in an advantageous state for the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning ball device 7 is closed and controlled and the large winning opening is closed, the player cannot pass (enter) the game ball through the large winning opening to obtain the winning ball. It will be a disadvantage.

A switch (second count switch 24) capable of detecting a winning game ball in the special winning opening is provided in the special winning opening. When a game ball is detected by the second count switch 24, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information. Here, when the game ball passes (enters) the special winning opening opened in the special variable winning ball device 17, the number of winning balls is smaller than that when the game ball wins the large winning opening. For example, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball passes (enters) through other winning holes such as the first starting winning opening 1 and the second starting winning opening. Therefore, if the special variable winning ball device 17 is open-controlled and the special winning opening is opened, it is in an advantageous state for the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning ball device 17 is closed and controlled and the special winning opening is closed, the player cannot obtain the winning ball by passing (entering) the game ball through the special winning opening. It will be a disadvantage.

Further, in the second start winning opening, a second starting opening switch 22B capable of detecting a winning game ball in the second starting winning opening is provided. When a game ball is detected by the second start port switch 22B, a predetermined number (1 piece) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

Hereinafter, the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be collectively referred to as a starting winning opening or a starting opening.

In this pachinko gaming machine 1, a passing gate 41, a special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning opening), a variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening), and a special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening) Is provided on the right side of the game area, so when a big hit game or a KT state (so-called small hit time) is in progress, the player aims at the right side of the game area and launches (so-called right-handed operation). )I do.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four locations on the lower left and right sides of the game area), general winning openings 10 are provided, which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left side of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of 7-segment LEDs and the like, and performs variable display of the ordinary symbol as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal pattern game.

Above the normal symbol display 20, a normal symbol hold display 25C is provided. The normal figure hold indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is held, by the number of LEDs lit.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, since the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is executed based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41, the passing gate 41 plays a role as a normal starting area. However, even when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, the passage gate 41 also plays a role as an operating region because the game shifts to the jackpot game state based on the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 41. Therefore, the passing gate 41 is configured as a dual-purpose gate that plays the role of both a normal starting region and an operating region.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 3, and further, frame LEDs 9 for game effects are provided around the game area. ..

A movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided at a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2.

At the lower right position of the game machine frame 3, a ball striking operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball toward the game area by the striking ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, the game balls paid out as prize balls and the game balls rented by the predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. ) A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) is provided, in which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be gripped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the gaming state is the normal state, it is advantageous for the player to perform a firing operation (so-called left-handed operation) aiming at the left side of the gaming area. When the player performs a left-handed operation by rotating the ball striking handle 30 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol is displayed. The first special figure game by the device 4A is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (the start prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start winning cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In the first special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) as a confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "big hit". .. Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing". Even in the first special figure game, the small hit symbol may be stopped and displayed at an extremely low rate, and may be configured to be a "small hit".

After the display result in the first special figure game becomes "big hit", the game is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous to the player on condition that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined mode. The open state is a combination of the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also hereinafter referred to as an open upper limit period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is open in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until the maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the opening upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A jackpot type is set for "big hit". For example, prepare multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) of the big winning opening, and gaming states (normal state, probability change state (high probability state), KT state, high base state, etc.) after the big hit game state. , The jackpot type is set according to these. As the jackpot type, a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained or a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a probability variation state, a KT state, or a high base state according to the jackpot type.

In the probability variation state (probability fluctuation state), the probability variation control is executed in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state. The probabilistic state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is a state in which a “big hit” is likely to occur in addition to improving the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol.

In the KT state, KT control is executed, which is more likely to be a small hit than in the normal state. In this pachinko gaming machine 1, since a certain amount of prize balls can be obtained even in the small hit game state, the number of prize balls obtained is smaller than that in the big hit game state, but it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the high base state, the control (time reduction control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shorter than the normal state (time reduction state) is executed (time reduction state). Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening is also executed by improving the probability of becoming the game ball from the normal state. The high base state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

The probabilistic state, KT state, and high base state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. To do. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also called a number cut (number cut probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous for the player, a probability variation state, a KT state, and a high base state, and the display result in the special figure game is "big hit". The pachinko game machine 1 controls the same as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (when a predetermined return process is not executed after the power is turned on, for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in a state of being reset.

When the jackpot game is completed and the game state is controlled to the probability change state, the KT state, or the high base state, it is advantageous for the player to perform a firing operation (right-handed operation) aiming at the right side of the game area. When the player performs a right-handed strike operation on the ball striking operation handle 30 included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal drawing game is being executed (when the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 but the normal drawing game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if the normal symbol other than the normal symbol (the normal symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed as the confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When it becomes "per normal drawing", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In the second special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes "big hit". If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "small hit". Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the second special figure game becomes "big hit", the game is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous to the player on condition that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41. After the display result in the second special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the small hit game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed).

The game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probabilistic state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, and in addition to or instead of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or a point of the frame LED9. Equal / extinguishing, operation of the movable body 32, etc. may be performed.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is a mode in which is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative symbol which is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of a "probability change jackpot" that is controlled to a probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and displayed as a stop, and the probability change state is entered after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be aligned and displayed as a stop. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability pattern is in the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", the fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example," "is a predetermined small hit combination as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5. 1 3 5 ”etc.) Is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a“ small hit ”). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state), and when it becomes "small hit". , A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the variable display result of the decorative symbol is a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "missing", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination ("reach loss") that is not a jackpot combination. The fixed decorative symbol (also referred to as) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "reach loss").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution, and a look-ahead advance notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the look-ahead notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative symbol, and then the variable display is restarted to make one variable display look like a plurality of variable displays in a pseudo manner. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit medium effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type in the big hit game state having the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a high accuracy state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the player is currently in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high accuracy state and the low accuracy state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, an LED control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a game state, a small hit game state, a game state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It includes an output port for transmitting (a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 includes various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch (first count switch 23 and second count switch 24). )) Detect signals (such as a detection signal indicating that the game ball has passed or entered and the switch is turned on) are taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a solenoid 81, a solenoid 82, a signal for turning on the solenoid 83, etc.) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or a prize-winning door. It is transmitted to the solenoid 82 and the solenoid 83 for the special winning opening.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (a command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)) and a variation pattern used when executing a special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of winning, the number of stored memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing the program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed). (Including the decision etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes the effect based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, so that the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 further controls the sound designation signal (the signal that specifies the sound to be output) in order to output the sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the frame LED 9 and the right-handed notification LED 37. It is supplied to the substrate 13 or an LED signal (a signal for designating an LED lighting / extinguishing mode) is supplied to the LED control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The LED control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the frame LED 9 and the right-handed notification LED 37, drives the frame LED 9 and the right-handed notification LED 37 based on the LED signal, and is in a manner specified by the LED signal. The frame LED 9 and the right-handed notification LED 37 are turned on / off. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the LED.

The effect control CPU 120 executes audio output, LED lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, LED signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used to execute various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, LED signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. It is configured to include the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the LED control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operations on the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, for example. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the game machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop processing, a processing of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up to the RAM 102, a data protection processing of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, various timer states, etc.) for advancing the game, as well as the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (used by using an error detection code) and determines whether or not the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined by the parity bit or the checksum whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, the game state at the time when the power supply is stopped is restored, and if the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing recovery from the power failure to the effect control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, an effect control command that specifies the game state before the power failure that is backed up, and an effect control that specifies the display result of the special figure game that is being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may want to send a command. For these commands, the same commands that are set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command that specifies the time of recovery from the power failure, the image display device 5, for example, notifies that the image display device 5 has recovered from the power failure or is recovering from the power failure. Display the screen to do so. The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

After the restoration process or the initialization process is completed and the effect control command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to perform the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B, the first count switch 23, and the second count switch 24 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, the jackpot information (information indicating the number of times the jackpot has occurred) and the start information (starting) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information indicating the number of times of winning (information indicating the number of times of winning, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of probability change state, etc.) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes the first special symbol process process (step S25A). By executing the first special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the first special symbol game, control the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control the game state, and the like. (Details will be described later). Further, the CPU 103 executes the second special symbol process process (step S25B). By executing the second special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the second special symbol game, control the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control the game state, and the like. To. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is possible to simultaneously execute the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol in parallel.

Following the first special symbol process process and the second special symbol process process, the normal symbol process process is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of normal figure reservations is displayed by turning on the normal figure hold display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

Further, although the description is omitted in FIG. 4, in the game control timer interrupt process, a test terminal is a process for outputting a test signal so that the control state of the game machine can be confirmed outside the game machine. Processing is also executed. In the test terminal processing, the CPU 103 also controls to output a test signal (right-handed test signal) that can identify the period during which the right-handed operation is performed. Specifically, in the test terminal processing, the CPU 103 controls to output a right-handed test signal during the big hit game, during the small hit game based on the variation display of the second special symbol, and during the KT state. On the other hand, in the test terminal processing, the CPU 103 does not control to output a right-handed test signal during the small hit game based on the variation display of the first special symbol.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25A shown in FIG. 4 as the first special symbol process process. In this first special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes the first start winning determination process (step S101A).

In the first start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning in the first starting winning opening, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the first hold storage number is executed. When a start prize is generated in the first start prize opening, a random value for determining a display result (including a jackpot type) and a fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as hold information in the first hold storage buffer provided in the RAM 102. Will be done. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the first hold storage number, transmission for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination results such as the occurrence of the start winning prize, the first hold memory number, and the look-ahead determination on the effect control board 12. The settings are made. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is controlled by the main board 11 by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 4, for example, after the first special symbol process process is completed. It is transmitted to the substrate 12.

After executing the first start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110A to S121A according to the value of the first special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110A to S121A) of the first special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The first special symbol normal process in step S110A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this first special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reserved information and the like. Further, in the first special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the first special symbol or the decorative symbol is set as "big hit" or "small hit" or "big hit" is set based on the random value for determining the display result. The jackpot type of the case is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the first special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. .. After that, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the first special symbol normal processing ends.

When making various determinations based on the random number value, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (a table in which the determination value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the determination result) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The first variation pattern setting process in step S111A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is “1”. In this first fluctuation pattern setting process, a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns are set using random values for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". It includes processing to decide which one to use. In the first variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the first variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. The content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.) is specified, and it is also called a variable display pattern.

The first special symbol variation process in step S112A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is “2”. In this first special symbol variation process, the process of setting the first special symbol to be varied in the first special symbol display device 4A and the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the first special symbol are measured. Processing to be done is included. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol reaches the special symbol fluctuation time, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the first special symbol variation processing ends. To do.

In this example, since the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, for example, the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) is performed. When the variable display of the special symbol is being displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol may result in a small hit and be controlled by the small hit game. In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) determines whether or not the small hit game is in progress (specifically, the value of the second special figure process flag is the second small hit). (Determining whether or not the value corresponds to the pre-opening process to the second small hit end process), and if the small hit game is in progress, the value of the first special figure process flag corresponds to the first special symbol variation process. The value is not changed, and the value of the first special symbol process flag can be updated to a value corresponding to the next first special symbol stop process if the small hit game is not in progress. By performing such control, the variation display of the first special symbol is interrupted during the small hit game based on the variation display of the second special symbol, and the variation display of the first special symbol is restarted after the end of the small hit game. It is controlled to do. Not limited to such control, for example, during the small hit game based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, the process of measuring the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol is interrupted (timer). It may be configured to suspend the update).

Further, for example, the small hit ending period as the small hit end processing period may be configured to be different depending on the game state. For example, if the variable display of the first special symbol is interrupted in the normal state, the suspension period of the variable display of the first special symbol becomes long, and the execution period and the suspension period of the variable display of the first special symbol become longer. If the difference becomes large, it is necessary to absorb the interruption period by stopping the shaking of the decorative pattern, which gives the player a sense of discomfort. Therefore, in the normal state, it is desirable to make the small hit ending period shorter than the KT state (first KT state, second KT state). In this case, for example, the small hit ending period may be 0.5 seconds in the normal state, whereas the small hit ending period may be 3 seconds in the KT state.

Further, in the case of the above configuration, for example, in the first KT state, it is practically difficult for the game ball to win a prize in the small hit control, and no particular effect is performed. Therefore, the small hit ending period is shorter than in the second KT state. It may be configured to do so. On the other hand, in the second KT state, the game ball is easy to win in the small hit control, and the effect of emphasizing the small hit control is executed. Therefore, the small hit ending period may be longer than in the first KT state. .. In this case, for example, the small hit ending period may be 0.5 seconds in the first KT state, whereas the small hit ending period may be 3 seconds in the second KT state.

Further, regarding the small hit fanfare period as the small hit opening pretreatment period, the length of the period may be different depending on the game state, as in the above-mentioned small hit ending period.

The first special symbol stop process in step S113A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is “3”. In this first special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A stops the fluctuation of the first special symbol, and the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). The process of making settings is included. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "9". If the display result is "missing", the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "miss", the game state is also updated when the probability change state, the KT state, or the high base state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. .. When the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated, the first special symbol stop process ends.

The process of waiting for passage through the first gate in step S114A is executed when the value of the fourth special figure process flag is “4”. In this first gate passage waiting process, control is performed to wait for the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 41. When the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 41 is detected, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "5".

The first jackpot release preprocessing in step S115A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is “5”. In this first big hit pre-opening process, based on the fact that the display result is "big hit", etc., the process of starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state and setting the big winning opening to be open, etc. It is included. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the open upper limit period for keeping the big winning opening in the open state and the upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to which type of jackpot is used. When these settings are completed, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "6", and the first jackpot release pre-processing ends.

The process during opening of the first jackpot in step S116A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is “6”. In this process during the opening of the first big hit, the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 23, and the like are used. , The process of determining whether or not it is time to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state is included. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "7" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. Then, the processing during the opening of the first jackpot is completed.

The first jackpot release post-processing in step S117A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is “7”. In this first big hit post-opening process, there is a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round that opens the big winning opening has reached the set maximum number of executions, and a big hit when the maximum number of executions is reached. It includes processing to make settings for ending the game state. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "6", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the first special figure Figure The value of the process flag is updated to "8". When the value of the first special figure process flag is updated, the post-processing after opening the first jackpot ends.

The first jackpot end process of step S118A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is “8”. The first jackpot end process corresponds to a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect action for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting probabilistic change control, KT control, and high-base control. When such a setting is made, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the first jackpot end process ends.

The first small hit release preprocessing in step S119A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is “9”. This first small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the special winning opening to be open in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". .. At this time, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the first small hit release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the first small hit in step S120A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is “10”. In this first small hit opening process, the process of measuring the elapsed time since the special winning opening is opened, and the timing of returning the special winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time, etc. It includes processing to determine whether or not it has become. When the special winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "11", and the process during the opening of the first small hit is completed.

The first small hit end process of step S121A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is “11”. The first small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the first small hit end process ends.

The process executed in the second special symbol process process (step S25B) is the same as the process executed in the first special symbol process process (step S25A). That is, in the first special symbol process process described with reference to FIG. 5, if "first" is read as "second", the second special symbol process process will be explained. Further, each random number value extracted by the first start winning determination process of the second special symbol process process (step S25B) is stored in the second hold storage buffer provided in the RAM 102 as hold information.

In this example, the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel. Therefore, for example, the transition to the second special symbol variation process is performed to change the second special symbol. When the display is in progress, a small hit may occur in the variable display of the first special symbol, and the game may be controlled by a small hit game. In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) determines whether or not the small hit game is in progress (specifically, the value of the first special figure process flag is the first small hit). (Determining whether or not the value corresponds to the pre-opening process to the first small hit end process), and if the small hit game is in progress, the value of the second special figure process flag corresponds to the second special symbol variation process. The value is not changed, and the value of the second special symbol process flag can be updated to a value corresponding to the next second special symbol stop process if the small hit game is not in progress. By performing such control, the variation display of the second special symbol is interrupted during the small hit game based on the variation display of the first special symbol, and the variation display of the second special symbol is restarted after the end of the small hit game. It is controlled to do. Not limited to such control, for example, during the small hit game based on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, the process of measuring the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation of the second special symbol is interrupted (timer It may be configured to suspend the update).

Regarding the small hit control based on the variation display of the second special symbol, the length of the small hit fanfare period and the small hit ending period may be different depending on the game state.

(Main operation of the effect control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. When the effect control board 12 receives the power supply voltage from the power source board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and press the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). In addition, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process processing or the like. Turn on the provided receive flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation in the decorative light emitting body such as the frame LED 9 and the decorative LED, and the driving of the movable body 32. Controls such as operation to operate various production devices are performed. In addition, the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices is determined, determined, set, and the like according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the lookahead advance notice setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead advance notice setting process, for example, determination, determination, and setting for executing the look-ahead advance notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to, for example, the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command for designating the start of the variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, their modes, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is completed. The display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. Or, driving the movable body 32, outputting voice or sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and commanding the LED control board 14 (illumination signal). Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the frame LED 9 and the decorative LED according to the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol that is the display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command for specifying the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set content. .. Further, in the small hit middle effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the small hit game state is terminated, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. Update to a certain "5" and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The jackpot effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect contents in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set contents. Further, in the big hit middle effect process, for example, the value of the effect control process flag is set to the value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the big hit game state. Update to 7 ”and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process ends.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but the game medium is enclosed and a score is given based on the occurrence of the prize. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko game machine 1 is shown as a game machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player If the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by the detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The execution mode of the game is not limited to the one executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In addition, in this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a proportion of "0%" and the other may have a proportion of "100%" or less than "100%".

[Explanation of feature 21TM]
Next, the feature unit 21TM will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, and a terminal board (information output board) 21TM016 as shown in FIG. 8-1. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, a launch control board, and an interface board are arranged on the back surface of the game board 2 and the like in the pachinko game machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 2 described above, the main board 11 includes a first start port switch 22A, a second start port switch 22B, a first special symbol display device 4A, a second special symbol display device 4B, and the like. Various components are connected, and various effect devices such as speakers 8L, 8R, and frame LED 9 are connected to the effect control board 12, but these are omitted in FIG. 8-1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and as shown in FIG. 8-3, is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state of being housed in the board case 21TM201, and allows the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Various circuits for control are installed. The main board 11 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board including a random number setting function used in a special drawing game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like arranged at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12. , It has a function to output and transmit a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, and a function to output various information to the hall management computer. Further, the main board 11 controls lighting / extinguishing of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to control the lighting / extinguishing of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The variable display of a predetermined display symbol, such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol 20 and controlling the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 20 by controlling the lighting / extinguishing / coloring of the normal symbol display 20. It also has a control function.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-3, the main board 11 is provided with a display monitor 21TM029 that can be visually recognized from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the display monitor 21TM029 is provided with various winning information related to winning. It also has a function to display. A display changeover switch 21TM030 is provided on the left side of the display monitor 21TM029, and the information displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 can be switched by operating the display changeover switch 21TM030.

In addition to the detection signals from the game control microcomputer 100 and various switches for detecting the game ball, various signals such as a power cutoff signal, a clear signal, and a reset signal are taken into the main board 11 to capture the game control microcomputer. The switch circuit 110 to be transmitted to 100 and the information output circuit 112 for outputting various signals such as security signals from the terminal board 21TM016 are mounted.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-3, the main substrate 11 shown in FIG. 8-1 is enclosed in a substrate case 21TM201 made of a transparent synthetic resin material, and the display monitor 21TM029 is in the center of the main substrate 11. (For example, 7 segments) are arranged, and a display changeover switch 21TM030 is arranged on the right side of the display monitor 21TM029. The display monitor 21TM029 and the display changeover switch 21TM030 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the main board 11 is visually recognized. A lock switch 21TM051 (see FIG. 8-1) for switching to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, is provided in the lower center of the back surface of the main board 11. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the gaming machine frame 3 is not opened, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized is the back surface side of the gaming board 2 when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened. This is the front when visually recognizing, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

In addition, the main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) has each winning opening (large winning opening, second starting winning opening, first starting winning opening, first to fourth general winning openings, hereinafter, "entrance area". The number of game balls entering the (also referred to as) is totaled, and various prize information such as the ratio and the combination ratio based on the total is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029, and these prize information is displayed. As a result, various winning information such as the ratio and the role ratio after installation in the amusement park can be confirmed. That is, on the manufacturer side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is usual to design the gaming board surface so that the gaming ball enters the general winning opening (passing the test) at a predetermined frequency. In addition, when conducting the test, it is confirmed whether or not the game ball has entered the general winning opening at a predetermined frequency. Further, even after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed, it is confirmed what kind of adjustment is being made, and as a result of the adjustment, whether the gaming ball has entered the general winning opening as often as designed. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to recognize what kind of adjustment has been made in the pachinko gaming machine 1 after installation.

In addition, the power supply board is enclosed in a board case made of a permeable synthetic resin material, and set values such as a jackpot winning probability (ball output rate), which will be described later, are changed in the lower right side of the back surface of the power supply board. A clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 and a power supply switch 21TM055 that function as setting switches for the purpose are provided. By operating the power switch 21TM055 in a state where the power supply voltage is not supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, a clerk of the game hall or the like determines the main board 11, the effect control board 12, the payout control board 21TM037, and the like. The operating voltage of is supplied. Further, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated at the timing when the power switch 21TM055 is operated, a clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100, and the initialization process (RAM clear) described later is performed. Will be executed. By arranging the power switch 21TM055 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 close to each other on the same power supply board, it is easy to perform the power-on operation and the initialization operation.

The lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and cannot be operated unless the gaming machine frame 3 that can be opened by a predetermined key operation is opened. Only the clerk who has the specified key can operate it. Further, since the lock switch 21TM051 requires key operation, only the clerk who has the key to operate the lock switch 21TM051 can operate the lock switch 21TM051 among the clerk of the game store. Further, the lock switch 21TM051 is a switch capable of executing an ON / OFF switching operation by a predetermined key, but the switching operation can be executed and an operation different from the switching operation (for example, a pushing operation) is executed. It may be a possible switch.

The lock switch 21TM051 can maintain an ON state or an OFF state. That is, the lock switch 21TM051 can maintain the ON state or the OFF state even if no force is applied by a clerk of the amusement park or the like. Further, the lock switch 21TM051 has a configuration in which the key can be inserted and removed only in the OFF state. According to such a configuration, the game hall clerk or the like must turn off the lock switch 21TM051 in order to collect the key, so that the game hall clerk or the like leaves the lock switch 21TM051 in the ON state. It can be prevented from being lost.

As shown in FIG. 8-3, in the lower part on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the gaming balls that have won the winning openings and the gaming balls that have entered the out openings are discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A nozzle (discharge port) is provided, and a discharge port switch 21TM070 for detecting a game ball discharged from the pachinko gaming machine 1 (detecting a launched game ball) is provided in the nozzle. ing. The outlet switch 21TM070 is connected to the switch circuit 110.

The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control an image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control sound output from speakers 8L and 8R, a frame LED 9 and decorations. It includes LED control commands used to control the lighting operation of the LED.

FIG. 8-2 is a block diagram showing components related to payout, such as the payout control board 21TM037 and the ball payout device 21TM097. As shown in FIG. 8-2, the payout control board 21TM037 is equipped with a payout control microcomputer 21TM370 including a payout control CPU 21TM371. In this embodiment, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is a one-chip microcomputer and has at least a built-in RAM. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370, RAM (not shown), ROM (not shown) containing the payout control program, the I / O port, and the like constitute the payout control board 21TM037. That is, the payout control board 21TM037 is realized by the payout control CPU 21TM371, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 having RAM and ROM, and the I / O port. Further, the I / O port may be built in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

The detection signals from the ball-out switch 21TM187, the full tank switch 21TM048, and the payout number count switch 21TM301 are input to the I / O port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. In this embodiment, the detection signal from the payout number count switch 21TM301 is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 and then output to the main board 11 via the I / O port 21TM372a and the output circuit 21TM373B. ..

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-2, the payout control board 21TM037 has a game machine frame opening sensor that detects the opening of the game machine frame 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2, and can open and close the front surface of the game board 2. A door frame opening sensor for detecting the opening of the glass door frame 3a covering the glass door frame 3a and a game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 equipped with the sensor are connected, and various abnormalities are found based on the detection signals output from these sensors. It also has a function to determine the occurrence of (error). The detection signal when the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected and the detection signal when the opening of the glass door frame 3a is detected are input to different terminals, so that the payout control microcomputer is used. The 21TM370 can distinguish between the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a.

Further, the detection signal from the payout motor position sensor 21TM295 is input to the I / O port 21TM372e of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. The payout motor position sensor 21TM295 is a sensor consisting of a light emitting element (LED) and a light receiving element for detecting the rotational position of the payout motor 21TM289, and is used to detect that the game ball is clogged, that is, so-called ball biting. .. In the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 mounted on the payout control board 21TM037, the detection signal from the ball out switch 21TM187 indicates the ball out state, or the detection signal from the full tank switch 21TM048 indicates the full tank state. Then, the ball payout process is stopped.

Further, when the detection signal from the full tank switch 21TM048 indicates a full tank state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is at a low level with respect to the launch board 21TM090 in order to stop the ball launch from the ball launcher. Outputs a full tank signal. The launch motor signal to the launch motor 21TM094 output by the AND circuit 21TM091 of the launch board 21TM090 is transmitted from the launch board 21TM090 to the launch motor 21TM094. The full tank signal from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is input to one of the input sides of the AND circuit 21TM091 mounted on the launch board 21TM090, and the drive signal from the drive signal generation circuit 21TM092 (for driving the launch motor 21TM094). The signal, which serves to supply power from the power supply board), is input to the other side of the input side of the AND circuit 21TM091. Then, the launch motor signal of the AND circuit 21TM091 is input to the launch motor 21TM094. That is, while the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 outputs the full tank signal, the output of the launch motor signal to the launch motor 21TM094 is stopped.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has a built-in serial communication circuit 21TM380 for inputting / outputting (transmitting / receiving) a signal by serial communication with the game control microcomputer 100. In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 are connected to each other via the serial communication circuit 21TM505 and 21TM380 between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. In order to confirm, signals (prize ball request signal, received ACK signal) are exchanged (transmitted / received) at regular intervals (for example, 1 second). That is, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a signal for confirming the connection (a prize ball request signal in this embodiment) at regular intervals via the serial communication circuit 21TM505, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When receiving the prize ball request signal from the game control microcomputer 100, transmits a signal (received ACK signal) notifying the fact to the game control microcomputer 100. In this embodiment, by superimposing specific data on the prize ball request signal and the reception ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 are performed at the timing of transmitting and receiving the prize ball request signal and the reception ACK signal. It is configured to exchange specific data with and from. For example, when a prize is awarded, the game control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out by differently setting a predetermined bit of the prize ball request signal, and the prize for which the setting is made. The ball request signal is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Then, when the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 finishes the prize ball payout operation, the data indicating the end of the prize ball is set by changing a predetermined bit of the received ACK signal, and the received ACK signal with the setting is played. It is transmitted to the control microcomputer 100. In addition, when a predetermined error (error such as ball lending, full tank, out of ball, etc.) occurs, the data indicating the content of the error is set by changing the predetermined bit of the received ACK signal, and the setting is set. The received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 transmits a prize ball information signal indicating the number of prize balls paid out and a ball rental number signal indicating the number of balls to be rented to a terminal board (external terminal board for frame and external terminal board for board) via the output port 21TM372b. (Including and) Output to 21TM160. A driver circuit is installed outside the output port 21TM372b, but the description is omitted in FIG. 8-2.

Further, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 outputs an error signal to the error display LED 21TM374 by the 7-segment LED via the output port 21TM372c. Further, a signal for instructing lighting / extinguishing is output to the prize ball LED 21TM053 and the ball burnout LED 21TM054 via the output port 21TM372b. A detection signal from the error release switch 21TM375 for canceling the error state is input to the input port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037. The error release switch 21TM375 is used to release the error state by software reset.

Further, the drive signal from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 to the payout motor 21TM289 is transmitted to the payout motor 21TM289 in the payout mechanism portion of the ball payout device 21TM097 via the output port 21TM372a and the relay board 21TM072. A driver circuit (motor drive circuit) is installed outside the output port 21TM372a, but the description is omitted in FIG. 8-3.

The card unit 21TM050 installed adjacent to the game machine is equipped with a microcomputer for controlling the card unit. Further, the card unit 21TM050 is provided with a usable indicator lamp, a connecting stand direction indicator, a card insertion indicator lamp, and a card insertion slot. The frequency display LED 21TM060, the ball lending LED 21TM061, the ball lending switch 21TM062, and the return switch 21TM063 are connected to the interface board (relay board) 21TM066.

From the interface board 21TM066 to the card unit 21TM050, a ball lending switch signal indicating that the ball lending switch 21TM062 has been operated and a return switch signal indicating that the return switch 21TM063 has been operated are given to the card unit 21TM050 according to the operation of the player. .. Further, the card unit 21TM050 gives the interface board 21TM066 a card balance display signal indicating the balance of the prepaid card and a ball lending availability display signal. Between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037, a connection signal (VL signal), a unit operation signal (BRDY signal), a ball lending request signal (BRQ signal), a ball lending completion signal (EXS signal), and a pachinko machine operation signal ( The PRDY signal) is transmitted and received via the input port 21TM372f and the output port 21TM372d. An interface board 21TM066 is interposed between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 8-2, signals such as the connection signal (VL signal) are transmitted and received between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037 via the interface board 21TM066.

When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 mounted on the payout control board 21TM037 outputs a PRDY signal to the card unit 21TM050. Further, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a VL signal when the power is turned on. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 determines the connected / unconnected state of the card unit 21TM050 based on the input state of the VL signal. When the card is accepted by the card unit 21TM050, the ball lending switch is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit control microcomputer outputs the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037. When a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037.

Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 raises the XS signal for the card unit 21TM050, and when it detects the fall of the BRQ signal from the card unit 21TM050, it drives the payout motor 21TM289 and sends a predetermined number of rental balls to the player. Pay out. Then, when the payout is completed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 shuts down the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050. After that, on the condition that the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 is not in the ON state, the prize ball payout control is executed when the payout command signal is received from the game control microcomputer 100.

The power supply voltage AC24V used in the card unit 21TM050 is supplied from the payout control board 21TM037. That is, the power supply from the power supply board to the card unit 21TM050 is performed via the payout control board 21TM037 and the interface board 21TM066. In this example, a fuse for protecting the card unit 21TM050 is provided in the AC24V power supply line for the card unit 21TM050 arranged in the interface board 21TM066, and a voltage equal to or higher than a predetermined voltage is supplied to the card unit 21TM050. Is prevented.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a configuration in which the winning probability (ball output rate) of a big hit changes according to a set value. More specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing described later, the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) is changed by using the display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the set value. .. The set value is composed of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest ball output rate, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the ball output rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is.

8-4 (A) to 8-4 (F) are explanatory views showing a display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with the MR1 is set. In each display result determination table, the variable special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the case where the first special symbol is the target of the variable display and the variable special figure designation buffer is 2 (second). That is, a determination value for a big hit is set for each of the cases where the second special symbol is the target of the variable display.

As shown in FIG. 8-4 (A), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 1 is used, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol is the target of the variable display. If it is, the jackpot will be won with a lower probability (1/300) than when the set values are "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6". ing. Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even when is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/300) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (B), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 2 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/280) than in some cases. Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even when is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/280) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (C), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 3 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/280) than when it is "2". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even when is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/280) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (D), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 4 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/250) than in the case of "2" and "3". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even when is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/250) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (E), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 5 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/235) than in the case of "2", "3", and "4". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even when is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/235) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (F), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 5 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/220) than in the case of "2", "3", "4", and "5". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is the target of the variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/220) as the case where the first special symbol is the target of the variable display.

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and the value of MR1 corresponds to any of the jackpots shown in FIGS. 8-4 (A) to 8-4 (F). If it matches the hit determination value, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (big hit A to big hit F). That is, the winning of the big hit is determined with the probability according to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIGS. 8-4 (A) to (F) indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit. Further, determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control the big hit game state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a big hit design.

Further, in this embodiment, the CPU 103 uses the display result determination tables shown in FIGS. 8-4 (A) to (F) to determine whether or not to make a big hit, but the big hit determination table is used. The jackpot is determined separately by using a common table for the case of the variable display of the first special symbol and the case of the variable display of the second special symbol regardless of the variable special symbol designation buffer. May be good.

In this embodiment, a total of 6 setting values, 1 to 6, are provided as setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to this. The set value that can be set in may be 2, 3, 4, 5, or 7 or more.

(Setting suggestion production)
The effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting command can suggest the set value by executing the effect according to the set value specified by the setting command. For example, it is possible to suggest the set value to the player by making the mode of the ending effect executed when the jackpot game state ends different according to the designated set value. 8-5 (1), (2), and (3) show an example of the setting suggestion effect. FIG. 8-5 (1) shows an example in which the ending image in the "sunny" mode is selected on the jackpot end screen, and FIG. 8-5 (2) shows an example in which the ending screen in the "cloudy" mode is selected on the jackpot end screen. For example, FIG. 8-5 (3) shows an example in which the ending image of the "rain" mode is selected on the jackpot end screen. Further, FIG. 8-5 (4) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a table for determining the mode of the setting suggestion effect based on the set value specified by the setting command.

The CPU 103 transmits a setting command for specifying a set value to the effect control CPU 120. Further, when the jackpot game state ends, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command for executing the ending effect on the image display device 5 to the effect control CPU 120. By storing the set value specified by the received setting command in the RAM 102, the effect control CPU 120 can determine the mode of the ending effect based on the stored set value. For example, based on the effect control command transmitted when the jackpot game state ends, the image display device 5 stores the characters (“BONUS end” character) notifying that the jackpot game state has ended. It is possible to display the ending image of the mode (sunny mode, cloudy mode, rain mode) determined based on the set value.

In the table shown in FIG. 8-5 (4), when the setting value specified by the setting command is "1, 2", "3, 4", and "5, 6". When the mode of the setting suggestion effect is determined to be the "sunny" mode shown in FIG. 8-5 (1), the mode is determined to be the "cloudy" mode shown in FIG. 8-5 (2), and FIG. When determining the "rain" mode shown in 5 (3), the determination value of is assigned.

When the setting value specified by the received setting command is "1" or "2", the effect control CPU 120 suggests setting the "sunny" mode shown in (1) at a low rate (for example, 20%). Decided to execute the effect (ending effect), and decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "cloudy" mode shown in (2) at a medium ratio (for example, 40%), and medium. (For example, 40%), it is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "rain" mode shown in (3). Further, when the set value specified by the received setting command is "3" or "4", the effect control CPU 120 has a low ratio (for example, 20%) of the "sunny" mode shown in (1). Decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect), and decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "cloudy" mode shown in (2) at a high rate (for example, 50%). It is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "rain" mode shown in (3) at the ratio of (for example, 30%). Further, when the set value specified by the received setting command is "5" or "6", the effect control CPU 120 has a high ratio (for example, 50%) of the "sunny" mode shown in (1). Decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect), and decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "cloudy" mode shown in (2) at a low rate (for example, 20%). It is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "rain" mode shown in (3) at the ratio of (for example, 30%).

In this way, by making the determination ratio of each mode of the setting suggestion effect different according to the set value, the player becomes interested in how the setting suggestion effect is executed, and the setting suggestion is performed. It is possible to improve the interest of the production. In this example, the player becomes interested in how the ending effect executed when the jackpot game state ends is executed, and in particular, the ending effect is executed in the "sunny" mode. You will expect it to be done.

(Processing when power is turned on)
Next, the power-on processing will be described.
8-6 to 8-8 are diagrams showing an example of processing executed by the game control microcomputer 100 when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on.

As shown in FIG. 8-6, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 checks the data in the backup RAM area after the power is turned on (step S21TM4010). This process performs a parity check as a data check.

If the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 matches a normal value, for example, 0 to 5. Is confirmed (step S21TM4020). In this example, as the setting values stored in the setting value storage area, six numbers 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 are set as regular values, and six levels of setting values having different jackpot probabilities are provided. ing. The setting value 0 in this example corresponds to the setting value 1 shown in FIG. 8-4 and the like described above, and the setting value 1 in this example corresponds to the setting value 2 shown in FIG. 8-4 and the like described above, and the setting in this example. The value 2 corresponds to the set value 3 shown in FIG. 8-4 and the like described above, the set value 3 in this example corresponds to the set value 4 shown in FIG. 8-4 and the like described above, and the set value 4 in this example is described above. It corresponds to the set value 5 shown in FIG. 8-4 and the like, and the set value 5 in this example corresponds to the set value 6 shown in FIG. 8-4 and the like described above.

Here, in this example, when the pachinko game machine 1 is shipped from the game machine maker (before it is installed in the game hall), the value having the lowest jackpot probability among the above regular values is stored in the set value storage area. It is assumed that (0 in this example) is stored. If the data in the set value storage area is corrupted, it may not be a regular value. If the set value is a normal value (YES in step S21TM4020), it is confirmed whether or not the setting changing flag is set (step S21TM4030). The setting changing flag is set when the mode shifts to the setting change mode described later (step S21TM4580), and is cleared when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state (step S21TM4720).

If the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM4040).

If the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4040), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM4050). The value of the RAM clear flag is a value indicating whether or not it is decided to execute RAM clear (initialization of the gaming state), and if the value is 1, it is determined that RAM clear is executed. It shows that it was done. In this example, the RAM clear is not actually executed when the RAM clear flag is set to 1, and when the setting change mode is controlled, the RAM clear is executed after the processing related to the setting change mode is completed. Will be done.

The area where the value of the RAM clear flag is stored is not included in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when the power is cut off, the value of the RAM clear flag is not retained, and the value of the RAM clear flag at the time of power restoration is 0 (the initial value is not set). Note that the notification that the game state is initialized may be performed before being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and as will be described later, after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed. It may be done.

On the other hand, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4040), the CPU 103 shifts to step S21TM4060.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state (step S21TM4060). Here, as described above, the open state of the game machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected by the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300, and the game machine frame / door frame open. From the sensor 21TM300, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 outputs a detection signal indicating that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected and a detection signal indicating that the open state of the glass door frame 3a has been detected. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 recognizes that the open state of the game machine frame 3 has been detected, it notifies the game control microcomputer 100 that the open state of the game machine frame 3 has been detected. When it recognizes that the open state of the glass door frame 3a has been detected, the game control microcomputer 100 is notified that the open state of the glass door frame 3a has been detected, so that the game control microcomputer 100 side. The open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be individually recognized.

The game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the glass door frame 3a, which is a detection signal indicating that the open state of the game machine frame 3 has been detected, to the game control microcomputer 100. When the configuration is such that a detection signal indicating that is output (that is, when the game control microcomputer 100 includes the game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300), the game control microcomputer 100 has these. By inputting the detection signal, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be individually recognized.

When the CPU 103 recognizes the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM4060), it confirms whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21TM4070). .. Then, if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4070), the process proceeds to the process after step S21TM4510 related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode shown in FIG. 8-7. When the mode is changed to the setting change mode, the set value can be confirmed and changed, and when the mode is changed to the setting confirmation mode, the set value can be confirmed.

That is, when the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), the set value is a normal value (YES in step S21TM4020), and the power is not cut off during the setting change (YES). The set value is changed and / on the condition that the game machine frame 3 is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4060) and the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4070). Or confirmation is possible. On the other hand, if the gaming machine frame 3 is in the closed state (NO in step S21TM4060) or the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4070), either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. The process proceeds to step S21TM4760 (transmission of setting command) described later without being controlled by the mode.

In the present embodiment, in order to make it possible to confirm the set value (setting confirmation mode) although the change of the set value is not permitted, (1) the game machine frame 3 is in the open state, and (2) ) Two conditions are required that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state. When it is confirmed by the determination processing of step S21TM4060 and step S21TM4070 that all of the conditions (1) and (2) are satisfied, the CPU 103 can confirm the set value (setting confirmation). It is possible to shift to mode). Further, in addition to these conditions (1) and (2), the RAM clear flag is set based on the determination that (3) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES). As will be described later, it is possible to shift to a state in which the set value can be changed (setting change mode), provided that the setting value is changed.

As described above, the lock switch 21TM051 that must be operated to confirm or change the set value is provided on the back side of the game board 2, and must be operated unless the game machine frame 3 is opened. I can't. If the lock switch 21TM051 is operated even though the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, there is an abnormality in the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, or something is wrong. There is a possibility that the set value is being confirmed or changed by means. Since it is inappropriate to allow confirmation or change of the set value in such a state, in the present embodiment, when the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to the setting confirmation mode. And it is not controlled by any of the setting change modes.

In the present embodiment, as the condition (1), when either the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode. Although it is controllable, it is not limited to such a form, and even if the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, if the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the setting confirmation mode and the setting change mode It may not be controlled by any of the above.

On the other hand, when the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized in step S21TM4060 (NO in step S21TM4060), that is, the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both. When it is in the closed state, the process proceeds to step S21TM4760 (transmission of the setting command) described later without being controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Further, when it is confirmed in step S21TM4070 that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4070), it is not controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and step S21TM4760 described later is not controlled. Move to (Send setting command).

In the data check of the backup RAM area (step S21TM4010), if the check result is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010), the CPU 103 shifts to step S21TM4120. Further, in the check of the value stored in the set value storage area (step S21TM4020), if the regular value (0 to 5) is not stored in the set value storage area (NO in step S21TM4020), the CPU 103 , Step S21TM4120. Further, in the check of the setting changing flag (step S21TM4030), if it is confirmed that the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the CPU 103 shifts to step S21TM4120.

Here, even if a regular value (0 to 5) is stored in the set value storage area, if a part of the backup RAM area is damaged, it is determined as NO in step S21TM4010. Then, the process proceeds to step S21TM4120. That is, if there is a possibility that the value stored in the set value storage area is inappropriate, the setting is changed based on the setting change mode transition condition (step S21TM4120 to step S21TM4140 described later) being satisfied. It will be controlled by the mode. Further, even if the data check in the backup RAM area (step S21TM4010) is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), the normal value (0 to 5) is not stored in the set value storage area. (NO in step S21TM4020), the setting change mode is controlled based on the condition that the setting change mode transition condition (step S21TM4120 to step S21TM4140 described later) is satisfied. Further, when the setting change mode is controlled when the power is cut off last time, the setting change mode is controlled based on the condition of the setting change mode transition condition (step S21TM4120 to step S21TM4140 described later) is satisfied. It will be.

In step S21TM4120, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state (step S21TM4120). When the CPU 103 recognizes the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM4120), it confirms whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21TM4130). ..

If the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4130), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM4140).

If the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4140), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM4150). Then, the processes after step S21TM4510 related to the setting change mode shown in FIG. 8-7 are executed.

On the other hand, when the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized in step S21TM4120 (NO in step S21TM4120), that is, the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both. In the closed state, in step S21TM4130, the lock switch 21TM051 is not in the ON state (NO in step S21TM4130), and in step S21TM4140, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not in the ON state. (NO in step S21TM4140), the CPU 103 does not execute the processing after step S21TM4510 related to the setting change mode, and the setting value stored in the setting value storage area may be abnormal. The indicated set value abnormality error command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120.

When the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value abnormality error command, the image display device 5 notifies that the set value may be abnormal. For example, the message "The setting value may be abnormal" is displayed. Further, the effect control CPU 120 shifts the image display device 5 to the setting change mode when the power is turned off (the power switch 21TM055 is turned off) and then turned on again (when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on). The notification prompts the user to perform an operation for changing the set value (determine the set value). For example, the message "Please turn on the power again after the power is turned off to shift to the setting change mode" is displayed. It should be noted that the same notification may be performed by the voice output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined loop process (repetition of steps S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220) until the power is turned off.

In this loop processing, after the CPU 103 performs a weight of 4 ms (step S21TM4200), the character "E" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029, so that "the set value is not a normal value (0 to 5)". Although there is a possibility, the transition condition for controlling to the setting change mode (that all are determined to be YES in steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140) is not satisfied and the transition to the setting change mode has not been performed. " Notify (step S21TM4210). Then, the security signal is output from the output terminal (terminal number 10) to which one end of the security signal line is connected (step S21TM4220). The security signal is input to an external device to which the other end of the security signal line is connected (for example, a hall computer that manages information on a plurality of game machines, a card unit or a ring lamp device provided corresponding to the game machine, etc.). Will be done.

During the loop processing period, the letter "E" is displayed every 4 ms on the 7-segment display provided in the display monitor 21TM029. By providing a weight of 4 ms, it is possible to prevent excessive heat from staying in the 7-segment display and damaging the display. In addition, the security signal is continuously output during the loop processing period. By outputting the security signal to the outside, a predetermined event (in this example, the set value is a normal value (0 to 5)) in the pachinko gaming machine 1 based on the input of the security signal in an external device such as a hall computer. ), But the transition condition for controlling to the setting change mode is not satisfied and the transition to the setting change mode has not occurred) can be identified.

The loop processing of step S21TM420 to step S21TM4220 is continued until the power supply is stopped (until the power switch 21TM055 is turned off).

That is, when the data check result of the backup RAM area is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010), when the set value is not a normal value (NO in step S21TM4020), and when the power is cut off during the setting change (NO). That is, if any of the cases (when the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on and YES is determined in step S21TM4030), the game should not be played in this state. Before shifting to the normal game processing (for example, the game control timer interrupt processing including the prize ball processing, the special symbol process processing, etc.), it is necessary to fix the set value of the set value storage area to a regular value. Therefore, the RAM clear flag is set to shift to the setting change mode.

In the present embodiment, in order to be in a state where the set value can be changed (setting change mode), (1) the game machine frame 3 is in the open state, and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state. (3) Three conditions are required that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state. When it is confirmed by the determination process of step S21TM4120, step S21TM4130, and step S21TM4140 that all of the conditions (1) to (3) are satisfied, the CPU 103 is in a state where the set value can be changed ( It is possible to shift to the setting change mode).

If any of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the change of the set value is not permitted, so that the set value of the set value storage area can be fixed to a regular value. It is not possible to shift to normal game processing. Therefore, if NO is determined in any of the determination processes of step S21TM4120, step S21TM4130, and step S21TM4140, the process proceeds to the loop process (step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220) described above.

If the process shifts to the loop process (step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220), the normal game process cannot be performed. Therefore, the clerk of the game hall must turn off the pachinko game machine 1 and turn it on again. It doesn't become. In this way, if the conditions for shifting to the setting change mode are not satisfied, the power is turned off once and all the conditions (1) to (3) are satisfied when the next power is turned on. Then, the mode is changed to the setting change mode, and the setting value of the setting value storage area is fixed to a regular value.

If any of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the CPU 103 predetermines the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. It is also possible to urge the power to be turned off by emitting light in the power off instruction mode.

In the present embodiment, when the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), the setting value is not allowed to be changed, but the setting value can be confirmed (setting confirmation mode). , (1) The game machine frame 3 is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4060), and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4070).

However, when the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), (1) the game machine frame 3 is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4120), and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state. Even when the two conditions (YES in step S21TM4130) are satisfied, the setting confirmation mode is not controlled. Even when these conditions (1) and (2) are satisfied, if it is determined in step S21TM4140 that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not in the ON state (NO), The game is controlled to the game stop state (loop processing in steps S21TM420 to step S21TM4220) without being controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

Next, the processes related to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-7 and 8-8. In the process of FIG. 8-7, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 matches a normal value (any of 0 to 5 in this example) ( Step S21TM4510). If a regular value (0 to 5) is stored in the set value storage area (YES in step S21TM4510), the process proceeds to step S21TM4530. When a regular value (0 to 5) is not stored in the set value storage area (NO in step S21TM4510), the CPU 103 has the lowest jackpot probability "0" as a regular value in the set value storage area. Is stored (step S21TM4520). Then, the process proceeds to step S21TM4530.

Next, the CPU 103 executes a power cutoff process after performing a weight of 4 ms (step S21TM4530) (step S21TM4540). In the power cutoff process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not a power cutoff signal based on a power cutoff including an unexpected power failure is input, and if a power cutoff signal is input, the power supply Immediately before the operation becomes inoperable due to the stop, the power supply stop processing is executed. In this power supply stop processing, a processing of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up to the RAM 102, a data protection processing of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, various timer states, etc.) for advancing the game, as well as the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. That is, in the power cutoff process, check data is stored in a predetermined backup area.

As a result, when controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (when the iterative processing of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620 or the iterative processing of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4570 and step S21TM4650 is being performed), the power supply is supplied. If a disconnection occurs, the data check will be properly executed in step S21TM4010 after the power is restored.

Next, the CPU 103 causes the display monitor 21TM029 to display the value corresponding to the set value (0 to 5 in this example) stored in the set value storage area (step S21TM4550). Here, the value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is a value (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the value (0 to 5) stored in the set value storage area. Since the clerk of the game hall usually recognizes the range of the set value as 1 to 6, if the value stored in the set value storage area is displayed as it is on the display monitor 21TM029, the clerk of the game hall actually displays it. There is a risk of erroneously recognizing the set value of. Therefore, in this example, [value stored in the set value storage area + 1] is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 as a set value. Next, the CPU 103 outputs a security signal (step S21TM4560).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM4570). If the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM4570), that is, if the RAM clear is not executed after the mode (here, the setting confirmation mode) ends, the CPU 103 specifies that the setting confirmation mode has been controlled. The setting confirmation mode command is transmitted (step S21TM4650), and the process proceeds to step S21TM4680. The effect control CPU 120 can identify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the setting confirmation mode command. Therefore, it is possible to notify that the game machine is controlled to the setting confirmation mode by the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM4570), that is, if RAM clear is executed after the mode (here, the setting change mode) is completed, the CPU 103 changes the set value. Set the setting changing flag indicating that there is a possibility (step S21TM4580). Since the area in which the value of the setting changing flag is stored is included in the backup RAM area, the value of the setting changing flag is retained even when the power is turned off. Therefore, if a power failure occurs while the device is controlled to the setting change mode, the value of the setting changing flag is 1 (set state) when the power is turned on next time.

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting change mode command that specifies that the setting change mode has been controlled (step S21TM4590). The effect control CPU 120 can identify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting change mode based on the reception of the setting change mode command. Therefore, it is possible to notify that the game machine is controlled to the setting change mode by the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, the CPU 103 inputs the setting changeover switch information indicating whether or not the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated (step S21TM4600), and confirms whether or not the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated. (Step S21TM4610).

If the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is not operated (NO in step S21TM4610), the CPU 103 proceeds to step S21TM4680. When the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated (YES in step S21TM4610), the CPU 103 updates the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (step S21TM4620), and moves to step S21TM4680. Transition. The updated set value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in the next step S21TM4550.

Each time the clerk of the amusement park operates the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 (YES in step S21TM4610), the set value stored in the set value storage area is updated (step S21TM4620). For example, the regular setting value is in the range of 0 to 5, and the setting value stored in the setting value storage area when the setting change mode is controlled (when the power is turned on or when the power is cut off last time) is 3. If there is, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is updated in the order of 3 → 4 → 5 → 0 → 1 → 2 → 3 for each setting change operation, and the display monitor 21TM029 responds accordingly. The displayed information will be updated in the order of 4 → 5 → 6 → 1 → 2 → 3 → 4.

Here, the display of the current setting value (step S21TM4550), the output of the security signal (step S21TM4560), and the transmission of the setting confirmation mode command (step S21TM4650) can be executed, but the setting change mode command is transmitted (step S21TM4590). ) And the state in which the update of the set value (step S21TM4620) cannot be executed corresponds to the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed or the set value cannot be changed. During the period controlled by the setting confirmation mode, the processes of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4570 and step S21TM4650 are repeatedly executed.

In the setting confirmation mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES is determined in step S21TM4070), and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO is determined in step S21TM4040 and the RAM clear flag). Is still 0).

In addition, the display of the current set value (step S21TM4550) and the output of the security signal (step S21TM4560) can be executed, and the setting change mode command can be transmitted (step S21TM4590) and the set value can be updated (step S21TM4620). The state corresponds to a setting change mode in which the set value can be confirmed and changed.

In the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (determined as YES in step S21TM4070 or step S21TM4130), and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4040 or step S21TM4140). It is determined and controlled based on (the RAM clear flag is set to 1 in step S21TM4050 or step S21TM4150).

The setting confirmation mode command is a command that is transmitted only once when the setting confirmation mode is controlled. Therefore, when the CPU 103 transmits the setting confirmation mode command, it is possible to identify that the setting confirmation mode command has been transmitted, and the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag that does not require backup storage when the power is turned off should be set. , When the setting changing flag is cleared (step S21TM4720), the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag may be cleared. Then, the setting confirmation mode command may be transmitted only when the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag is not set. Similarly, the setting change mode command is a command that is transmitted only once when the setting change mode is controlled. Therefore, the CPU 103 should set the setting change mode command transmission flag, which can identify that the setting change mode command has been transmitted when the setting change mode command is transmitted and does not require backup storage when the power is turned off. , When the setting changing flag is cleared (step S21TM4720), the setting change mode command transmission flag may be cleared. Then, the setting change mode command may be transmitted only when the setting change mode command transmission flag is not set.

In step S21TM4680, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state. Then, if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (NO in step S21TM4680), the weight of 4 ms (step S21TM4530) is performed again, and then the processes after step S21TM4540 are repeated. That is, if the value of the RAM clear flag is 0, the control of the setting confirmation mode is continued, and if the value of the RAM clear flag is 1, the control of the setting change mode is continued.

If the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state in step S21TM4680 (YES in step S21TM4680), the CPU 103 terminates the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode and sets 1000 ms as the value of the security signal timer (step S21TM4710). By setting a predetermined time as the value of the security signal timer, the security signal is continuously output until the value of the security signal timer becomes 0 ms from the predetermined time in the information output processing when the normal game processing is started. Will be done. For example, when the game control timer interrupt process is executed every 2 ms, the value of the security signal timer is subtracted by 2 ms, and the output of the security signal is stopped when the value reaches 0 ms. Therefore, at the time of step S21TM4710, the remaining output period of the security signal is set to 1000 ms regardless of whether the setting change mode has ended or the setting confirmation mode has ended.

That is, as shown in FIG. 8-9 (1), the output of the security signal is started corresponding to the start of the control of either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (step S21TM4560), and the setting change mode and the setting confirmation Corresponding to the end of the control of any of the modes, the value of the security signal timer is set so that the security signal is continuously output until at least 1 sec has elapsed from the end of the control of either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Set (step S21TM4710).

Here, the process of starting the output of the security signal in step S21TM4560 determines whether the mode is controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (which mode is controlled). It is being executed as a common process (without). Further, in step S21TM4710, the process of setting the remaining output period of the security signal is also determined regardless of whether it is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (which mode is controlled). It is being executed as a common process. In this way, the security signal output control is simplified by sharing the security signal output start control and output end control between the case where the setting change mode is controlled and the case where the setting confirmation mode is controlled. , The control burden can be reduced.

In addition, the output of the security signal is started in response to the start of control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the security signal is output in response to the end of control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. By stopping, it is possible to appropriately notify an external device such as a hall computer that the game machine may have been controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

Here, in step S21TM4710 immediately after the control of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed, the security signal is a common value (1000 ms) between the case where the setting change mode is controlled and the case where the setting confirmation mode is controlled. It is set in the timer. However, if both the output start control and the output end control of the security signal are shared between the case where the setting change mode is controlled and the case where the setting change mode is controlled, which mode is used on the external device side. It becomes difficult to grasp whether it is controlled.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-9 (2), when the setting change mode is controlled, that is, when the RAM clear flag is set to 1, the security signal is once in step S21TM4710. After setting 1000 ms as the timer value, 30000 ms is reset (overwritten) as the security signal timer value in step S21TM1465 after clearing the RAM based on the determination of NO in step S21TM4770 described later. There is. That is, after the remaining output period of the security signal is once set to 1 sec, the remaining output period of the security signal is reset (overwritten) to 30 sec.

When the signal output control shown above is performed, the final output stop timing of the security signal is the setting confirmation mode end when the setting confirmation mode is controlled as shown in FIG. 8-9 (2). It is the timing when 1 sec has elapsed from the above, and when the setting change mode is controlled, the timing is 30 sec after the end of the setting change mode.

Specifically, when the setting confirmation mode is controlled (RAM is not cleared and the value of the security signal timer is not changed from 1 second), the game control timer interrupt after the interrupt is permitted is interrupted. In the process (for example, information output process), the output of the security signal is continued until the value of the security signal timer changes from 1000 ms to 0 ms, and the setting change mode is controlled (RAM clear is performed). When the value of the security signal timer is changed from 1 second to 30 seconds), the value of the security signal timer is changed from 30,000 ms to 0 ms in the game control timer interrupt process (for example, information output process) after the interrupt is permitted. The output of the security signal will be continued until becomes. When the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the security signal timer value is set to a predetermined time (1000 ms or 30000 ms) at the timing before shifting to the game control timer interrupt process when the setting change mode is controlled. ) To 0 ms, the output of the security signal may be continued, and after the output of the security signal is completed, the process may shift to the game control timer interrupt process.

In this way, the security signal is continuously output for at least 1 sec depending on whether the control of the setting confirmation mode is finished or the control of the setting change mode is finished, and the security signal is controlled to the setting change mode. In this case, the security signal is continuously output until 30 seconds have elapsed after the control of the setting change mode is completed. With such a configuration, while standardizing the output control of the security signal, the output period of the security signal can be different depending on whether the mode is controlled in the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode.

As a result, it is also possible to grasp whether the external device is controlled to the setting confirmation mode without executing the initialization process, or whether the initialization process is executed and controlled to the setting change mode. .. For example, if the output period of the security signal is less than 30 seconds, it can be specified that the setting confirmation mode is controlled without executing the initialization process, and if the output period of the security signal is 30 seconds or more, the initial setting is performed. It is possible to estimate that there is a possibility that the conversion process is executed and the setting change mode is controlled.

A security signal is also output when an error targeting the game stop such as a magnetic abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection sensor. The security signal in this case is continuously output until the power of the game machine is turned off. Further, the CPU 103 sets an abnormality detection flag in the backup area (however, the area cleared by the initialization process) of the RAM 102 based on the fact that the abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection sensor. Then, it is assumed that the security signal is output for 4 minutes based on the fact that the abnormality detection flag is set when the power is restored.

Here, when the setting confirmation mode is controlled at the time of power restoration, the RAM clear is not executed, so that the value of the abnormality detection flag is not initialized in the signal output processing and remains set. It is possible to continuously output the security signal for 4 minutes after the power is turned on. That is, it is possible not to limit the output period of the security signal to the period from the end of the control of the setting confirmation mode to the elapse of one second. On the other hand, if the setting change mode is controlled when the power is restored, the RAM is cleared, so the abnormality detection flag is cleared in the subsequent signal output processing (power off occurs). Sometimes it is unknown whether an abnormality has been detected), and as a result, the security signal output period is the period from the end of the setting change mode until 30 seconds have passed (depending on the execution of RAM clear). Period).

In the example shown in step S21TM4710 of FIG. 8-7, 1 second is set as the value of the security signal timer. The value of the security signal timer set to is at least a period during which the external device can recognize that the security signal has been output, and may be, for example, 50 ms or more. That is, a common 50 ms may be set as the value of the security signal timer when the setting change mode ends and when the setting confirmation mode ends.

After the process of step S21TM4710, the CPU 103 clears the setting changing flag (step S21TM4720). Here, if the power is cut off after that because the setting changing flag is cleared, it is determined that the setting changing flag is not set when the power is restored (NO in step S21TM4030). Become.

Next, the CPU 103 erases the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM4730). Then, the set value (any of 0 to 5) stored in the set value storage area is set in the setting command, and the setting command is transmitted (step S21TM4760). Even if neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is controlled when the power is turned on, the process of step S21TM4760 will be executed and the setting command will be transmitted.

Here, the player usually recognizes that the range of the set value is 1 to 6, and the value specified by the setting command (the value stored in the set value storage area) on the effect control CPU 120 side is directly imaged. If it is displayed on the display device 5, the player may misunderstand the set value. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 side recognizes the value obtained by adding 1 to the value (0 to 5) specified by the setting command as the set value (1 to 6), and sets the set values 1 to 6. In the range, the effect that suggests the set value is executed.

Not limited to such a form, the CPU 103 sets a value (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the set value (0 to 5) stored in the set value storage area in the setting command to control the effect. It may be transmitted to the CPU 120 for use. As a result, the range of the set value specified by the setting command becomes 1 to 6, which matches the range normally recognized by the player. On the effect control CPU 120 side, the set value (1 to 6) specified by the setting command is displayed as it is on the image display device 5, or an effect suggesting the set value (1 to 6) specified by the setting command is executed. By doing so, the set value can be appropriately notified or suggested. Further, it is not necessary for the effect control CPU 120 side to perform addition processing on the set value specified by the received setting command, and the control load on the effect control CPU 120 side can be reduced.

As described above, the effect control CPU 120 can specify that the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode has ended by receiving the setting command. In addition, it is possible to suggest the set value by executing the effect according to the set value specified by the setting command. For example, it is possible to suggest the set value to the player by making the mode of the ending effect executed when the jackpot game state ends different according to the designated set value.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM4770).

Here, when the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM4770), the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), and the set value is a normal value (step). It is determined that S21TM4020 is YES), the power is not cut off during the setting change (NO in step S21TM4030), and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4040). ) Therefore, it is sufficient to execute the process at the time of power failure recovery without clearing the RAM.

When the value of the RAM clear flag is 0, the CPU 103 executes a process when the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal when the power is turned on, and after the interrupt is permitted, the game control timer interrupt process (special). (Including design process processing, etc.) That is, when neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is controlled, or when the control of the setting confirmation mode is completed, the CPU 103 performs RAM based on the value of the RAM clear flag being 0. Without executing clear, a backup command will be sent as a command when the power is turned off and restored, and the normal game processing will be started.

In the effect control CPU 120, based on the reception of this backup command (command at the time of recovery), the recovery from the power failure was performed based on the data at the time of power supply stop (RAM clear is not performed). That) is recognized. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the backup command, the effect device such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R, and the frame LED 9 is restored from the power failure based on the data when the power supply is stopped. (RAM clearing has not been performed) can be notified.

On the other hand, the fact that the value of the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM4770) means that the RAM clear is set to 1 in step S21TM4050 or step S21TM4150, and it is determined to execute the RAM clear. Therefore, it is sufficient to execute the process at the time of turning on the power accompanied by clearing the RAM.

When the value of the RAM clear flag is 1, the CPU 103 executes a process of setting 30 seconds as the value of the security signal timer and a process when the data check result of the backup RAM area is abnormal when the power is turned on. , After the interrupt is permitted, the process may be shifted to the game control timer interrupt process (including the special symbol process process, etc.).

As shown in FIG. 8-8, the CPU 103 performs the RAM clear process based on the RAM clear flag being 1 (step S21TM1410). In the RAM clear processing, the data (special symbol process flag, probability change flag, time saving flag, hold storage, etc.) indicating the game state before the power supply is stopped stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 102 is cleared, and the initial value is obtained. Is set, but the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is not cleared and is not changed before the RAM clear process. In addition, the area in which each total value (game information that can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base is stored for each set value is not cleared, and each total for each set value is not cleared. The value does not change before the RAM clear process. Then, by displaying the character "C" on the display monitor 21TM029 or the like, it is notified that the game state has been initialized (step S21TM1420). By the RAM clear processing, predetermined data (for example, data of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for determining a normal symbol hit) is initialized to 0, but is an arbitrary value or a predetermined value. It may be initialized to. Further, the entire area of the RAM 102 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, data of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for determining a normal symbol hit) may be left as it is.

The reason why the set value stored in the set value storage area is not cleared in this RAM clear process is as follows: (a) If the setting change mode is not controlled, a regular value is set in the set value storage area when the power is turned on. It means that it has been stored (YES in step S21TM4020), and (b) if it is controlled to the setting change mode, is the value of the setting value storage area set to 0 (step S21TM4520) or is in the setting change mode? This is because the regular value is stored by the operation (step S21TM4610 and step S21TM4620). Further, after the RAM clear processing, the setting change mode cannot be controlled, and there is no opportunity to change the value stored in the setting value storage area.

Next, the CPU 103 sets the start address of the initialization table stored in the ROM 101 as a pointer (step S21TM1430), and sequentially sets the contents of the initialization table in the work area (step S21TM1440). By the processing of step S21TM1430 and step S21TM1440, for example, a random number counter for determining a normal symbol hit, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, etc. The initial value is set.

After executing step S21TM1430 and step S21TM1440, the CPU 103 reads out the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 (step S21TM1450). In the game control timer interrupt processing described later, the jackpot determination in the special symbol process processing is executed based on the set value read here. Next, the CPU 103 transmits an initialization command that specifies that the initialization process has been performed when the power is turned on (or when the setting change mode ends) (step S21TM1460). In the effect control CPU 120, the initialization process is performed based on the reception of this initialization command (the RAM is cleared without the recovery from the power failure based on the data when the power supply is stopped). Recognize what was done). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the initialization command, for example, in the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R, and the frame LED 9, the game state and the like are initialized (data when the power supply is stopped). It is possible to notify that the RAM has been cleared without recovering from the power failure based on the above.

Next, the CPU 103 sets 30 seconds as the value of the security signal timer (step S21TM1465). As a result, the value (1 second) of the security signal timer set in step S21TM4710 after the setting change mode ends is changed (overwritten) to the value (30 seconds) corresponding to the execution of RAM clear. become. Further, when the RAM clear is executed without being controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, step S21TM4710 is not executed (1 second is set as the value of the security signal timer). Without), the value of the security signal timer is set to 30 seconds corresponding to the RAM clear being executed. On the other hand, when the RAM clear is not executed (including the case where it is controlled to the setting confirmation mode), the process of this step S21TM1465 is not executed, so that the value of the security signal timer is 1 second set in step S21TM4710. There is up to.

Since the value of the security signal timer is set in step S21TM1465 or step S21TM4710 described above, the security signal is output in the game control timer interrupt process after the interrupt is permitted (information output process). After that, every time the game control timer interrupt process is executed by the interrupt permission, the value of the security signal timer is subtracted by 2 ms, and the output of the security signal is stopped at the timing when the value of the security signal timer becomes 0. Will be.

Then, the CPU 103 executes the setting process of the serial communication circuit 21TM505 (step S21TM1480). In this setting process, a connection confirmation signal is output from the output circuit 21TM067 of the main board 11 to the input circuit 21TM373A of the payout control board 21TM037. Further, the serial communication circuit 21TM505 of the game control microcomputer 100 and the serial communication circuit 21TM380 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 are set in a state in which communication can be executed.

Next, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S21TM1490). The CPU 103 makes settings for causing the random number circuit 104 to update the value of the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, for example, by executing the process according to the random number circuit setting program.

Then, in step S21TM1500, the CPU 103 sets the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied at predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). That is, as an initial value, a value corresponding to, for example, 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register). In this embodiment, it is assumed that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every 2 ms.

Next, the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S21TM1520) and the initial value random number update process (step S21TM1530). When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt prohibition state is set (step S21TM1510), and when the execution of the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process is completed, the interrupt enable state is set. Set (step S21TM1540). As a result, the game shifts to the normal game processing in which the game control timer interrupt processing can be executed. In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is not a big hit, or a random number for determining whether or not to reach when it is not a big hit, and is for display. The random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating a random number for display. The initial value random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number determines the initial value of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to hit the normal symbol (normal symbol hit determination random number generation counter). It is a random number to do. Game control processing that controls the progress of the game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 100 controls the game devices such as the effect display device, the variable winning ball device, and the ball payout device provided in the game machine. In the process of performing, or the process of transmitting a command signal to be controlled by another microcomputer, also called the game device control process), the count value of the normal symbol hit judgment random number is one lap (normal symbol hit judgment random number taking). The initial value is set in the counter when the step is taken by the number of numerical values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the possible value.

In this example, when the RAM clear flag is determined to be 0 (YES) in step S21TM4770, the CPU 103 determines whether or not both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state. Without confirmation (regardless of the state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a), the process shifts to the process at the time of power failure recovery, but the RAM clear flag is set in step S21TM4770, not limited to such a form. If it is determined to be 0 (YES), the condition is that both the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state (depending on the state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a). You may move to the process when the power is cut off and restored.

Further, in this example, when the CPU 103 determines in step S21TM4770 that the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO), the CPU 103 determines whether the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both in the closed state. Without confirmation (regardless of the state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a), the process shifts to the process at the time of turning on the power (process after step S21TM1410 (RAM clear)). Not limited to this, when the RAM clear flag is determined to be 1 (NO) in step S21TM4770, the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both in the closed state (game machine frame). 3 or depending on the state of the glass door frame 3a), the process at the time of turning on the power (process after step S21TM1410 (RAM clear)) may be started.

As shown above, the clerk of the amusement park puts the pachinko game machine 1 into the setting change mode by turning on the lock switch 21TM051 and turning on the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 when the power is turned on. It is possible to control it, and it is also possible to initialize the game state and the like (execute RAM clear). Further, by turning on the lock switch 21TM051 and turning off the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 when the power is turned on, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to the setting confirmation mode, and the gaming state, etc. Is not initialized (NO is determined in step S21TM4040 or step S21TM4140 and the RAM clear flag is not set to 1). In this way, the clerk of the game hall can select whether to control the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and also can select whether to initialize the game state or the like. There is.

As described above, if the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on, it means that the setting change mode was controlled when the power was turned off, so the setting value is in an unstable state. There is a possibility that the set value to be confirmed on the playground side is not stored in the set value storage area. In the examples shown in FIGS. 8-6 to 8-8, the CPU 103 is in a game stopped state (step) without shifting to the normal game processing based on the fact that the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030). S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220 (loop processing) can be controlled, and a security signal is output in response to control to the game stop state (step S21TM4220).

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the game from being started in a state where the set value is unstable (the game control timer interrupt process is executed), and when the power is turned on, the power is supplied. It is possible to notify the external device that the setting change mode was controlled when an interrupt occurred.

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 8-6 to 8-8, the CPU 103 has a condition for shifting to the setting change mode based on the fact that the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030). When step S21TM4120 to step S21TM4140 are all YES) is not satisfied, a set value error error command is transmitted (step S21TM4190), and a display monitor is displayed in the game stopped state (loop processing of steps S21TM420 to step S21TM4220). An error display for displaying the character "E" is performed on 21TM029 (step S21TM4210).

In the example shown in FIG. 8-10, by displaying the letter "E" on each of the 7-segment displays 21TM029A to 21TM029D constituting the display monitor 21TM029, an abnormality occurs in the clerk of the amusement park (in the setting change mode). (There is a possibility that the power supply was cut off while it was being controlled) is clearly notified. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting value abnormality error command displays the message "Please turn on the power again after the power is turned off to shift to the setting change mode" on the image display device 5, thereby displaying the game hall. Operation to change the set value by shifting to the setting change mode when the power is turned on again (when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on) after the power is turned off (power switch 21TM055 is turned off). Is notified to prompt the user to perform (determine the set value).

In this example, (a) when the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on, and the transition condition for controlling the setting change mode is satisfied, that is, (i) the game machine frame 3 is set. It is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4120), (iii) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4130), and (iii) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM4140). If YES) is determined, the setting change mode is controlled. As a result, the error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on the display monitor 21TM029) is not executed, and the message display on the effect control board 12 side ("The power is turned on again after the power is turned off"). Please move to the setting change mode ") will not be performed either.

Here, in the effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting change mode command (step S21TM4590), the image display device 5 has controlled the setting change mode, that is, the setting change operation (operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052). ), It is possible to notify that the set value can be changed. For example, the message "In the setting change mode" or the message "Please change the setting value by performing the setting change operation" can be displayed on the image display device 5. As a result, the clerk of the amusement park can grasp that the setting change mode is controlled, and by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area By switching the lock switch 21TM051 to the OFF state after changing to the planned set value, the set value can be fixed and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be shifted to the normal game processing.

On the other hand, (b) when the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on, and the transition condition for controlling the setting change mode is not satisfied, that is, among the above (i) to (iii). If any of the above conditions is not satisfied, the game is stopped (step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220 loop processing) after the setting value error error command is transmitted (step S21TM4190) without being controlled by the setting change mode. .. As a result, an error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on the display monitor 21TM029) is executed, and a message display on the effect control board 12 side ("The power is turned on again after the power is turned off"). Please move to the setting change mode. ") Will also be performed.

In this way, the error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on the display monitor 21TM029) is executed, and the message display on the effect control board 12 side ("The power is turned on again after the power is turned off"). If the setting change mode is also performed, the condition for shifting to the setting change mode after the power is restored is the state of the game machine even though the power is cut off during the setting change mode. It will be notified that the state is not established. In this case, the clerk of the game hall, etc. knows that the game is not controlled in the setting change mode and is in the game stop state (it is necessary to turn on the power again to control the setting change mode). It is possible. Therefore, after the power is turned off once, the power is turned on again by operating so that all the transition conditions (i) to (iii) for the setting change mode are satisfied. Then, in the setting change mode, by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is changed to the planned setting value, and then the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off. By switching to the state, the set value can be fixed and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be shifted to the normal gaming process.

In this way, when the power is cut off in the setting change mode, the state of the game machine can be appropriately notified when the power is restored.

Here, if the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is satisfied when the power is restored (a), an error display (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on the display monitor 21TM029) is displayed on the main board 11 side. It will automatically shift to the setting change mode without being disturbed, and it is possible to avoid unnecessary error display and prompt the user to change the setting value appropriately.

On the other hand, if the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied when the power is restored (b), the mode cannot be switched to the setting change mode when the power is restored even though the power is cut off during the setting change mode. Since it is in the state, it is forcibly controlled to the game stop state (loop processing of step S21TM420 to step S21TM4220), and an error display (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on the display monitor 21TM029) on the main board 11 side is displayed. It will be done. As a result, it is possible to limit the progress of the game in an unstable state in which the set value is not fixed, and it is possible to realize appropriate game control.

When the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the transition conditions (i) to (iii) for shifting to the setting change mode are all satisfied, and the transition condition (i) is satisfied. )-(Iii) may not be satisfied, and different commands may be sent as commands indicating that the set value may be abnormal.

For example, if the transition condition is satisfied, it is a command indicating that the set value may be abnormal, and the mode has been changed to the setting change mode (or the condition for transition is satisfied). On the production control CPU 120 that receives this command, the message "The setting value may be abnormal" and the message "It is automatically controlled to the setting change mode" are displayed as images. It is preferable to display it on the device 5. On the other hand, if the transition condition is not satisfied, the setting value abnormality error command in step S21TM4190 may be transmitted as described above.

After the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode is completed and the normal game processing is started, (1) the lock switch 21TM051 is operated when both the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed. A lock switch operation command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control CPU 120 according to the fact (from the OFF state to the ON state), and (2) the setting changeover switch (clear switch). ) 21TM052 is operated (from the OFF state to the ON state), the game control microcomputer 100 transmits the setting changeover switch operation command to the effect control CPU 120.

Then, the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120) is controlled in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the lock switch operation command and / or the setting changeover switch operation command. Despite the fact that there is no such operation, it is possible to identify that an operation for changing the set value has been performed and notify the fact. For example, based on the reception of the lock switch operation command, the image display device 5 executes an abnormal operation warning notification that displays the characters "lock switch operation has been detected." In addition, based on the reception of the setting changeover switch operation command, the abnormal operation warning notification that displays the characters "Operation of the setting changeover switch has been detected." Is executed. As a result, the clerk of the amusement park clearly understands that the operation for changing the set value has been performed even though it is not controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and is illegal. It is possible to confirm whether or not is performed.

Not limited to such a form, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 has been operated after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed and the normal game processing is started. The lock switch operation command and the setting changeover switch operation command may not be transmitted without confirming whether or not the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated. In this way, during the period during which the normal game process (game control timer interrupt process) is being executed, the execution status of the operation for changing the set value and the operation for confirming the set value is not confirmed. This makes it possible to reduce the control load on the game control microcomputer 100.

(Modified example of processing at power-on)
In the example shown in FIG. 8-6, when the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), (i) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4120). ), (Ii) The lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4130), and (iii) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4140). Only when it was confirmed that the RAM clear flag was set to 1 (step S21TM4150), the mode was changed to the setting change mode (NO in step S21TM4570).

Not limited to such a form, as shown in FIG. 8-11, when the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), the three conditions (i) to (iii) are satisfied. The RAM clear flag may be set to 1 (step S21TM4150) and the mode may be shifted to the setting change mode (NO in step S21TM4570) without confirming whether or not it is satisfied.

In the process shown in FIG. 8-11, if the data check result of the backup RAM area is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010) or the set value is not a normal value (NO in step S21TM4020), the setting changing flag is set. If this is the case (YES in step S21TM4030), the RAM clear flag is set to 1 (step S21TM4150) without determining whether the conditions (i) to (iii) are satisfied, and the setting is changed. The portion controlled by the mode (NO in step S21TM4570) and not controlled in the game stopped state (process corresponding to the loop process of step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220) is different from the process shown in FIG. 8-6. The other parts are the same as the processes shown in FIGS. 8-6 to 8-8.

Even in such a form, the RAM clear flag is set to 1 and the setting change mode is set based on the setting changing flag being set when the power is turned on. It is possible to appropriately determine the state of the game machine when the power is cut off during the change.

In the example shown in FIG. 8-11, when the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), (i) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, and (ii) the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on. It is controlled to the setting change mode based on the three conditions that the state is in the state and the (iii) clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (determined as NO in step S21TM4570). (The setting value of the setting value storage area can be changed), whereas when the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), (i) to (iii) Regardless of whether or not the three conditions are satisfied, the setting change mode is forcibly controlled.

In this way, if a power failure occurs while the setting change mode is being controlled, the three conditions (i) to (iii) are based on the fact that the setting changing flag is set when the power is restored. By automatically controlling the setting change mode regardless of whether or not is satisfied, the workability for fixing the set value can be improved.

Here, when the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the setting is made even if the condition (ii) that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES in step S21TM4130) is not satisfied. It will be controlled to the change mode. As a result, in the setting change mode, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is changed by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 while the lock switch 21TM051 remains OFF. (Step S21TM461-10 in FIG. 8-7).

As described above, the condition for ending the setting change mode is to switch the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state (determine YES in step S21TM4680). Therefore, in order to confirm the set value and end the setting change mode, the clerk of the amusement park who has performed the operation of changing the set value temporarily turns the lock switch 21TM051 from the OFF state if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state. After switching to the ON state, the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (YES is determined in step S21TM4680).

In this way, the condition for starting the control of the setting change mode depending on whether the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030) or the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030). By making the conditions for ending the control of the setting change mode (the operation of switching the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state) common, the conditions for ending the control of the setting change mode are clarified. We are trying to properly shift to normal game processing.

Here, when the setting change mode is controlled based on the setting change flag being set (YES in step S21TM4030), a notification prompting the lock switch 21TM051 to be turned ON may be performed. good. For example, when the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 in step S21TM4150 and transmits a setting value abnormality error command (in step S21TM4190 described above). The corresponding process is executed), and the effect control CPU 120 that receives the set value error error command (step S21TM4110) says, "Turn on the lock switch once, and then switch it off after changing the set value." The message may be displayed on the image display device 5.

In the processes shown in FIGS. 8-6 to 8-8 and 8-11, it is not possible to shift to the normal game process when the setting changing flag is set. Therefore, when the pachinko machine maker ships the pachinko game machine 1 (before installation in the game hall), the setting changing flag is set in advance, and then the game hall side goes through the setting change mode. Unless the set value is changed and the setting change mode is terminated, the pachinko gaming machine 1 cannot be played. As a result, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed in the game hall, it is possible to ensure that the pachinko game machine 1 is controlled to the setting change mode to perform the setting change operation and take measures to determine the set value.

As shown in FIGS. 8-6 to 8-8, the RAM clear (step S21TM1410) is always executed when the setting change mode is controlled. This is because, as shown in FIG. 8-4, the range of random numbers determined to be big hits differs depending on the set value. For example, an event in which the big hit judgment random number extracted at the time of starting prize before the setting change is judged to be a big hit in relation to the setting value before the change, but is judged to be out of order in relation to the setting value after the change. On the contrary, although it is determined to be out of order in relation to the set value before the change, an event may occur in which it is determined to be a big hit in relation to the set value after the change. In such a case, the game after the setting change is continued based on the big hit judgment random number extracted at the start winning prize before the setting change (the game control timer interrupt processing including the special symbol process process is executed). Since this is inappropriate, the hold memory (hold memory of special symbol, hold memory of normal symbol) is cleared by initializing the game state, and the number of hold memory is set to the initial value (0). There is.

Further, during the period controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, as a result of the interrupt permission of step S21TM1540 being not performed, the switch processing (step S21 shown in FIG. 4) in the game control timer interrupt processing is not performed. , Starting prizes and passing through gates are invalid. This is because the random number circuit setting process (step S21TM1490) and the like have not yet been executed during the period controlled by the setting change mode, and the random numbers have not been updated. If a random number is extracted based on the start winning prize during the period controlled by the setting change mode, the same random number value will be obtained regardless of the start winning timing, and the game will be played based on such a random number value. Since it is inappropriate to proceed, the start prize and gate passage are invalidated.

(Set value storage control when the power is cut off while changing the set value)
Next, the set value storage control when a power failure occurs while changing the set value will be described with reference to FIG. 8-12. In the example shown in FIG. 8-7, the setting value itself stored in the setting value storage area is changed by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 in the setting change mode.

First, regarding the control when the power is cut off before the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (before the setting change mode ends) by performing the operation of changing the set value during the setting change mode, FIG. This will be described using -12 (1).

As shown in order 1, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is set to the ON state (the clear switch 21TM052 is also set to the ON state) and the setting change mode is controlled. In this example, when the power is turned on, "0" is stored as a set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102. Next, as shown in order 2, the setting value "0" stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is read as the setting change mode is started, and the read setting value is set to 1. "1" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON.

Next, as shown in order 3, the set value stored in the set value storage area is "0" based on the operation of the first setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 in the setting change mode. Is changed to "1", and "2", which is obtained by adding 1 to the changed set value, is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON. Further, as shown in order 4, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is "1" based on the second operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 in the setting change mode. Is changed to "2", and "3", which is obtained by adding 1 to the changed set value, is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON.

Next, as shown in order 5, it is assumed that the power supply is cut off while the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON in the setting change mode, that is, before the operation for ending the setting change mode is performed. At this time, the set value "2" after the operation of the second setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is stored in the set value storage area. In the power off state, the set value "2" stored in the set value storage area formed in the backup area of the RAM 102 is retained as it is.

Next, as shown in order 6, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is set to the ON state (the clear switch 21TM052 is also set to the ON state) and the setting change mode is controlled. At the time of turning on the power, "2" is stored as a set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102. This set value "2" is a value stored in the set value storage area when the power is cut off during the previous setting change mode.

Next, as shown in order 7, the set value "2" stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is read as the setting change mode is started, and the read set value is set to 1. "3" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON.

Since the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on in order 6, when the control shown in FIG. 8-11 described above is applied, even if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (or cleared). Even if the switch 21TM052 is in the OFF state), it will be automatically controlled to the setting change mode. Therefore, the state of the lock switch 21TM051 in the order 6 and the order 7 may be an OFF state.

In this way, if the set value is changed in the setting change mode and the power is cut off without turning off the lock switch 21TM051 (without ending the setting change mode), the power is restored. , The set value after the change in the previous setting change mode is held in the set value storage area. Therefore, when the power is restored, the set value that has already been planned may be set. In this case, the clerk at the game hall ends the setting change mode without performing an operation to change the set value again. Since the game machine may be shifted to the normal game processing, the workability can be improved.

Next, regarding the control when the power is cut off after the setting value is changed during the setting change mode and the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (after the setting change mode ends). This will be described with reference to FIG. 8-12 (2).

The order 1 to order 4 are the same as the example shown in FIG. 8-12 (1), and the description thereof will be omitted. Next, as shown in order 5, in the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state, so that the setting change mode ends. As a result, the set value "2" after the operation of the second setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is performed is fixed as the final set value. At this time, "2" is stored as a set value in the set value storage area, and "3" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 by adding 1 to the confirmed set value.

After that, as shown in order 6, it is assumed that the operation of turning off the power switch 21TM055 is performed and the power supply is stopped. In this power-off state, the set value "2" stored in the set value storage area formed in the backup area of the RAM 102 is held as it is.

Next, as shown in order 7, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is set to the ON state (the clear switch 21TM052 is also set to the ON state) and the setting change mode is controlled. At the time of turning on the power, "2" is stored as a set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102. This setting value "2" is a value finally stored in the setting value storage area at the end of the previous setting change mode.

Next, as shown in the order 8, the set value "2" stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is read with the start of the setting change mode, and the read set value is set to 1. "3" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON.

As shown in FIGS. 8-12 (1) and 8-12, when the power supply is cut off while the setting change mode is controlled, and when the power supply is stopped after the setting change mode control is completed. In either case, when the power is restored, the set value after being changed according to the setting change operation in the previous setting change mode, that is, the set value stored in the set value storage area immediately before the power is turned off, is , It is a valid setting value (setting value stored in the setting storage area when the power is restored).

The memory control of the set value shown in FIG. 8-12 is not limited. That is, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area when controlled in the setting change mode is copied to the setting information temporary storage area, and the setting changeover switch (clear switch) is used when the setting change mode is controlled. When 21TM052 is operated, the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is changed without changing the setting value in the setting value storage area, and the setting change mode is terminated (lock switch 21TM051 is turned on). Based on the operation of switching from the state to the OFF state), the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is stored (overwritten) in the setting value storage area to confirm the setting value. You may. In this case, the set value to be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is a value (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the set value (0 to 5) stored in the set information temporary storage area. As the set value stored in is changed, the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 also changes.

With such a configuration, the setting is controlled even when the setting change mode is performed when the power is turned on (when the setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is changed). If the power is cut off without completing the operation to end the change mode (without switching the lock switch 21TM051 to the OFF state), the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is the power supply. It means that it has not been changed since it was turned on (before the setting change operation was performed in the setting change mode). That is, in the power supply stop state, the set value stored in the set value storage area at the time of the previous power-on is still held. Therefore, the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A) when controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored is stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 when the power is turned on last time. It becomes a value according to the set value that was set.

In this way, the set value when the power is cut off while being controlled in the setting change mode can be appropriately set. Further, when the power supply is stopped in an unstable state in which the setting change mode is not ended, the change of the setting value can be restricted.

For the control related to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode shown in the above embodiment, a plurality of setting values (for example, 0 to 5) are provided, and the jackpot probability differs depending on the setting values. It is applicable, but not limited to this, although a plurality of set values (for example, 0 to 5) are provided, the jackpot probability is common regardless of the set value (for example, for all of the set values 0 to 5). It can also be applied to a game machine (with a jackpot probability of 1/300).

Further, the present feature section 21TM discloses the following inventions.

As shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine including a setting changing means for changing a setting value in a plurality of stages based on a setting changing operation from the outside has been proposed. Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102), a gaming machine has been proposed in which a "big hit signal" or the like is output from an external output terminal of a main control board. Regarding a gaming machine as described in JP-A-2010-20092 (paragraph 0007), when it is necessary for the external device to grasp the control state related to the setting when changing the setting value or the like. However, even if the signal output technique of the conventional gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-500206 (paragraph 0102) is applied, there is a problem that it is difficult for the external device to grasp this. is there. The invention according to the means O1 to the means O4 has been made in view of the above-mentioned actual conditions, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of appropriately notifying the control state related to the setting to the outside of the game machine.

The game machine of means O1
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing control (big hit determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to a set value (six stages of set values 0 to 5 in which the range of random numbers for jackpot determination is different). ,
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) capable of controlling a setting change mode in which a set value can be changed, and
Setting confirmation mode control means (step S21TM4530 to step S21TM4570 and step S21TM4650 capable of executing the game control microcomputer 100) that can control the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed, and
With a specific signal output means (game control microcomputer 100 that outputs a security signal in step S21TM4560) that outputs a specific signal (security signal) in response to the start of control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. ,
A setting means (a game control microcomputer 100 for setting a value of a security signal timer) for setting a value (value of a security signal timer) for a period during which a specific signal is output is provided.
The setting means can set a predetermined value common to the case where the setting change mode is controlled and the case where the setting confirmation mode is controlled (1 second is set as the value of the security signal timer in step S21TM4710). ),
The specific signal output means outputs a specific signal in response to the end of control of either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode until at least a period corresponding to the predetermined value elapses (in the setting confirmation mode). When the setting confirmation mode ends, the security signal is continuously output until 1 second elapses, and when the setting change mode ends, the security signal is continuously output until 30 seconds elapse from the end of the setting change mode. To do)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the state of the gaming machine related to the setting can be appropriately notified to the external device.

The game machine of means O2 is
It is a game machine of means O1
An initialization means for initializing the game state (a game control microcomputer 100 that executes RAM clear (step S21TM1410) based on the fact that the RAM clear flag is set in steps S21TM4050 and S21TM4150) is provided.
The initialization means initializes the gaming state in accordance with the control of the setting change mode (when the setting change mode is controlled, the RAM clear is executed after the setting change mode is controlled).
After setting the predetermined value (after setting 1 second as the value of the security signal timer in step S21TM4710), the setting means can set a specific value corresponding to a period longer than the period corresponding to the predetermined value. (When RAM clear is executed, 30 seconds can be set as the value of the security signal timer in step S21TM1465).
The specific signal output means outputs a specific signal until a period corresponding to the specific value elapses in response to the end of the control of the setting change mode (from the end of the setting change mode with the end of the setting change mode). Continuously output security signals until 30 seconds have passed)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, in both cases when the control of the setting change mode is finished and when the control of the setting confirmation mode is finished, a specific signal is output for at least the period corresponding to the predetermined value, and the setting is changed. When controlled to a mode, a specific signal is output for a period longer than the period corresponding to the predetermined value. Therefore, the setting process by the setting means is standardized and the output is different between the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. It is possible to set the period.

The gaming machine of means O3 is
A gaming machine of means O1 or means O2,
In the setting change mode, when the power supply to the game machine is stopped without performing a specific operation for ending the setting change mode (detection that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in step S21TM4680). In step S21TM4580, the setting change flag is set based on the shift to the setting change mode in the backup area of the specific information storage means (RAM 102, which stores the setting change flag), and the setting change mode ends. Based on this, the game control microcomputer 100) that clears the setting changing flag in step S21TM4720 is provided.
When the power supply to the game machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (it is determined in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration that the setting changing flag is set). (In some cases), the game is stopped and a specific signal is output (the processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220 is repeatedly executed until the power is turned off based on the fact that the conditions for shifting to the setting change mode are not satisfied). It is characterized in that it is possible.
According to this, when the power supply is stopped during the control of the setting change mode, the state of the game machine can be appropriately notified to the external device when the power supply is restarted.

The game machine of means O4
Any gaming machine selected from means O1 to means O3.
A game control means for controlling the progress of the game (a game control microcomputer 100 that executes a game control timer interrupt process) and
It is equipped with an effect control means (CPU 120 for effect control) that controls the execution of the effect.
The game control means
Display means (display monitor 21TM029) and
The setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 that executes the processes of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) and
In the setting change mode, power is supplied to the game machine without performing a specific operation for ending the setting change mode (without detecting an operation in which the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in step S21TM4680). Specific information storage means for storing specific information when stopped (in the backup area of the RAM 102, the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the shift to the setting change mode, and the setting change mode is terminated. Based on the game control microcomputer 100), which clears the setting changing flag in step S21TM4720, and
When the power supply to the game machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (it is determined in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration that the setting changing flag is set). (In some cases), it is possible to execute an error notification in the display means and send an error command to the effect control means (a set value abnormality error command is sent in step S21TM4190, and a display monitor is displayed in the error display in step S21TM4210. It is possible to display the letter "E" on 21TM029),
In response to receiving the error command, the effect control means notifies the image display device 5 to prompt an operation for changing the set value (“The power is turned on again after the power is turned off to switch to the setting change mode”. Display the message "Please migrate")
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the state of the game machine can be appropriately notified to the clerk of the game hall, and the operation for changing the set value can be urged.

Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine including a setting changing means for changing a setting value in a plurality of stages based on a setting changing operation from the outside has been proposed. In a gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it is necessary to appropriately notify the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when the set value is changed. The inventions according to the means P1 to the means P4 have been made in view of the above-mentioned actual conditions, and provide a gaming machine that appropriately notifies the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when the set value is changed. To provide.

The game machine of means P1
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing control (big hit determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to a set value (six stages of set values 0 to 5 in which the range of random numbers for jackpot determination is different). ,
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) capable of controlling a setting change mode in which a set value can be changed, and
Specific information storage means for storing specific information that can be identified as being controlled in the setting change mode (the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the transition to the setting change mode, and the setting change mode is terminated. Based on this, the game control microcomputer 100) that clears the setting changing flag in step S21TM4720 is provided.
The specific information storage means can store the specific information even after the power supply to the game machine is stopped (the value of the setting changing flag is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102).
When the power supply to the game machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (it is determined in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration that the setting changing flag is set). In some cases), it is further provided with an error notification means (a game control microcomputer 100 that displays an error in step S21TM4210 when the transition condition to the setting change mode is not satisfied) capable of executing error notification. ..
According to this, when the power supply is stopped in the setting change mode, the state of the game machine can be appropriately notified.

The game machine of means P2 is
It is a game machine of means P1
In the setting change mode control means, the setting change condition is satisfied (when the power is turned on, the game machine frame 3 is in the open state, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch (setting). It is possible to control the setting change mode based on the changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state).
When the power supply to the game machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (it is determined in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration that the setting changing flag is set). (In some cases), based on the fact that the setting change condition is satisfied, it is possible to control the setting change mode without executing the error notification (at the time of turning on the power, all in steps S21TM4120, step S21TM4130, and step S21TM4140). Based on the determination of YES, the mode shifts to the setting change mode without shifting to the loop processing of step S21TM420 to step S21TM4220).
It is characterized by that.
According to this, when the condition to be controlled in the setting change mode is satisfied, the setting change mode is controlled without executing the error notification, and the setting value is appropriately set while avoiding unnecessary error notification. You can encourage changes.

The game machine of means P3
A gaming machine of means P1 or means P2,
When the power supply to the game machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (it is determined in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration that the setting changing flag is set). (In some cases), it is possible to execute the error notification and put the game in the game stop state (when the power is turned on, if the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied (step S21TM4120 to step S21TM4140). If NO is determined in (), the process proceeds to the loop processing of step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220 without shifting to the setting change mode).
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to limit the progress of the game in a state where the set value is unstable, and it is possible to realize appropriate game control.

The game machine of means P4
Any gaming machine selected from means P1 to means P3.
A game control means for controlling the progress of the game (a game control microcomputer 100 that executes a game control timer interrupt process) and
It is equipped with an effect control means (CPU 120 for effect control) that controls the execution of the effect.
The game control means
Display means (display monitor 21TM029) and
The setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 that executes the processes of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) and
With the specific information storage means,
When the power supply to the game machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (it is determined in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration that the setting changing flag is set). (In some cases), it is possible to execute the error notification in the display means and send an error command to the effect control means (a set value abnormality error command is sent in step S21TM4190 and displayed in the error display in step S21TM4210). It is possible to display the letter "E" on the monitor 21TM029),
In response to receiving the error command, the effect control means notifies the image display device 5 to prompt an operation for changing the set value (“The power is turned on again after the power is turned off to switch to the setting change mode”. Display the message "Please migrate")
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the state of the game machine can be appropriately notified to the clerk of the game hall, and the operation for changing the set value can be urged.

Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine including a setting changing means for changing a setting value in a plurality of stages based on a setting changing operation from the outside has been proposed. In a gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it is necessary to appropriately determine the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when the set value is changed. The inventions according to the means Q1 to the means Q5 have been made in view of the above-mentioned actual conditions, and provide a game machine that appropriately determines the state of the game machine when the power supply is stopped when the set value is changed. To do.

The game machine of means Q1
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing control (big hit determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to a set value (six stages of set values 0 to 5 in which the range of random numbers for jackpot determination is different). ,
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) capable of controlling a setting change mode in which a set value can be changed, and
Specific information storage means for storing specific information that can be identified as being controlled in the setting change mode (the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the transition to the setting change mode, and the setting change mode is terminated. Based on this, the game control microcomputer 100) that clears the setting changing flag in step S21TM4720 is provided.
The specific information storage means can store the specific information even after the power supply to the game machine is stopped (the value of the setting changing flag is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102).
The setting change mode control means sets the setting changing flag in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the game machine is started. When it is determined that it is set), it is controlled to the setting change mode (when the power is turned on, the game machine frame 3 is in the open state, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch is set. (Setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is automatically controlled to the setting change mode regardless of whether or not the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is satisfied.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the state of the game machine can be appropriately determined when the power supply is stopped in the setting change mode accompanied by the initialization of the game state.
The RAM is set based on the initialization means (for example, step S21TM4050 and step S21TM4150) in which the gaming machine of means Q1 initializes the gaming state in response to the control of the setting change mode. A game control microcomputer 100) that executes clearing (step S21TM1410) may be further provided.

The game machine of means Q2 is
It is a game machine of means Q1
The setting change mode control means is based on the fact that the setting change condition is satisfied when the specific information is not stored in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the game machine is started. Controlled to the setting change mode (when the power is turned on, if the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, and the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state. To shift to the setting change mode in which the RAM clear flag is 1 (RAM clear is executed after the setting change mode ends because the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state). (The mode shifts to the setting change mode based on the condition being satisfied), and when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means, the setting change condition is not satisfied or not. When controlling to the setting change mode (when the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), regardless of whether or not the conditions for shifting to the setting change mode are satisfied. Automatically control to change setting mode)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, when the power is cut off during the setting change mode control, the setting change mode is set even when the setting change condition is not satisfied based on the specific information stored at the time of power restoration. Since it will be controlled, workability can be improved.

The game machine of means Q3 is
A game machine of means Q1 or means Q2,
The setting change mode control means is a transition operation when the power supply to the game machine is started (when the power is turned on, when the setting change flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), the game machine frame 3 Is in the open state, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the RAM clear flag is 1. (The clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state, so that the RAM is cleared after the setting change mode ends. Is executed), it is possible to control to the setting change mode based on the condition for shifting to the setting change mode), and when the setting change mode is controlled. It is possible to terminate the setting change mode based on a specific operation (it was confirmed that the lock switch 21TM051 was turned off in step S21TM4680).
The specific information storage means stores the specific information when it is controlled to the setting change mode (sets the setting changing flag at the timing of step S21TM4580 when the control of the setting change mode is started), and the specific operation. When the setting change mode ends, the specific information is deleted (the setting changing flag is cleared at the timing of step S21TM4720 when the control of the setting change mode ends).
The setting change mode control means said, when the power supply to the game machine is started, when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means, regardless of whether or not the transition operation is performed. Control to the setting change mode (when the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), regardless of whether or not the conditions for shifting to the setting change mode are satisfied. The setting change mode is automatically controlled), and the setting change mode is terminated based on the specific operation (the setting change mode is terminated based on the confirmation that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in step S21TM4680. Let)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the conditions for terminating the control of the setting change mode can be appropriately determined.

The game machine of means Q4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means Q1 to means Q3.
It is equipped with a set value storage means (a set value storage area of the RAM 102 in which the set value is stored) for storing the set value (six stages of set values 0 to 5 in which the range of random numbers for jackpot determination is different).
It is possible to execute control according to the set value stored in the set value storage means (big hit determination process in the special symbol process process, etc.).
When the setting value stored in the setting value storage means is changed based on the change operation when the setting change mode is controlled (when the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated in step S21TM4610). Change the setting value stored in the setting value storage area),
The setting change mode control means terminates the setting change mode based on a specific operation when the setting change mode is controlled (it was confirmed in step S21TM4680 that the lock switch 21TM051 was turned off. Exit the setting change mode based on),
The set value storage means is changed by the change operation in the setting change mode when the power supply to the game machine is stopped without performing the specific operation when controlled in the setting change mode. The set value is continuously stored (the set value storage area is formed in the backup area of the RAM 102, and when the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated during the setting change mode, the setting value storage area is stored. Since the setting value itself stored in is changed, the setting value after being changed by the change operation is retained even if the power is cut off during the setting change mode.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, when the power supply is restarted, the set value after being changed by the change operation in the setting change mode before the power failure occurs is stored in the set value storage means, and the set value corresponds to the set value. Workability can be improved because control is executed.

The game machine of means Q5 is
Any gaming machine selected from means Q1 to means Q3.
It is equipped with a set value storage means (a set value storage area of the RAM 102 in which the set value is stored) for storing the set value (six stages of set values 0 to 5 in which the range of random numbers for jackpot determination is different).
It is possible to execute control according to the set value stored in the set value storage means (big hit determination process in the special symbol process process, etc.).
The setting change mode control means is stored in the setting value storage area when the change operation when the setting change mode is controlled and (when the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated in the setting change mode). (Change only the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area, not the existing setting value), and change the setting value stored in the setting value storage means based on the specific operation after the change operation. The setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area at that time is stored in the setting value storage area based on the confirmation that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in the setting change mode. To confirm it as a valid setting value and exit the setting change mode),
When the set value storage means is controlled to the setting change mode and the power supply to the game machine is stopped without performing the specific operation, the change operation is performed in the setting change mode. Stores the set value before it is set (even if the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated during the setting change mode, if the lock switch 21TM051 is not switched off, the setting value itself stored in the setting value storage area Is not changed, so if a power failure occurs during the setting change mode, the setting value before being controlled to the setting change mode is retained.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, when the power supply is stopped in an unstable state in which the setting change mode is not ended, the change of the setting value can be restricted.

[Explanation of feature 16TM]
Next, the feature unit 16TM will be described. 9-1 (A1) and 9-1 (B1) are explanatory views showing specific examples of the hold display and the active display in the present embodiment. The hold display is the display information corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol that has not been executed, and the active display is the display information corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol that has been executed. In the present embodiment, a first hold display area 16TM011 for displaying the first hold storage number (0 to 4 first hold display 16TM001) is provided at the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5, and the image display device An active display area 16TM013 is provided at the lower center of the screen of No. 5 where the active display 16TM003 corresponding to the currently executing fluctuation display is displayed.

Further, when the gaming state is controlled to the low probability low base state (normal state), the mini effect area 16TM035 described later is placed in the special effect area 16TM035 provided below the active display 16TM003 at the lower center of the screen of the image display device 5. Slot 16TM030 is displayed. In this example, since the mini slot 16TM030 is displayed directly below the active display 16TM003, the player can see the mini slot 16TM030 as if it were the pedestal of the active display 16TM003. That is, since the mini-slot 16TM030 is displayed at a position corresponding to the active display 16TM003, the player can easily grasp that the mini-slot 16TM030 executes the effect corresponding to the variable display being executed. Can be done.

In the present embodiment, the mini slot 16TM030 can be displayed regardless of whether or not the variable display of the special symbol is executed (whether or not the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed) and regardless of the number of reserved storages. Information.

When the first hold storage number is not 0, the effect control CPU 120 displays the first hold display 16TM001 in the first hold display area 16TM011 in a number corresponding to the first hold storage number. That is, in the first hold display 16TM001, the start condition (for example, winning the first start winning opening) is satisfied, but the start condition (for example, the variable display of the special symbol is not executed, and the game is controlled to the jackpot game state. Information corresponding to the variable display (and the variable display of the decorative symbol) of the first special symbol in which the second reserved memory number is 0 and the first reserved memory number is not 0) is not established. Is. When a plurality of first hold displays 16TM001 are displayed in the first hold display area 16TM011, the first hold display 16TM001 corresponds to the order close to the active display area 16TM013 (from the right when viewed from the player). The start condition of the variable display is satisfied.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the active display 16TM003 in the active display area 16TM013 when the variable display of the decorative symbol is being executed. That is, the active display 16TM003 is a big hit game in which the start condition (for example, the variable display of the special symbol is not executed) after the start condition (for example, winning the first start winning opening or the second start winning opening) is satisfied. This is information corresponding to the variable display (and the variable display of the decorative symbol) of the special symbol for which the state is not controlled and the number of reserved memories is not 0).

In the present embodiment, as described above, the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed in response to the variable display of the special symbol. As shown in FIGS. 9-1 (A1) and 9-1 (A1) and (B1), the area at the upper center of the image display device 5 on which the decorative symbol is variablely displayed and stopped is displayed, from the left, the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, The symbol display area 5R is used.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-1 (A1) and (B1), the symbol is smaller than the decorative symbol displayed in the upper right portion of the image display device 5, and the special symbol is variablely displayed. A symbol indicating whether or not the symbol is displayed and the display result of the special symbol is called a small symbol. The variable display of the small symbol can be executed in parallel with the variable display of the special symbol, and the stop display of the small symbol can also be executed in parallel with the stop display of the special symbol. Then, the area at the upper right of the screen of the image display device 5, in which the small symbols corresponding to the first special symbol are variablely displayed and stopped, is displayed from the left in the small symbol display area 5l, the small symbol display area 5c, and the small symbol display area. Let it be 5r. The small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r have smaller display areas than the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Therefore, the visibility of the small symbol is lower than the visibility of the decorative symbol.

As shown in FIGS. 9-1 (A1) and 9-1 (B1), in the present embodiment, when controlled to the low accuracy low base state (normal state), the mini slot is set in the special effect area 16TM035 of the image display device 5. 16TM030 is displayed. In the mini-slot 16TM030, variable display of a plurality of types of mini-slot symbols is executed. In the first mini-slot variable display described later, as shown in FIG. 9-1 (A2), the mini-slots of "replay", "bell", "watermelon", "cherry", "7", and "blank" The symbols are variably displayed, and in the second mini-slot variable display, which will be described later, as shown in FIG. 9-1 (B2), the symbols without the warning characters (“not displayed”) and the jackpot expectation are displayed. The mini-slot symbols of "CHANGE", "super heat", and "FEVER", which are symbols consisting of suggestive notice characters, are variably displayed.

(Variable display of the first mini slot)
As shown in FIG. 9-1 (A1), in the present embodiment, when the low accuracy and low base state (normal state) is controlled, the variation display of the special symbol (variation display of the decorative symbol, variation of the small symbol) is performed. Each time the display) is executed, the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 (areas corresponding to each of the three reels in the slot machine) are divided into three areas, "left", "middle", and "right". ), The first mini-slot variable display in which the mini-slot symbol is variably displayed (for example, scroll display in the vertical direction or update display) can be executed. In the first mini-slot variable display, the mini-slot symbols are displayed in one stage (1 line) in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1. In the following description, the term "variable display" refers to a variable display of a special symbol, a variable display of a decorative symbol corresponding to a variable display of a special symbol, or a variable display of a small symbol.

Here, as shown in FIG. 9-1 (A2), in each mini slot symbol display area of the mini slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 (3 reels), "replay", "bell", "watermelon", A plurality of types of symbols that can be distinguished from each other, such as "cherry", "7", and "blank (horizontal linear object (-) in this example)", are variably displayed in a predetermined order.

Then, when the mini-slot symbols are stopped in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1, if the combinations of symbols called the winning combinations are aligned, the winning combination is established as if the winning combination was established. The winning combination may be a combination of the same symbols or a combination including different symbols. The winning combination in the present embodiment is a combination of the same symbol and a combination including different symbols. In addition, in the case of a combination of different symbols, the winning combination is "off".

In the present embodiment, the winning combination is established when the combinations of the same symbols are aligned. For example, if the same symbol combinations of [bell], [bell], and [bell] are aligned in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1, the role of "bell" is established. Similarly, if the same combination of [watermelon], [watermelon], and [watermelon] is available, the role of "watermelon" is established, and if the same combination of [cherry], [cherry], and [cherry] is available, "cherry". The role of "cherry" is established, and when the combinations of the same symbols of [7], [7], and [7] are complete, the role of "7 match" is established. However, when the same combinations of [blank], [blank], and [blank] are aligned in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1, the same treatment is performed as when the winning combination is "missing".

(Variable display of the second mini slot)
As shown in FIG. 9-1 (B1), in the present embodiment, after the first mini-slot variable display is executed (after any of the above-mentioned successful combinations is established), the two are not divided into a plurality. In a single mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 (area corresponding to one reel), it is possible to execute a second mini-slot variable display in which the mini-slot symbol is variably displayed (for example, vertical scroll display or update display). is there. In the second mini-slot variable display, the mini-slot symbols are displayed in one stage (one line) in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1.

Here, as shown in FIG. 9-1 (B2), in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 (1 reel), "no display", "CHANGE", "super heat", and "FEVER" can be distinguished from each other. A plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed in a predetermined order. In the present embodiment, the display result by the second mini-slot variable display, that is, the display result of the variable display of the special symbol being executed by the displayed characters (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol being executed). Is suggested to be a "big hit".

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-1 (A1) and 9-1 (B1), the number of fluctuation displays executed after the gaming state is controlled to the low probability low base state (normal state) is counted. The fluctuation number display 16TM040 indicating the value of the fluctuation number counter is displayed at the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5. The value indicated by the variation display 16TM040 allows the player to grasp the number of variation displays executed in the normal state. In the examples shown in FIGS. 9-1 (A1) and 9-1 (B1), "125" is displayed as the variation number display 16TM040, and the variation display has already been executed 124 times since the gaming state shifts to the normal state. It shows the state in which the 125th fluctuation display is being executed at the present time.

Here, the variation number display 16TM040 is different from the normal mode (for example, the white mode) by executing the second setting suggestion effect described later based on the set value of the game machine. For example, it changes to purple mode).

It should be noted that the display mode of the variation number display 16TM040 is expected to be different from the normal mode (for example, white mode), the normal mode, and the above-mentioned setting suggestion mode (for example, purple mode) based on the display result of the variation display to be executed. A notice effect (for example, referred to as a second expected degree notice effect) that changes to a degree notice mode (for example, a red mode) may be executed. However, in the same variation display, both the second setting suggestion effect and the second expectation notice effect are not executed, and if it is decided to execute the second setting suggestion effect, the second setting suggestion effect is displayed. Expectation notice production shall not be executed. That is, the second setting suggestion effect is executed with priority over the second expectation notice effect.

FIG. 9-2 is a flowchart showing a change effect determination process executed at the time of starting winning. The effect control CPU 120 executes the start winning change effect determination process shown in FIG. 9-2 in the lookahead advance notice setting process (step S161) of the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7.

In the start winning change effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first receives a set of start winning commands (for example, a symbol designation command, a variable category command) based on the occurrence of a start winning to the first starting winning opening. , And whether or not the first hold storage number addition designation command) has been newly received (step S16TM1000).

The symbol designation command is an effect control command that indicates whether or not a big hit is obtained among the winning judgment results and the judgment result of the type of big hit. The CPU 103 determines whether or not a jackpot will occur and the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot based on the jackpot determination random number and the jackpot type determination random number extracted at the time of starting winning, and a symbol for designating the determination result. Output the specified command. Further, the variation category command is an effect control command that indicates the determination result of the variation pattern among the determination results at the time of winning. The CPU 103 determines whether or not it will be normal reach, whether or not it will be super reach, etc. based on the random number for determining the variation pattern type extracted at the time of starting winning, and outputs a variation category command that specifies the determination result. To do. Further, the first hold storage number addition designation command is an effect control command for designating that the first hold storage number has been increased by 1.

Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 newly stores one set of start winning commands (symbol designation command, variable category command, and first hold storage number addition designation command) in the start winning command storage area. Judge whether or not it is. If a new command for starting a set of winning prizes has not been received (NO in step S16TM1000), the process ends as it is.

If one set of commands at the time of starting winning is newly received, the effect control CPU 120 determines the final display mode of the active display and the final display mode determination table of the active display described later (FIG. 9-3 (A)). It is determined based on (see step S16TM1010). The final display mode of the active display determined in step S16TM1010 is the final display color of the active display determined at the time of starting winning. In the present embodiment, after the active display has changed to the final display color, the warning characters may be superimposed and displayed on the active display according to the execution of the expectation warning effect described later. That is, there is a possibility that the mode of the active display may change from the final display mode of the active display determined at the time of winning the start, based on the effect determination process at the start of the fluctuation.

FIG. 9-3 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the final display mode determination table of the active display. As shown in FIG. 9-3 (A), in this embodiment, as the final display mode of the active display 16TM003, any one of "normal mode (white mode)", "blue mode", and "red mode" is used. It is possible to determine, and a determination value is assigned to each of these modes.

As shown in FIG. 9-3 (A), when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "missing"), the starting winning is said. The final display mode of the active display 16TM003 corresponding to the variable display based on (new first hold storage) is the normal mode (white circle display) at a rate of 70% and the blue mode (blue) at a rate of 25%. (Round display), and a red mode (red round display) at a rate of 5%.

On the other hand, when the judgment result at the time of starting prize is "big hit" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), it is based on the starting prize (new first hold memory). The final display mode of the active display 16TM003 corresponding to the variable display is a normal mode at a rate of 10%, a blue mode at a rate of 30%, and a red mode at a rate of 60%.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern of the active display, the execution presence / absence of the first change effect, and the number of executions based on the change pattern determination table of the active display (see FIG. 9-3 (B)). (Step S16TM1020).

FIG. 9-3 (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a table for determining a change pattern of the active display. In this embodiment, any of change patterns 001 to change pattern 025 can be determined as the change pattern of the active display, and a determination value is assigned to each of these change patterns.

As shown in FIG. 9-3 (B), the active display at the time of active shift is the normal mode, and (1) the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, by the symbol designation command). If the specified judgment result is "missing"), the change pattern of the active display corresponding to the change display based on the start winning prize (new first hold memory) has a probability of 70% change pattern 001. The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 002 is selected with a 25% probability and the change pattern 003 is selected with a 5% probability. On the other hand, (2) when the judgment result at the time of starting prize is "big hit" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the starting prize (new first hold) As for the change pattern of the active display corresponding to the variation display based on the memory), the change pattern 001 is selected with a probability of 10%, the change pattern 002 is selected with a probability of 30%, and the change pattern 003 is selected with a probability of 60%. Judgment values are assigned so that

In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 determines the final display mode of the active display when a start winning prize occurs, but the display mode of the active display at the time of active shift is different from the final display mode. Will execute an active change effect that changes the display mode of the active display.

Here, when the display mode of the active display is changed (when the active change effect is executed) and when the display mode of the active display is not changed (when the active change effect is not executed), the display mode of the active display is changed. It is possible to perform a first change effect that suggests that it may change. This first change effect has a success mode and a failure mode. In the example shown below, when the first change effect of the success mode is executed, the display mode of the active display is changed and the failure mode is changed. When the first change effect of the above is executed, the display mode of the active display shall not be changed. Further, the first change effect is an effect in which the character acts on the active display. When the first change effect of the success mode is executed, the character acts on the active display to change the display mode of the active display, and when the first change effect of the failure mode is executed, the character Acts on the active display, but does not change the display mode of the active display.

The number of executions of the first change effect in the change pattern 001 is 0. The number of times of execution of the first change effect in the change pattern 002 is one, and the first change effect of the failure mode is executed. The number of executions of the first change effect in the change pattern 003 is two, and the first change effect of the failure mode is executed in each case.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-3 (B), the active display at the time of active shift is in the blue mode, and (1) the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, symbol designation). If the judgment result specified by the command is "missing"), the change pattern of the active display corresponding to the change display based on the start winning prize (new first hold memory) is 30% of the change pattern 011. Selected with probability, change pattern 012 is selected with 27% probability, change pattern 013 is selected with 23% probability, change pattern 014 is selected with 10% probability, change pattern 015 is selected with 5% probability. The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 016 is selected with a probability of 5%. On the other hand, (2) when the judgment result at the time of the start winning is "big hit" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the start winning (new first hold). As for the change pattern of the active display corresponding to the variation display based on the memory), the change pattern 011 is selected with a probability of 5%, the change pattern 012 is selected with a probability of 10%, and the change pattern 013 is selected with a probability of 15%. The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 014 is selected with a probability of 20%, the change pattern 015 is selected with a probability of 25%, and the change pattern 016 is selected with a probability of 25%.

At this time, the number of executions of the first change effect in the change pattern 011 is 0. The number of executions of the first change effect in the change pattern 012 is one, and the first change effect of the failure mode is executed. The first change effect in the change pattern 013 is executed twice, and the first change effect in the failure mode is executed in each case. The number of times of execution of the first change effect in the change pattern 014 is one, and the first change effect of the success mode is executed. The first change effect in the change pattern 015 is executed twice, and the first change effect in the success mode is executed after the first change effect in the failure mode is executed. The number of executions of the first change effect in the change pattern 016 is two, and after the first change effect of the success mode is executed, the first change effect of the failure mode is executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-3 (B), the active display at the time of active shift is in the red mode, and (1) the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, symbol designation). If the judgment result specified by the command is "missing"), the change pattern of the active display corresponding to the change display based on the start winning prize (new first hold memory) is 35% of the change pattern 021. Selected with probability, change pattern 022 is selected with 25% probability, change pattern 023 is selected with 20% probability, change pattern 024 is selected with 10% probability, change pattern 025 is selected with 10% probability. Judgment values are assigned to be selected. On the other hand, (2) when the judgment result at the time of starting prize is "big hit" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the starting prize (new first hold) As for the change pattern of the active display corresponding to the variation display based on the memory), the change pattern 022 is selected with a probability of 5%, the change pattern 022 is selected with a probability of 15%, and the change pattern 023 is selected with a probability of 30%. The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 024 is selected with a probability of 25% and the change pattern 025 is selected with a probability of 25%.

At this time, the number of executions of the first change effect in the change pattern 021 is 0. The number of times of execution of the first change effect in the change pattern 022 is one, and the first change effect of the success mode is executed. The number of executions of the first change effect in the change pattern 023 is two, and the first change effect of the successful mode is executed in each case. The first change effect in the change pattern 024 is executed twice, and the first change effect in the success mode is executed after the first change effect in the failure mode is executed. The first change effect in the change pattern 025 is executed twice, and the first change effect in the success mode is executed after the first change effect in the failure mode is executed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern of the hold display based on the change pattern determination table of the hold display (see FIGS. 9-4 (C) to (F)) (step S16TM1030), and performs the process as it is. finish.

FIG. 9-4 (C) is for determining a change pattern of the hold display for one hold when the first hold storage number stored in the first hold storage area is “1”. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a table. In this embodiment, any of the change patterns 101 to 103 can be determined as the change pattern of the hold display, and a determination value is assigned to each of these change patterns.

As shown in FIG. 9-4 (C), the active display at the time of active shift is the normal mode, and (1) the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, by the symbol designation command). If the specified determination result is "missing"), the change pattern 101 is 100% as the change pattern of the first hold display corresponding to the change display based on the start winning prize (new first hold memory). Judgment values are assigned so that they are selected with probability. On the other hand, (2) when the judgment result at the time of starting prize is "big hit" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the starting prize (new first hold) A determination value is assigned to the change pattern of the first hold display corresponding to the change display based on the memory) so that the change pattern 101 is selected with a probability of 100%.

As shown in FIG. 9-4 (C), the active display at the time of active shift is in the blue mode, and (1) the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, by the symbol designation command). If the specified determination result is "missing"), the change pattern 102 of the first hold display corresponding to the change display based on the start winning prize (new first hold memory) is 100%. Judgment values are assigned so that they are selected with probability. On the other hand, (2) when the judgment result at the time of the start winning is "big hit" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the start winning (new first hold). A determination value is assigned to the change pattern of the first hold display corresponding to the change display based on the memory) so that the change pattern 102 is selected with a probability of 100%.

As shown in FIG. 9-4 (C), the active display at the time of active shift is in the red mode, and (1) the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, by the symbol designation command). If the specified determination result is "missing"), the change pattern 103 of the first hold display corresponding to the change display based on the start winning prize (new first hold memory) is 100%. Judgment values are assigned so that they are selected with probability. On the other hand, (2) when the judgment result at the time of the start winning is "big hit" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the start winning (new first hold). A determination value is assigned to the change pattern of the first hold display corresponding to the change display based on the memory) so that the change pattern 103 is selected with a probability of 100%.

In the description of FIG. 9-4, the active shift means that the first hold display area 16TM001 shifts from the first hold display area 16TM011 to the active display area 16TM013 (as a result, the determination target at the time of starting winning is obtained. The active display 16TM003 corresponding to the variable display is displayed).

In this embodiment, when the first hold display 16TM001 shifts from the first hold display area 16TM011 to the active display area 16TM013, the display mode is not changed. That is, the display mode of the first hold display 16TM001 immediately before the active shift and the display mode of the active display 16TM003 immediately after the active shift match.

In the present embodiment, the display mode of the first hold display 16TM001 is not changed during the active shift, but the display mode of the first hold display 16TM001 is changed during the active shift. You may let me.

FIG. 9-4 (D) is for determining the change pattern of the hold display for two holds when the first hold storage number stored in the first hold storage area is “2”. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a table. In this embodiment, any of the change patterns 201 to 206 can be determined as the change pattern of the hold display, and a determination value is assigned to each of these change patterns.

As shown in FIG. 9-4 (D), the active display at the time of active shift is the normal mode, and (1) the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, by the symbol designation command). If the specified determination result is "missing"), the change pattern 201 of the first hold display corresponding to the change display based on the start winning prize (new first hold memory) is 100%. Judgment values are assigned so that they are selected with probability. On the other hand, (2) when the judgment result at the time of the start winning is "big hit" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the start winning (new first hold). A determination value is assigned to the change pattern of the first hold display corresponding to the change display based on the memory) so that the change pattern 201 is selected with a probability of 100%.

As shown in FIG. 9-4 (D), the active display at the time of active shift is in the blue mode, and (1) the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, by the symbol designation command). If the specified determination result is "missing"), the change pattern of the first hold display corresponding to the change display based on the start winning prize (new first hold memory) is 40% of the change pattern 202. The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 203 is selected with a probability and the change pattern 203 is selected with a probability of 60%. On the other hand, (2) when the judgment result at the time of the start winning is "big hit" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the start winning (new first hold). As for the change pattern of the first hold display corresponding to the variation display based on the memory), the determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 202 is selected with a probability of 60% and the change pattern 203 is selected with a probability of 40%. There is.

As shown in FIG. 9-4 (D), the active display at the time of active shift is in the red mode, and (1) the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, by the symbol designation command). If the specified determination result is "missing"), the change pattern of the first hold display corresponding to the change display based on the start winning prize (new first hold memory) is 10% of the change pattern 204. Judgment values are assigned so that the change pattern 205 is selected with a probability, the change pattern 205 is selected with a probability of 30%, and the change pattern 206 is selected with a probability of 60%. On the other hand, (2) when the judgment result at the time of starting prize is "big hit" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the starting prize (new first hold) As for the change pattern of the first hold display corresponding to the change display based on the memory), the change pattern 204 is selected with a probability of 60%, the change pattern 205 is selected with a probability of 30%, and the change pattern 206 has a probability of 10%. Judgment values are assigned so that they are selected in.

FIG. 9-4 (E) is for determining a change pattern of the hold display for three holds when the first hold storage number stored in the first hold storage area is “3”. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a table. In this embodiment, any one of the change pattern 301 to the change pattern 310 can be determined as the change pattern of the hold display, and a determination value is assigned to each of these change patterns.

As shown in FIG. 9-4 (E), the active display at the time of active shift is the normal mode, and (1) the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, by the symbol designation command). If the specified determination result is "missing"), the change pattern of the first hold display corresponding to the change display based on the start winning prize (new first hold memory) is 100% of the change pattern 301. Judgment values are assigned so that they are selected with probability. On the other hand, (2) when the judgment result at the time of the start winning is "big hit" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the start winning (new first hold). A determination value is assigned to the change pattern of the first hold display corresponding to the change display based on the memory) so that the change pattern 301 is selected with a probability of 100%.

As shown in FIG. 9-4 (E), the active display at the time of active shift is in the blue mode, and (1) the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, by the symbol designation command). If the specified determination result is "missing"), the change pattern of the first hold display corresponding to the change display based on the start winning prize (new first hold memory) is 20% of the change pattern 302. Judgment values are assigned so that the change pattern 303 is selected with a probability of 20%, and the change pattern 304 is selected with a probability of 60%. On the other hand, (2) when the judgment result at the time of starting prize is "big hit" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the starting prize (new first hold) As for the change pattern of the first hold display corresponding to the change display based on the memory), the change pattern 302 is selected with a probability of 40%, the change pattern 303 is selected with a probability of 40%, and the change pattern 304 has a probability of 20%. Judgment values are assigned so that they are selected in.

As shown in FIG. 9-4 (E), the active display at the time of active shift is in the red mode, and (1) the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, by the symbol designation command). If the specified judgment result is "missing"), the change pattern of the first hold display corresponding to the change display based on the start winning prize (new first hold memory) is 13% of the change pattern 305. The change pattern 306 is selected with a probability of 13%, the change pattern 307 is selected with a probability of 4%, the change pattern 308 is selected with a probability of 20%, and the change pattern 309 is selected with a probability of 20%. The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 310 is selected and the change pattern 310 is selected with a probability of 30%. On the other hand, (2) when the judgment result at the time of the start winning is "big hit" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the start winning (new first hold). As for the change pattern of the first hold display corresponding to the change display based on the memory), the change pattern 305 is selected with a 20% probability, the change pattern 306 is selected with a 20% probability, and the change pattern 307 has a 30% probability. The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 308 is selected with a probability of 13%, the change pattern 309 is selected with a probability of 13%, and the change pattern 310 is selected with a probability of 4%.

FIG. 9-4 (F) is for determining a change pattern of the hold display for four holds when the first hold storage number stored in the first hold storage area is “4”. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a table. In this embodiment, any of the change patterns 401 to 415 can be determined as the change pattern of the hold display, and a determination value is assigned to each of these change patterns.

As shown in FIG. 9-4 (F), the active display at the time of active shift is the normal mode, and (1) the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, by the symbol designation command). If the specified determination result is "missing"), the change pattern of the first hold display corresponding to the change display based on the start winning prize (new first hold memory) is 100% of the change pattern 401. Judgment values are assigned so that they are selected with probability. On the other hand, (2) when the judgment result at the time of the start winning is "big hit" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the start winning (new first hold). A determination value is assigned to the change pattern of the first hold display corresponding to the change display based on the memory) so that the change pattern 401 is selected with a probability of 100%.

As shown in FIG. 9-4 (F), the active display at the time of active shift is in the blue mode, and (1) the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, by the symbol designation command). If the specified determination result is "missing"), the change pattern of the first hold display corresponding to the change display based on the start winning prize (new first hold memory) is 20% of the change pattern 402. Judgment values are assigned so that the change pattern 403 is selected with a probability of 20%, the change pattern 404 is selected with a probability of 20%, and the change pattern 405 is selected with a probability of 40%. .. On the other hand, (2) when the judgment result at the time of the start winning is "big hit" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the start winning (new first hold). As for the change pattern of the first hold display corresponding to the change display based on the memory), the change pattern 402 is selected with a 30% probability, the change pattern 403 is selected with a 30% probability, and the change pattern 404 has a 30% probability. The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 405 is selected with a probability of 10%.

As shown in FIG. 9-4 (F), the active display at the time of active shift is in the red mode, and (1) the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, by the symbol designation command) If the specified judgment result is "missing"), the change pattern of the first hold display corresponding to the change display based on the start winning prize (new first hold memory) is 3% of the change pattern 406. The change pattern 407 is selected with a probability of 3%, the change pattern 408 is selected with a probability of 3%, the change pattern 409 is selected with a probability of 10%, and the change pattern 410 is selected with a probability of 10%. Selected, change pattern 411 is selected with a 10% probability, change pattern 412 is selected with a 15% probability, change pattern 413 is selected with a 15% probability, and change pattern 414 is selected with a 15% probability. , The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 415 is selected with a probability of 16%. On the other hand, (2) when the judgment result at the time of the start winning is "big hit" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the start winning (new first hold). As for the change pattern of the first hold display corresponding to the change display based on the memory), the change pattern 406 is selected with a probability of 10%, the change pattern 407 is selected with a probability of 10%, and the change pattern 408 is selected with a probability of 10%. The change pattern 409 is selected with a 15% probability, the change pattern 410 is selected with a 15% probability, the change pattern 411 is selected with a 15% probability, and the change pattern 412 is selected with a 7% probability. The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 413 is selected with a probability of 7%, the change pattern 414 is selected with a probability of 7%, and the change pattern 415 is selected with a probability of 4%.

(Production determination process at the start of variable display)
When starting the variation display of the special symbol, the CPU 103 includes a display result specification command for specifying the display result, a variation pattern specification command for specifying the variation pattern, and a hold storage number subtraction specification command (first hold storage number subtraction designation). The command or the second hold storage number subtraction designation command) is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120.

The effect control CPU 120 is a hold storage number subtraction designation command (first hold) that specifies that the hold storage number has been subtracted when the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is started. Memory number subtraction specification command or second hold storage number subtraction specification command), display result specification command that specifies the display result (big hit or miss, big hit type when it becomes a big hit), and the fluctuation time and effect contents of the special symbol (big hit or miss, big hit type) Based on the fact that a set of commands called a variation pattern specification command for specifying (reach, pseudo-ream, etc.) is received from the game control microcomputer 100, the variation display of the special symbol is executed, and the special symbol is executed. It is possible to specify the fluctuation time and the content of the production (reach, pseudo-ream, etc.).

Further, the effect control CPU 120 receives a special symbol (first special symbol) from the game control microcomputer 100 when the variable display of the special symbol ends and the display result is confirmed. It is possible to identify that the variable display of the symbol or the second special symbol) is completed and the display result is derived.

FIG. 9-5 is a flowchart showing an effect determination process executed at the start of fluctuation. The effect control CPU 120 executes the effect change start effect determination process shown in FIG. 9-5 in the variable display start setting process (step S171) of the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7. Specifically, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the above-mentioned one set of commands accompanying the start of the variation display of the special symbol, the display result designation is the variation display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol. An effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute an effect) to be executed based on a command and a variation pattern specification command is set, and a decorative pattern based on the specified variation pattern is set. The effect to be executed during the variation display is determined by the variation start effect determination process shown in FIG. 9-5.

First, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the first setting suggestion effect is executed, which will be described later, based on the execution / non-execution determination table of the first setting suggestion effect (see FIG. 9-6 (G)) (step S16TM2000). ..

Here, in the present embodiment, the first setting suggestion effect can be executed as an effect suggesting the currently set setting value in the low probability low base state. In this first setting suggestion effect, in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 of the mini-slot 16TM030, the combination of [bell], [bell], and [bell] mini-slot symbols is stopped and displayed as the same symbol combination. By doing so, it is a production that establishes the role of "Bell". That is, the player sets the set value based on the fact that the combination of the [bell], [bell], and [bell] mini-slot symbols is stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 of the mini-slot 16TM030. It is recognized that the first setting suggestion effect for suggesting the above has been executed.

As shown in the table of FIG. 9-6 (G), determination values for determining whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect are assigned according to the currently set setting values. When the set value is "1", the effect control CPU 120 decides not to execute the first setting suggestion effect at a rate of 97%, and decides to execute the first setting suggestion effect at a rate of 3%. When the set value is "2", it is decided not to execute the first setting suggestion effect at a rate of 96%, and it is decided to execute it at a rate of 4%. When the set value is "3", it is decided not to execute the first setting suggestion effect at a rate of 95%, and it is decided to execute it at a rate of 5%. When the set value is "4", it is decided not to execute the first setting suggestion effect at a rate of 94%, and it is decided to execute it at a rate of 6%. When the set value is "5", it is decided not to execute the first setting suggestion effect at a rate of 93%, and it is decided to execute it at a rate of 7%. When the set value is "6", it is decided not to execute the first setting suggestion effect at a rate of 92%, and it is decided to execute it at a rate of 8%.

As shown in FIG. 9-6 (G), the execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect differs depending on the set value, and the higher the set value, the higher the rate of execution of the first setting suggestion effect. Become. In the present embodiment, since the effect determination process at the start of the variation is executed each time the variation display is executed, it is determined whether or not the first setting suggestion effect is executed for each variation display (step S16TM2000). That is, it is determined whether the winning combination of the first mini-slot variable display described above is [bell] or “off”. As a result, the player becomes interested in whether or not the first setting suggestion effect is executed each time the variable display is executed, and the first relative to the number of times the variable display is executed. You will also be interested in the number of times the setting suggestion effect is executed (execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect). According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player guess the set value for each variable display, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Next, when the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the first setting suggestion effect (YES in step S16TM2010), the presence or absence of the expectation notice effect is selected when the first setting suggestion effect is executed. It is determined based on the execution / non-execution determination table 1 (see FIGS. 9-6 (H1) and (H2)) of the expected degree advance notice effect (step S16TM2020). On the other hand, when it is decided not to execute the first setting suggestion effect (NO in step S16TM2010), the process proceeds to step S16TM2120 described later.

FIG. 9-6 (H1) shows the execution ratio of the expectation level advance notice effect when it is determined to execute the first setting suggestion effect and the display result is “off”. In the table 1 for determining whether or not the expectation degree advance notice effect is executed, determination values for determining whether or not the expectation degree advance notice effect is executed are assigned to each of the deviation patterns. When the fluctuation pattern is "non-reach out" (variation time is 10 seconds), the effect control CPU 120 determines that the expectation notice effect is not executed at a rate of 100%. Further, when the fluctuation pattern is "out of normal reach" (variation time is 30 seconds), it is decided not to execute the expectation notice effect at a rate of 100%. In addition, when the fluctuation pattern is "out of super reach" (variation time is 120 seconds), it is decided not to execute the expectation notice effect at a rate of 60%, and it is decided to execute it at a rate of 40%. To do.

FIG. 9-6 (H2) shows the execution ratio of the expectation level advance notice effect when the first setting suggestion effect is determined to be executed and the display result is a “big hit”. In the table 1 for determining whether or not the expectation degree advance notice effect is executed, determination values for determining whether or not the expectation degree advance notice effect is executed are assigned to each of the jackpot fluctuation patterns. When the fluctuation pattern is "normal reach jackpot" (variation time is 30 seconds), the effect control CPU 120 determines not to execute the expectation notice effect at a rate of 100%. In addition, when the fluctuation pattern is "super reach jackpot" (variation time is 120 seconds), it is decided not to execute the expectation notice effect at a rate of 20%, and it is decided to execute it at a rate of 80%. To do.

As shown in FIGS. 9-6 (H1) and 9-6 (H2), whether or not the expectation level advance notice effect is executed is determined based on the fluctuation pattern (variation time). In the present embodiment, when it is decided to execute the first setting suggestion effect, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) is non-reach off (10 seconds), normal reach off (30 seconds), or normal reach jackpot (30 seconds). If it is (seconds), it is decided not to execute the expectation notice effect at a rate of 100%, and if the fluctuation pattern (variation time) is out of super reach (120 seconds), the expectation notice effect is given. It is decided to execute at a rate of 40%, and in the case of a super reach jackpot (120 seconds), it is decided to execute the expectation notice effect at a rate of 80%.

When a fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time (non-reach off (10 seconds), normal reach off (30 seconds), normal reach jackpot (30 seconds)) is selected, both the first setting suggestion effect and the expectation notice effect There is not enough time to perform the production of. Therefore, when the fluctuation display based on the fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time is executed, the first setting suggestion effect can be executed, but the expectation notice effect is not executed after the first setting suggestion effect is executed. There is.

On the other hand, when a fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time (super reach off (120 seconds), super reach jackpot (120 seconds)) is selected, both the first setting suggestion effect and the expectation notice effect are produced. There is enough time to do it. Therefore, it is possible to execute the expectation degree advance notice effect after executing the first setting suggestion effect.

As described above, in the present embodiment, whether or not the first setting suggestion effect is executed is determined based on a common table regardless of the fluctuation time. When the fluctuation time is short, the fluctuation time is long. In any case, the first setting suggestion effect is executed at a common ratio. On the other hand, the expectation notice effect is executed at a higher rate when the fluctuation time is long than when the fluctuation time is short. That is, when the fluctuation time of the variable display to be executed is shorter than [the rate at which the expectation notice effect is executed after the first setting suggestion effect is executed], the fluctuation time of the variable display to be executed is longer. [The rate at which the expectation notice effect is executed after the first setting suggestion effect is executed] is higher.

Next, when the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the expectation notice effect (YES in step S16TM2030), the display result of stopping and displaying in the second mini-slot variable display described above, and the second change. Whether or not to execute the effect is determined based on the character icon determination table (see FIG. 9-6 (J)) (step S16TM2040). The second change effect changes the display mode of the active display 16TM003 by superimposing a character icon based on the "character symbol as a display result stopped in the second mini-slot variable display" on the active display 16TM003. It is a production to make you. In the present embodiment, the second change effect is executed except when the display result stopped by the second mini-slot variable display becomes the display result of "no display" in which the character symbol is not displayed. Become. On the other hand, when it is decided not to execute the expectation degree advance notice effect (NO in step S16TM2030), the process proceeds to step S16TM2060 described later.

FIG. 9-6 (J) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the character icon determination table. As shown in FIG. 9-6 (J), in this embodiment, when it is decided to execute the expectation notice effect, the character symbol is a mini slot as the display result of the second mini slot variable display. It is possible to determine one of the display result "no display" which is not displayed in the symbol display area 5LCR1 and the character symbol "CHANGE", "extreme heat", and "FEVER", and each of these displays. Judgment values are assigned to each result.

As shown in FIG. 9-6 (J), when the display result of the variation display is "off" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specification command is "off"), the variation As the display result of the second mini-slot variable display to be executed in the display, "no display" is selected at a rate of 70%, "CHANGE" is selected at a rate of 25%, and "super heat" is selected at a rate of 5%. Is selected.

On the other hand, when the display result of the variation display is "big hit" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specification command is "big hit"), the second mini-slot variable to be executed in the variation display is variable. As the display result of the display, "No display" is selected at a rate of 22%, "CHANGE" is selected at a rate of 35%, "Fever" is selected at a rate of 40%, and "Fever" is selected at a rate of 3%. "FEVER" is selected. Therefore, when the display result of the second mini-slot variable display is "FEVER", the occurrence of a big hit is confirmed.

As shown in FIG. 9-6 (J), regarding the display result of the second mini-slot variable display (variable display on one reel), "no display" <"CHANGE" <"super heat" <"FEVER" The expectation that it will be a big hit is high in this order. Therefore, when any of the character symbols of "CHANGE", "super heat", and "FEVER" is stopped (when the second change effect is executed after that), none of the character symbols is displayed without stopping. The rate of big hits is higher than when the result is "no display" (when the second change effect is not executed after that). In addition, since the jackpot expectation level differs depending on the character symbol to be stopped, the player pays attention to the display result of the second mini-slot variable display.

In the present embodiment, when the character symbol (any of "CHANGE", "super heat", and "FEVER") is stopped as the display result of the second mini-slot variable display, the display mode of the active display is changed. The second change effect is executed. Specifically, when any of the character symbols of "CHANGE", "super heat", and "FEVER" is stopped and displayed in the mini slot symbol display area 5LCR1 (1 reel) of the mini slot 16TM030, (i) The stopped-displayed character symbol moves upward from the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 and acts on the active display 16TM003 displayed in the active display area 16TM013 (see FIG. 9-10 (11)), (ii). The active display 16TM003 and the character icon based on the moved character pattern are superimposed and displayed (see FIG. 9-10 (12)). This character icon is an icon indicating the same character as the character symbol that is the display result of the second mini-slot variable display. That is, an effect in which a character icon indicating the same character as the character symbol as the display result is added to the active display 16TM003 is executed as the second change effect. On the other hand, when the display result of the second mini-slot variable display is "no display", the second change effect is not executed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 uses the expected degree notice effect establishment combination to be used when executing the first setting suggestion effect in the expectation degree advance notice effect establishment combination determination table 1 (see FIG. 9-7 (K)). (Step S16TM2050), and the process proceeds to step S16TM2060.

FIG. 9-7 (K) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the establishment combination determination table 1 of the expectation degree notice effect. As shown in FIG. 9-7 (K), in this embodiment, when it is decided to execute the first setting suggestion effect, the expected degree advance notice effect is established, more specifically, the expectation degree. "Out of place", "watermelon", "watermelon (via replay)", "cherry", "cherry (via replay)", as the winning combination of the first mini slot variable display executed in the notice production It is possible to determine any of "cherry (freeze)", "7-match", and "7-match (freeze)", and a determination value is assigned to each of these established combinations.

In the present embodiment, when "out of place" is selected as the winning combination of the expectation notice effect, the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 are stopped and displayed with a combination of mini-slot symbols including different symbols. For example, when [Replay] is displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5L1, [Replay] is displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5C1, and [Bell] is stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5R1, the expected degree advance notice effect is established. It becomes "off".

In the present embodiment, when "watermelon", "cherry", and "7-match" are selected as the winning combination of the expectation notice effect, the mini-slot symbol display area 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 is a mini with the same symbol combination. Stop and display the slot symbol. For example, when the combination of the mini-slot symbols of [watermelon], [watermelon], and [watermelon] is stopped and displayed as the combination of the same symbols in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1, the expected degree notice effect is established. Becomes "watermelon".

In the present embodiment, when "watermelon (via replay)" and "cherry (via replay)" are selected as the winning combination of the expectation notice effect, the same symbols are displayed in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1. After stopping and displaying the combination of [Replay], [Replay], and [Replay] mini-slot symbols as a combination, the mini-slot symbols are re-variated in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 to display the mini-slot symbols. Areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 can be combined with [watermelon], [watermelon], [watermelon] mini-slot symbols, or [cherry], [cherry], [cherry] mini-slot symbols as a combination of the same symbols. Display the stop display.

In the present embodiment, when "cherry (freeze)" or "7-match (freeze)" is selected as the winning combination of the expectation notice effect, the normal mode (freeze) is set in the mini slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1. After executing the variable display of the mini-slot symbol in a freeze mode different from the scroll display from top to bottom and the update display), [cherry], [cherry], and [cherry] are displayed in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1. ], Or the combination of the mini-slot symbols of [7], [7], and [7] is stopped and displayed. The variable display of the freeze mode in the present embodiment is a mini-slot symbol that executes scroll display or update display from the bottom to the top with the visibility of the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 lowered. It is a variable display.

As shown in FIG. 9-7 (K), when the display result to be stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 is "no display" (a symbol in which characters are not displayed) (that is, the second change effect is not executed). In the case of), the winning combination in the expectation notice production is "missing" at a rate of 100%.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (K), when the character symbol to be stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 is "CHANGE" (that is, the character icon to be superimposed and displayed on the active display in the second change effect is ". In the case of "CHANGE"), the winning combination in the expectation notice production is "missing" at a rate of 5%, "watermelon" at a rate of 45%, and "watermelon (via replay)" at a rate of 20%. 20% will be "cherry", 2% will be "cherry (via replay)", and 8% will be "cherry (freeze)".

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (K), when the character symbol to be stopped and displayed in the mini slot symbol display area 5LCR1 is "extreme heat" (that is, the character icon to be superimposed and displayed on the active display in the second change effect is displayed. In the case of "super heat"), the winning combination in the expectation notice production is "watermelon" at a rate of 15%, "watermelon (via replay)" at a rate of 10%, and "watermelon" at a rate of 40%. It becomes "cherry", 10% becomes "cherry (via replay)", and 25% becomes "cherry (freeze)".

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (K), when the character symbol to be stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 is "FEVER" (that is, the character icon to be superimposed and displayed on the active display in the second change effect is ". In the case of "FEVER"), the winning combination in the expectation notice production is "7 sets" at a rate of 70% and "7 sets (freeze)" at a rate of 30%.

As shown in FIG. 9-7 (K), when the winning combination is "off", the stop symbol is "no display" or "CHANGE", and when the winning combination is "watermelon" or "cherry", the stop symbol ( When the character icon) becomes "CHANGE" or "super heat" and the winning combination is "7 sets", the stop symbol (character icon) becomes "FEVER". In addition, when the winning combination is "off", "no display" is easier to select than "CHANGE" as the stopping symbol, and when the winning combination is "watermelon", the stop symbol (character icon) is "super heat". "CHANGE" is easier to select than "CHANGE", and when the winning combination is "cherry", "super heat" is more likely to be selected as the stop symbol (character icon) than "CHANGE".

That is, with respect to the stop symbol of the second mini-slot variable display, the degree of expectation controlled to the jackpot game state increases in the order of "no display" <"CHANGE" <"super heat" <"FEVER", and the first Regarding the winning combination of the mini-slot variable display, the degree of expectation controlled by the jackpot game state is higher in the order of "missing" <"watermelon" <"cherry" <"7 matching". In addition, when "7-match" is selected as the winning combination of the first mini-slot variable display, the stop symbol of the second mini-slot variable display is always "FEVER", so "7-match" is confirmed as a big hit. It is a production of. According to such a configuration, the degree of expectation controlled by the jackpot game state can be different depending on the winning combination composed of a plurality of types of mini-slot symbols, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Here, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (K), the winning combination with the variable display of the freeze mode is limited to "cherry (freeze)" and "7 sets (freeze)". Then, when "cherry (freeze)" is selected as the winning combination, the display result (character icon) becomes "CHANGE" or "super heat", and when "7 alignment (freeze)" is selected as the winning combination. The notice character (character icon) is "FEVER". That is, when the mini-slot symbol performs variable display in the freeze mode, the winning combination of "cherry" or higher ("cherry" or "7 sets") is determined, so that the mini-slot symbol is variablely displayed in the normal mode. The expectation that the jackpot game state will be controlled is higher than when it is performed. According to such a configuration, the player can pay attention to the variable display mode of the mini-slot symbol, and the interest of the game can be improved.

On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 120 decides not to execute the first setting suggestion effect (NO in step S16TM2010), the presence or absence of the expectation notice effect is selected when the first setting suggestion effect is not executed. It is determined based on the execution presence / absence determination table 2 (see FIGS. 9-6 (I1) and (I2)) of the expected degree advance notice effect (step S16TM2120).

FIG. 9-6 (I1) shows the execution ratio of the expectation level advance notice effect when it is determined not to execute the first setting suggestion effect and the display result is “off”. In the table 2 for determining whether or not the expectation degree advance notice effect is executed, determination values for determining whether or not the expectation degree advance notice effect is executed are assigned to each of the deviation patterns. When the fluctuation pattern is "non-reach out" (variation time is 10 seconds), the effect control CPU 120 determines that the expectation notice effect is not executed at a rate of 100%. In addition, when the fluctuation pattern is "out of normal reach" (fluctuation time is 30 seconds), it is decided not to execute the expectation notice effect at a rate of 80%, and to execute it at a rate of 20%. .. In addition, when the fluctuation pattern is "out of super reach" (variation time is 120 seconds), it is decided not to execute the expectation notice effect at a rate of 40%, and it is decided to execute it at a rate of 60%. To do.

FIG. 9-6 (I2) shows the execution ratio of the expectation level advance notice effect when it is determined not to execute the first setting suggestion effect and the display result is a “big hit”. In the table 2 for determining whether or not the expectation degree advance notice effect is executed, determination values for determining whether or not the expectation degree advance notice effect is executed are assigned to each of the jackpot fluctuation patterns. When the fluctuation pattern is "normal reach jackpot" (variation time is 30 seconds), the effect control CPU 120 decides not to execute the expectation notice effect at a rate of 30%, and executes it at a rate of 70%. Decide on that. In addition, when the fluctuation pattern is "super reach jackpot" (variation time is 120 seconds), it is decided not to execute the expectation notice effect at a rate of 10%, and it is decided to execute it at a rate of 90%. To do.

Here, in the examples of FIGS. 9 (H1) and 9 (H2) in which the first setting suggestion effect is determined, the expectation notice effect is not executed when the "normal reach" fluctuation pattern is selected. In the examples of FIGS. 9 (I1) and (I2), which were determined (“no execution” is 100%) but determined not to execute the first setting suggestion effect, the “normal reach” fluctuation pattern was selected. In some cases, it may be decided to execute the expectation notice effect ("execution" is 20% for "normal reach off" and 70% for "normal reach jackpot").

Further, in the example of FIGS. 9 (H1) and 9 (H2) determined to execute the first setting suggestion effect, the ratio of executing the expectation notice effect when the fluctuation pattern of "super reach" is selected ("" In the example of FIGS. 9 (I1) and (I2), it was decided not to execute the first setting suggestion effect than 40% for "super reach out" and 80% for "super reach jackpot". When the fluctuation pattern is selected, the ratio of executing the expectation notice effect is higher (60% for "super reach out" and 90% for "super reach jackpot"). As described above, in the present embodiment, when the first setting suggestion effect is not executed, the expectation notice effect is executed at a higher rate than when the first setting suggestion effect is executed. ..

Next, when the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the expectation notice effect (YES in step S16TM2130), the display result of stopping and displaying in the second mini-slot variable display described above, and the second change. Whether or not to execute the effect is determined based on the character icon determination table (see FIG. 9-6 (J)) (step S16TM2140). On the other hand, when it is decided not to execute the expectation degree advance notice effect (NO in step S16TM2130), the process proceeds to step S16TM2060 described later.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 uses the expected degree advance notice effect establishment combination when the first setting suggestion effect is not executed in the expected degree advance notice effect establishment combination determination table 2 (see FIG. 9-7 (L)). (Step S16TM2150), and the process proceeds to step S16TM2060.

FIG. 9-7 (L) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the establishment combination determination table 2 of the expectation degree notice effect. As shown in FIG. 9-7 (L), in this embodiment, when it is decided not to execute the first setting suggestion effect, the expected degree advance notice effect is established, more specifically, the expectation degree. "Out of place", "watermelon", "watermelon (via replay)", "cherry", "cherry (via replay)", as the winning combination of the first mini-slot variable display executed in the advance notice production It is possible to determine any of "cherry (freeze)", "7-match", and "7-match (freeze)", and a determination value is assigned to each of these established combinations.

As shown in FIG. 9-7 (L), when the display result to be stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 is "no display" (a symbol in which characters are not displayed) (that is, the second change effect is not executed). In the case of), the winning combination in the expectation notice production is "missing" at a rate of 100%.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (L), when the character symbol to be stopped and displayed in the mini slot symbol display area 5LCR1 is "CHANGE" (that is, the character icon to be superimposed and displayed on the active display in the second change effect is ". In the case of "CHANGE"), the winning combination in the expectation notice production is "missing" at a rate of 5%, "watermelon" at a rate of 15%, and "watermelon (via replay)" at a rate of 50%. Then, 2% becomes "cherry", 18% becomes "cherry (via replay)", and 10% becomes "cherry (freeze)".

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (L), when the character symbol to be stopped and displayed in the mini slot symbol display area 5LCR1 is "extreme heat" (that is, the character icon to be superimposed and displayed on the active display in the second change effect is displayed. In the case of "super heat"), the winning combination in the expectation notice production is "watermelon" at a rate of 10%, "watermelon (via replay)" at a rate of 15%, and "watermelon" at a rate of 10%. It becomes "cherry", 38% becomes "cherry (via replay)", and 27% becomes "cherry (freeze)".

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (L), when the character symbol to be stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 is "FEVER" (that is, the character icon to be superimposed and displayed on the active display in the second change effect is ". In the case of "FEVER"), the winning combination in the expectation notice production is "7 sets" at a rate of 30% and "7 sets (freeze)" at a rate of 70%.

In this embodiment, there are cases where it is decided to execute the first setting suggestion effect and cases where it is decided not to execute the first setting suggestion effect. An example is shown in which the winning combination of the variable display (that is, the winning combination other than the "bell") is determined based on different tables, but it is not limited to such a form, and it is decided to execute the first setting suggestion effect. The winning combination of the first mini-slot variable display (that is, the winning combination other than "bell") in the expectation notice effect is common between the case where the first setting suggestion effect is performed and the case where the first setting suggestion effect is not executed. It may be decided based on the table of. That is, while step S16TM2020 and step S16TM2120 determine whether or not to execute the expectation degree advance notice effect at different ratios (based on the execution presence / absence determination table of the different expectation degree advance notice effect), the common establishment of step S16TM2050 and step S16TM2150 The winning combination of the first mini-slot variable display in the expectation notice effect may be determined based on the determination table.

As shown above, in the present embodiment, when the gaming state is the low probability low base state (normal state), the first mini-slot symbol display area 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 is used every time the variation display is executed. The mini-slot variable display (first time) is executed, and the winning combination is "bell" or "missing". Then, after the end of the first mini-slot variable display (first time), when (i) the first mini-slot variable display (second time) is executed during the variable display (expectation notice effect is executed). (Case) and (ii) the first mini-slot variable display (second time) is not executed (the expectation notice effect is not executed).

Here, (i) when the first mini-slot variable display (second time) is executed (when the expectation degree notice effect is executed), the established combination determined based on the established combination determination table is established. Later, the second mini-slot variable display (first time) is further executed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1. Then, as the display result of the second mini-slot variable display (first time), (a) a symbol that does not include a character (“not displayed”) or (b) a character symbol (“CHANCE”, “extreme heat””. , "FEVER") stops. (B) When the character symbol ("CHANGE", "super heat", "FEVER") is stopped, the second change effect in which the character icon based on the character symbol is added to the active display is executed. Become.

As described above, in the above embodiment, when the second mini-slot variable display (first time) is executed and (a) the symbol (“no display”) that does not include the character is stopped, that is, the second Even if the change effect is not executed, (i) the first mini-slot variable display (second time) is always executed before that, and the effect is always "missing". .. Not limited to this, when the second mini-slot variable display (first time) is executed and (a) the symbol (“no display”) that does not include the character is stopped (when the second change effect is not executed). In addition, in (i) the first mini-slot variable display (second time) executed before that, there is a possibility that a winning combination other than "off" is established.

In addition, when the second mini-slot variable display (first time) is executed and (a) a symbol (“no display”) that does not include a character is stopped (when the second change effect is not executed), (I) The first mini-slot variable display (second time) itself may not be executed. That is, after the first mini-slot variable display (first time) in the mini-slot symbol display area 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 (in the 3-reel system), the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 (in the 1-reel system). The second mini-slot variable display (first time) may be executed.

Further, as the display result of the second mini-slot variable display (first time), (b) the character symbol (“CHANGE”, “super heat”, “FEVER”) may be stopped without fail. That is, when the second mini-slot variable display (in the one-reel system) in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 is executed, the second change effect may be executed after that. When such an effect configuration is adopted, the winning combination of (i) the first mini-slot variable display (second time) executed before the second mini-slot variable display (first time) is "missing". It may not be.

Next, when the value of the fluctuation count counter is 25 × n (n is an integer) [a multiple of 25] (YES in step S16TM2060), the effect control CPU 120 executes the second setting suggestion effect described later. Whether or not to execute the second setting suggestion effect is determined based on the execution presence / absence determination table (see FIG. 9-7 (M)) (step S16TM2070), and the process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value of the fluctuation count counter is not 25 × n (n is an integer) (NO in step S16TM2060), the process ends as it is.

Here, in the present embodiment, the second setting suggestion effect can be executed as an effect suggesting the currently set setting value in the low probability low base state. In this second setting suggestion effect, the fluctuation number display 16TM040 displayed in the normal mode (white mode in this example) at the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5 is displayed in purple at the timing when the variation display of the special symbol is started. It is an effect that changes the mode. Then, when a predetermined period elapses from the start of the second setting suggestion effect, the second setting suggestion effect is ended, and the variation number display 16TM040 displayed in purple on the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5 is displayed in the normal mode. Return to.

In FIG. 9-7 (M), determination values for determining whether or not to execute the second setting suggestion effect are assigned according to the currently set set values. When the set value is "1", the effect control CPU 120 decides not to execute the second setting suggestion effect at a rate of 90%, and decides to execute the second setting suggestion effect at a rate of 10%. When the set value is "2", it is decided not to execute the second setting suggestion effect at a rate of 88%, and it is decided to execute it at a rate of 12%. When the set value is "3", it is decided not to execute the second setting suggestion effect at a rate of 86%, and it is decided to execute it at a rate of 14%. When the set value is "4", it is decided not to execute the second setting suggestion effect at a rate of 84%, and it is decided to execute it at a rate of 16%. When the set value is "5", it is decided not to execute the second setting suggestion effect at a rate of 82%, and it is decided to execute it at a rate of 18%. When the set value is "6", it is decided not to execute the second setting suggestion effect at a rate of 80%, and it is decided to execute it at a rate of 20%.

In the present embodiment, when the game state is the low probability low base state, the mini slot 16TM030 is displayed on the image display device 5, and the first setting suggestion effect, the second change effect, and the expectation level advance notice effect are executed. However, the image display device 5 is not limited to such a mode, and when the gaming state is any of the low accuracy high base state, the high accuracy high base state, and the high accuracy low base state, the image display device 5 is mini-mounted. Slot 16TM030 may be displayed and any of the first setting suggestion effect, the second change effect, or the expectation degree advance notice effect may be executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the variation number display 16TM040 is displayed on the image display device 5 and the second setting suggestion effect is executed when the game state is the low probability low base state. Not limited to the form, when the gaming state is any of the low accuracy high base state, the high accuracy high base state, and the high accuracy low base state, the image display device 5 displays the variation number display 16TM040, and the second The setting suggestion effect may be executed.

As shown in FIG. 9-5, after determining whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect in step S16TM2000, whether or not to execute the expectation notice effect is determined in step S16TM2020 or step S16TM2120, and further, in step S16TM2050 or step S16TM2150. The role of establishing the expectation notice production has been decided. When determining the first setting suggestion effect in step S16TM2000, as shown in FIG. 9-6 (G), whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect is determined based on the currently set setting value. In this embodiment, the first setting suggestion effect can be executed regardless of the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time).

Further, when the first setting suggestion effect is executed (YES in step S16TM2010) and the expectation level advance notice effect is executed, as shown in FIGS. 9-6 (H1) and (H2), the fluctuation pattern (variation time) Based on the above, it is decided whether or not to execute the expectation notice production. If the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is non-reach out of reach (10 seconds), normal reach out of reach (30 seconds), or normal reach jackpot (30 seconds), it is decided that "expectation notice effect is not executed" at a rate of 100%. On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is out of the super reach (120 seconds), it is decided to "execute the expectation notice effect" at a rate of 40%, and in the case of the super reach jackpot (120 seconds). Determines to "execute the expectation notice effect" at a rate of 80%.

In this way, the first setting suggestion effect can be executed regardless of the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time), and the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 of the image display device 5 can be executed regardless of the fluctuation pattern (variation time). , [Bell], [Bell], and [Bell] mini-slot symbols can be stopped and displayed. Further, when the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is super reach (120 seconds), the first setting suggestion effect and the expectation level advance notice effect can be executed, and the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1 and 5C1 of the image display device 5 can be executed. After displaying the combination stop display of the [bell], [bell], and [bell] mini-slot symbols on 5R1, the same other than [bell] is displayed in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 of the image display device 5. It is possible to stop and display a combination of symbols (for example, [watermelon], [watermelon], [watermelon] or [7], [7], [7], etc.). According to such a configuration, in the mini slot 16TM030, the first setting suggestion effect suggesting the set value can be executed, and the expectation notice effect suggesting the expectation that the display result becomes a "big hit" can be executed. It becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

As shown in FIG. 9-6 (G), each time the first setting suggestion effect having a different execution ratio is executed according to the set value, the player himself counts the number of times the first setting suggestion effect is executed. , The player himself calculates the execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect [execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect = (number of times the first setting suggestion effect is executed / number of fluctuations) × 100], and the calculated first setting suggestion The player can infer the set value by determining which of the set values of the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect for each well-known set value the effect execution ratio is close to.

Temporarily, a configuration was adopted in which the determination of whether or not to execute the expectation degree advancement effect is performed before the determination of whether or not the first setting suggestion effect is executed, and the expectation degree advance notice effect is executed with priority over the first setting suggestion effect. In that case, due to the relationship between the decision to execute the expectation notice effect and the fluctuation time, the execution lottery of the first setting suggestion effect itself is not performed, or the execution lottery of the first setting suggestion effect is won. Even so, there may be a case where the first setting suggestion effect is not executed because the expectation notice effect is prioritized. As a result, the degree of deviation between the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect calculated by the player and the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect based on the actual set value becomes large. Then, the importance of the first setting suggestion effect as an element for estimating the set value is reduced, and the player may not pay attention to it. In order to solve such a problem, as shown in step S16TM2000 and step S16TM2020 of FIG. 9-5, whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect is determined before whether or not the expectation level advance notice effect is executed. A configuration is adopted in which the first setting suggestion effect is executed with priority over the expectation notice effect.

(Specific example of executing change effect and setting suggestion effect)
Next, with respect to specific examples when it is decided to execute the first change effect, the second change effect, the first setting suggestion effect, the second setting suggestion effect, and the expectation degree notice effect, FIGS. 9-8 to 9 This will be described using -10. 9-8 are time charts when the first change effect, the second change effect, the first setting suggestion effect, the second setting suggestion effect, and the expectation level advance notice effect are executed, and FIGS. 9-9 and 9 -10 shows an example of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 when the first change effect, the second change effect, the first setting suggestion effect, the second setting suggestion effect, and the expectation degree advance notice effect are executed. It is explanatory drawing.

In the production example shown in FIGS. 9-8 to 9-10, when the CPU 103 wins a start, the display result of the variation display corresponding to the start prize is a "big hit" in the first start prize determination process (S101A). This is an example when it is determined that this is the case (when specified by the symbol specification command). Then, based on this, the effect control CPU 120 determines the final display mode (final display color) of the active display to the red mode in step S16TM1010 in the start winning change effect determination process, and changes the active display in step S16TM1020. This is an example in the case where the pattern is decided to be the change pattern 022 and the first change effect of the success mode is decided to be executed.

Further, the CPU 103 determines that the display result of the fluctuation display becomes a "big hit" at the start of the fluctuation (specified by the display result specification command), and sets the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the fluctuation display to the "super reach jackpot". This is an example of the case where "(120 seconds)" is determined (when specified by the fluctuation pattern command). Then, based on this, the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the first setting suggestion effect in step S16TM2000 in the change start effect determination process at the start of fluctuation, and executes the expectation notice effect in step S16TM2020. In step S16TM2040, it was decided to set the display result of the second mini-slot variable display to "extreme heat" and to execute the second change effect, and in step S16TM2050, the expectation notice effect was produced. This is an example in which it is decided that the winning combination of is "cherry (freeze)", and it is decided to execute the second setting suggestion effect in step S16TM2070.

First, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (1), when the gaming state is controlled to the low accuracy low base state, the display of the variation display of the first special symbol that was executed last time (most recently executed). Based on the result being "off", the effect control CPU 120 when the variation display is fixedly stopped in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5. The combination of decorative patterns (“247” in this example) is continuously displayed. Further, based on the fact that the display result of the variation display of the first special symbol (most recently executed) executed last time was "missing", the small symbol display area 5l and the small symbol display area of the image display device 5 In 5c and the small symbol display area 5r, the combination of small symbols (“247” in this example) when the fluctuation display is fixedly stopped is continuously displayed. The effect control CPU 120 displays four first hold displays 16TM001 in the first hold display area 16TM011 of the image display device 5 in response to the first hold storage number being 4.

In the low-accuracy low-base state, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (1), the number of times the variable display is executed in the low-accuracy low-base state (normal state) in the image display device 5 is calculated. The fluctuation number display 16TM040 is displayed. In this example, it is assumed that the fluctuation display has been executed 124 times so far after shifting to the low-accuracy low-base state, and as shown in FIG. 9-9 (1), the fluctuation count display 16TM040 is "124" or the like. The screen when the character of is displayed in the normal mode (white mode) is shown.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 is based on the fact that the winning combination (display result) of the variable display of the mini slot symbol that was executed last time (immediately executed) was "missing", and the mini of the image display device 5. In the slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1, the combination of mini-slot symbols ([replay], [replay], and [bell] in this example) when the variable display is fixedly stopped is continuously displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (2), when the CUP 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol (timing of T1 shown in FIG. 9-8), the effect control CPU 120 is the image display device 5. The variation display of the decorative symbol is started in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the variation display of the small symbol is started in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays the active display 16TM003 corresponding to the fluctuation display currently being executed in the active display area 16TM013 of the image display device 5, and corresponds to the case where the first reserved storage number is 3. Then, three first hold display 16TM001 are displayed in the first hold display area 16TM011 of the image display device 5.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (2), the effect control CPU 120 continues the variable display of the decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and steps. Based on the determination that the second setting suggestion effect is executed in S16TM2070, the second setting suggestion effect is executed. In this example, it is assumed that the fluctuation display has been executed 125 times so far after shifting to the low-accuracy low-base state, and as shown in FIG. 9-9 (2), the fluctuation number display 16TM040 is "125" or the like. The case where the character of is displayed in purple mode is shown. The player grasps that the setting suggestion is made by changing the display mode of the variation number display 16TM040 from the conventional normal mode (white mode) to the purple mode. At this time, the variable display of the small symbols is continued in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (3), the effect control CPU 120 is in a state of continuing the variable display of the decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 (FIG. 9). (Timing of T2 shown in −8), based on the decision to execute the first setting suggestion effect in step S16TM2000, the minislot in the minislot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 of the image display device 5. The variable display of the symbol (variable display of the first mini slot) is started. At this time, the variable display of the small symbols is continued in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (4), the effect control CPU 120 is in a state of continuing the variable display of the decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 (FIG. 9). (Timing of T3 shown in −8), the second setting suggestion effect is terminated, and the variation number display 16TM040 (characters such as “125”) displayed in the purple mode is returned to the normal mode (white mode). At this time, the variation display of the small symbols is continued in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, and the mini slot symbols are variable in the mini slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 of the image display device 5. The display is continuing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (5), the effect control CPU 120 is in a state of continuing the variable display of the decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 (FIG. 9). (Timing of T4 shown in −8), success based on the decision in step S16TM1020 to set the change pattern of the active display to the change pattern 022 and to execute the first change effect of the success mode. The first change effect of the aspect is executed. In this example, the character 16TM050 appears, and an effect of throwing a ball toward the active display 16TM003 is executed. By displaying an image in which the ball thrown by the character 16TM050 corresponds to the active display 16TM003, the player can be expected to change the mode of the active display 16TM003.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues the variable display of the small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, and in the mini slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 of the image display device 5. , The variable display of the mini slot symbol is continued.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (6), the effect control CPU 120 is in a state of continuing the variable display of the decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 (FIG. 9). (Timing of T5 shown in -8), the display mode of the active display 16TM003 is changed from the normal mode to the red mode (in this example, the white round display to the red round shape) according to the execution of the first change effect of the successful mode. Display). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues to display the small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. Further, the effect control CPU 120 is a combination of mini slot symbols when the first setting suggestion effect is executed in the mini slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 of the image display device 5 (in this example, [bell] [ Bell] [Bell]) is stopped and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (7), the effect control CPU 120 continues the variable display of the decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 (FIG. 9). (Timing of T6 shown in -8), based on the fact that it was decided in step S16TM2050 that the winning combination of the expectation notice effect was "cherry (freeze)", the expectation notice effect was executed and the image display device. In the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 of 5, variable display of the mini-slot symbol in the freeze mode is started. In this example, when the variable display of the freeze mode is executed, the dark image 16TM100 is displayed as a covering image covering the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1, thereby reducing the visibility of the mini-slot symbol and visually recognizing it. In a difficult state, the variable display (scroll display or update display) of the mini slot symbol is executed from the bottom to the top. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues to display the small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

In the present embodiment, in order to reduce the visibility of the mini slot symbol, the dark image 16TM100 covering the mini slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 is displayed, so that the mini has a lower display priority than the dark image 16TM100. Although the slot pattern is difficult to see, it is slightly visible (that is, the layer transparency of the darkened image 16TM100 is not 0%), but it is not limited to such a form and is more than the darkened image 16TM100. A mini-slot symbol with a low display priority (an image whose display layer is lower and can be seen behind the darkened image 16TM100 when viewed from the player) becomes completely invisible (that is, the layer transparency of the darkened image 16TM100 is 0). It may be%).

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (8), the effect control CPU 120 continues the variable display of the decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 (FIG. 9). (Timing of T7 shown in −8), based on the fact that it was decided in step S16TM2050 that the winning combination of the expectation notice effect was “cherry (freeze)”, the mini slot symbol display area 5L1 of the image display device 5 In 5, C1 and 5R1, the combination of mini-slot symbols ([cherry], [cherry], and [cherry] in this example) when the winning combination is "cherry" is stopped and displayed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues to display the small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-10 (9), the effect control CPU 120 sets "7" in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5 at the timing when the reach state in the fluctuation pattern should be established. The decorative symbol of No. 1 is stopped and displayed to bring it into a reach state, and the characters "reach !!" are displayed on the upper part of the image display device 5 (timing of T8 in FIG. 9-8). At this time, in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r, the variable display of the small symbol is continued. That is, the small symbol is also stopped in the small symbol display area 5l corresponding to the symbol display area 5L in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and in the small symbol display area 5r corresponding to the symbol display area 5R in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. It is continuously displayed in a variable manner without being displayed.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 changes the mode of the mini-slot 16TM030 from the mode corresponding to the first mini-slot variable display to the mode corresponding to the second mini-slot variable display when the reach state is established. .. That is, the area where the mini-slot 16TM030 is displayed is changed from the 3-reel mini-slot symbol display area 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 to the 1-reel mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1. One reel mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 can display any one of a plurality of types of mini-slot symbols ("no display", "CHANGE", "extreme heat", "FEVER") as a display result. If the result is a symbol containing a notice character ("CHANGE", "super heat", "FEVER"), the icon of the notice character that is the display result is added to the active display based on the display result. The second change effect is executed. Then, the effect control CPU 120 starts variable display of the mini-slot symbol in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-10 (10), the effect control CPU 120 determines in step S16TM2040 that the display result of the second mini-slot variable display is "extreme heat", that is, Based on the fact that the notice character of the expectation notice effect is decided to be "super heat", the design including the notice character of "super heat" is stopped and displayed in the mini slot symbol display area 5LCR1 of the image display device 5. (Timing of T9 in FIG. 9-8). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues to display the small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-10 (11), the effect control CPU 120 has decided to execute the second change effect (stop and display the symbol including the warning character) in step S16TM2040. Based on this, the second change effect is executed (timing of T10 in FIG. 9-8). In this example, when the display mode of the active display 16TM003 is changed, the mini-slot symbol (in this example, the “super heat” symbol) that is stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 is displayed from the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1. The effect of moving to the active display area 16TM013 and acting on the active display 16TM003 is executed. More specifically, the effect image indicating that the mini-slot symbol (the symbol of "super heat" in this example) protruding from the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 hits the active display 16TM003 is displayed. It suggests to the player that the mode of the active display 16TM003 changes. At this time, in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r, the variable display of the small symbol is continued.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-10 (12), the battle effect is executed according to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach. Here, as the battle effect is executed, the ally character 16TM060 and the enemy character 16TM070 are displayed on the image display device 5 (timing of T11 shown in FIG. 9-8). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues to display the small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 superimposes and displays a character icon based on the mini-slot symbol (in this example, the character icon of "super heat") that is stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 on the active display 16TM003. The display mode of the active display 16TM003 is changed. That is, a character icon indicating the same character as the notice character (“super heat” in this example) that is the display result is added to the active display 16TM003.

As shown in FIGS. 9-9 and 9-10, when the active display 16TM003 corresponding to the currently executing fluctuation display is displayed in the active display area 16TM013, the mini slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 The combination of mini-slot symbols whose winning combination is "cherry" ([cherry], [cherry], [cherry] in this example) is stopped and displayed (Fig. 9-9 (8)), and then the mini-slot symbol is displayed. The mini-slot symbol (“super heat” in this example) as a warning character for the expectation notice effect is stopped and displayed in area 5LCR1 (Fig. 9-10 (10)), and then stopped in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1. The second change effect of adding a character icon indicating the same character as the displayed mini-slot pattern character (“super heat” in this example) to the active display 16TM003 is being executed (FIGS. 9-10 (11) and (12). )).

According to such a configuration, the display mode of the active display 16TM003 is changed according to the combination of the mini-slot symbols stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 where the first setting suggestion effect is executed. Since the two-change effect can be executed, the interest of the setting suggestion effect can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-8 to 9-10, the first setting suggestion effect is terminated before the battle effect executed according to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is started. I am doing it. That is, before the battle effect is executed, in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 of the image display device 5, a combination of mini-slot symbols corresponding to the first setting suggestion effect (in this example, [bell] [ Bell] [Bell]) is hidden. In this way, the first setting suggestion effect that suggests the set value is executed in the first half of the variation display (before the reach state is established), that is, before the display result of the variation display is suggested. It is possible to raise interest in suggestive production. In addition, the latter half of the fluctuation display (after the reach state is established), that is, the stage after the display result of the fluctuation display is suggested (after the battle effect for notifying whether or not the display result becomes a "big hit" is started). Then, since the first setting suggestion effect has already been completed, it is possible to pay attention to the display result (result of the battle effect) of the variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (1), the mini-slot symbol display of the image display device 5 is based on the determination that the first setting suggestion effect is not executed and the expectation notice effect is not executed. In areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1, the combination of mini-slot symbols whose winning combination is "out of place" (in this example, [replay], [replay], and [bell]) stops. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (6), based on the decision to execute the first setting suggestion effect, the mini-slot symbol display area 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 of the image display device 5 is established. The combination of mini-slot symbols whose role is "bell" ([bell] [bell] [bell] in this example) stops. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (8), the mini-slot symbol display of the image display device 5 is based on the fact that it is decided to execute the expectation notice effect and the winning combination is determined to be "cherry". In areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1, the combination of mini-slot symbols whose winning combination is "cherry" (in this example, [cherry], [cherry], and [cherry]) stops. In this way, since it is possible to stop and display any one of a plurality of types of winning combinations in the mini slot 16TM030, the variable display of the minislot symbol is executed in the minislot 16TM030 for the game. You can improve your interest.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-9 (2) and (3), the number of fluctuations is displayed in the lower left area of the image display device 5 which is different from the special effect area 16TM035 (lower center of the screen of the image display device 5). A second setting suggestion effect is performed in which the 16TM040 is changed from the normal mode (white mode) to the purple mode. Here, as shown in FIG. 9-6 (G), the execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect ranges from 3% (set value 1) to 8% (set value 6), whereas the figure shows. As shown in 9-7 (M), the execution rate of the second setting suggestion effect ranges from 10% (setting value 1) to 20% (setting value 6), so that both effects are executed the same number of times. If it is assumed that the setting value has been set, the second setting suggestion effect is easier to guess than the first setting suggestion effect. Specifically, the execution ratio calculated based on the number of executions of the first setting suggestion effect is compared with the predetermined effect execution ratio (3% to 8%) corresponding to each set value (1 to 6). Therefore, the set value corresponding to the effect execution ratio closest to the former is estimated as the set value of the game machine. Further, the execution ratio calculated based on the number of executions of the second setting suggestion effect is compared with the predetermined effect execution ratio (10% to 20%) corresponding to each set value (1 to 6), and the former is selected. The set value corresponding to the closest effect execution ratio is estimated as the set value of the game machine. When such an estimation is made, the set value estimated based on the number of executions of the second setting suggestion effect is larger than the set value estimated based on the number of executions of the first setting suggestion effect. It is highly possible that it is the setting value of the machine (the reliability of the setting suggestion is high). However, in the present embodiment, the execution lottery is performed for each variation display for the first setting suggestion effect, and the execution lottery is performed for each 25 variation display for the second setting suggestion effect. The execution frequency of the setting suggestion effect is higher than the execution frequency of the second setting suggestion effect. Therefore, the first setting suggestion effect is executed more times within the same fluctuation display number of times (within the same time) than the second setting suggestion effect, which is useful for estimating the set value. .. As described above, by providing a plurality of types of setting suggestion effects in which the ratio of the set values suggested by the effects to the set values of the game machine is different, the interest of the setting suggestion effects can be improved.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-9 and 9-10, variable display of small symbols is executed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r provided in the upper right part of the screen of the image display device 5. ing. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9-9, the first setting suggestion effect is executed in the special effect area 16TM035 (lower center of the screen of the image display device 5), and the first setting suggestion effect is executed in the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5. 2 Setting suggestion effect is executed. In this way, in the upper part of the screen, the variation display of the small symbol is executed as the effect corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol, whereas in the lower part of the screen, the setting suggestion effect (first setting suggestion effect, second setting suggestion effect, second). By executing the setting suggestion effect), the visibility of one of the effects does not deteriorate.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-3 (A), as the display mode of the active display based on the determination result at the time of starting winning, a plurality of types of display modes (normal mode, blue mode, and red mode) ( Display color). Then, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (5), the display mode (display) of the active display 16TM003 is accompanied by the appearance of the character 16TM050 and the execution of the action effect of the mode of throwing the ball toward the active display 16TM003. The first change effect of changing the color) from the normal mode (white circle display) to the red mode (red circle display) is executed. Further, the second mini-slot variable display is executed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 based on the determination result at the start of fluctuation, and the character icon indicated by the character symbol is displayed based on the character symbol resulting from the display. The second change effect added to the active display 16TM003 is executed. In this way, the first change effect that changes the display color of the active display according to the action effect executed in the area different from the area where the setting suggestion effect is executed, and the area where the first setting suggestion effect is executed ( A second change effect that changes the display shape of the active display according to the action effect based on the notice characters displayed in the special effect area 16TM035), which is an interest when changing the active display by providing multiple systems of change effects. Can be further improved.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-10 (11) and 9-10, the mini-slot symbol stopped in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 when the second change effect is executed (in this example, "super heat"). However, the effect of jumping out of the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 and hitting the active display 16TM003 displayed in the active display area 16TM013 is executed. Specifically, after the effect image indicating that the mini-slot symbol (“super heat” in this example) protruding from the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 hits the active display 16TM003 is displayed, the mini-slot symbol display area A character icon indicating the same character as the character of the mini-slot pattern stopped at 5LCR1 is added to the active display 16TM003. According to such a configuration, the effect executed in the mini slot 16TM030 and the display mode of the active display 16TM003 can be related to each other, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-7 (K) and 9-7 (L), the winning combination of the expectation notice effect (first mini-slot variable display (second time)) in the mini-slot 16TM030 is "missing" and "watermelon". , "Cherry", and "7 sets". Then, depending on the determined winning combination, the selection ratio of whether the display result of the second mini-slot variable display is "no display", "CHANGE", "super heat", or "FEVER" is selected. It's different. Further, in the present embodiment, when the display result of the second mini-slot variable display is any of the character symbols of "CHANGE", "super heat", and "FEVER", the mode of the character symbol and the mode of the character symbol are determined. It matches the mode of the character icon added to the active display 16TM003. That is, which mode of the character icon is added to the active display 16TM003 according to the winning combination of the expectation level advance notice effect (first mini-slot variable display (second time)) executed in the mini-slot 16TM030. The proportions are different. According to such a configuration, the effect executed in the mini slot 16TM030 and the display mode of the active display 16TM003 can be related to each other, and the interest in the game can be improved.

(Display of the total result of the winning combination)
In this embodiment, during the demo display, the "volume adjustment" icon for adjusting the volume during the game, the "light amount adjustment" icon for adjusting the light amount during the game, and the low accuracy low base state (normal state). ), And a menu screen including a "mini reel information" icon for confirming the number of times the variation is displayed (the number of times the variation of the special symbol is displayed) and the number of times each winning combination is won in the mini slot 16TM030 is displayed. By operating the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B on this menu screen, each icon of "volume adjustment", "light intensity adjustment", and "mini reel information" can be selected.

FIG. 9-11 is displayed on the full screen of the image display device 5 when the "mini reel information" icon is selected by operating the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B while the menu screen is displayed. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the mini reel information.

As shown in FIGS. 9-11, the characters "mini reel information" are displayed in the upper left portion of the screen of the image display device 5. Further, in the central part of the screen of the image display device 5, the cumulative number of fluctuation displays (variation display of special symbols) executed in the low accuracy low base state (normal state) and the number of winnings of each winning combination in the mini slot 16TM030 are displayed. The mini reel information 16TM200 including the above, the selecting tab 16TM210 displaying the characters "today", and the next selection tab 16TM220 displaying the characters "previous day" are displayed. Further, on the right side of the screen of the image display device 5, an operation promotion display 16TM270 prompting to operate the stick controller 31A is displayed corresponding to the selected tab 16TM210. Further, at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5, an operation promotion display 16TM280 prompting the user to operate the push button 31B is displayed together with the characters “return”.

In the mini reel information 16TM200, the character "rotation speed" is displayed at the top as an item indicating the number of fluctuation display times, and correspondingly, the cumulative total of fluctuation display executed in the low accuracy low base state (normal state). The number of times "XXXX times" is displayed. In the second row, the character "bell" is displayed as an item indicating the winning combination bell, and correspondingly, the cumulative number of times the winning combination is "bell" in the first mini slot variable display "AAAA". "Times" and "Bell" winning probability "(1 / aaaa.a)" [= Cumulative number of times "Bell" was established / Cumulative number of fluctuation displays executed in the low probability low base state (normal state)] It is displayed. In the third row, the word "watermelon" is displayed as an item indicating the winning combination of watermelons, and in response to this, the cumulative number of times the winning combination is "watermelon" in the first mini slot variable display "BBBB". "Times" and "Watermelon" winning probability "(1 / bbbb.b)" [= Cumulative number of times "Watermelon" was established / Cumulative number of fluctuation displays executed in the low probability low base state (normal state)] It is displayed. In the 4th row, the character "cherry" is displayed as an item indicating the winning combination cherry, and correspondingly, the cumulative number of times the winning combination is "cherry" in the first mini slot variable display "CCCC". "Times" and "Cherry" winning probability "(1 / ccc.c)" [= Cumulative number of times "Cherry" was established / Cumulative number of fluctuation displays executed in the low probability low base state (normal state)] It is displayed. In the 5th row, the character "777" is displayed as an item indicating 7 sets of winning combinations, and correspondingly, the cumulative number of times that the winning combination is "7 sets" in the first mini slot variable display. "DDDD times" and the winning probability of "7 sets" "(1 / ddddd.d)" [= Cumulative number of times when "7 sets" was established / Low probability Low base state (normal state) Cumulative number] is displayed.

The cumulative number of times "7 sets" has been won (DDDD times) is a combination of mini slot symbols that are "7 sets" in the mini slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 of the mini slot 16TM030 (in this example). , [7] [7] [7]) indicate the number of times the game has stopped, and is counted separately from the number of times the jackpot has occurred and displayed as an item different from the number of times the jackpot has occurred.

In addition, each cumulative number of times (XXXX times, AAAA times, BBBB times, CCCC times, DDDD times) is displayed in a maximum of 4 digits, and the count is stopped at "9999 times". In addition, the denominator of the winning probability is displayed with a maximum of 5 digits including the first decimal place, and the count is stopped at "1 / 999.9". For each winning combination, if the number of winnings is 1 or more, the winning probability is displayed, and if the number of winnings is 0, the winning probability display is hidden.

In the present embodiment, the RAM 122 of the effect control board 12 stores the history information (each cumulative number of times described above, etc.) related to the mini reel information, and the effect control CPU 120 images the mini reel information based on the stored history information. It can be displayed on the display device 5. Specifically, the history information for three days of "today", "the day before", and "the day before the previous day" is stored in the backup storage area of the RAM 122, and the history information is retained even when the power is turned off.

As the mini reel information, the mini reel information of "today" is set as the default, and the characters "today" are displayed on the selected tab 16TM210 and the characters "previous day" are displayed on the next selection tab 16TM220. Further, an operation promotion display 16TM270 prompting the operator to operate the stick controller 31A is displayed on the right side of the screen of the image display device 5. Every time the controller sensor unit detects that the stick controller 31A has been operated while the operation promotion display 16TM270 is displayed, the mini reel information is switched from "previous day" to "two days before", and the selected tab 16TM210 is displayed. The characters are switched from "previous day" to "two days before", and the characters on the next selection tab 16TM220 are switched from "two days before" to "today". Then, when the controller sensor unit detects that the stick controller 31A has been operated while the mini reel information of "the day before the previous day" is selected, the information is switched to the mini reel information of "today" again, and the characters on the selected tab 16TM210 are displayed. Is switched to "today", and the characters on the next selection tab 16TM220 are switched to "previous day".

When the power of the game machine is turned on, the power-on history stored in the backup RAM is referred to, and if the date of the previous power-on and the date of the current power-on are different, the history information of the "previous day" is changed to ". After storing in the storage area corresponding to "the day before the previous day" (overwriting the history information), the history information of "today" is stored in the storage area corresponding to "the day before" (overwriting of the history information), and the data is updated. .. As a result, when the power is turned on at the start of business of "today", the "previous day" and "previous day" are based on the updated "previous day" and "previous day" historical information stored in the backup storage area. It is possible to display the mini reel information of "every day".

Further, in the present embodiment, an operation promotion display 16TM280 prompting the user to operate the push button 31B is displayed at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5 together with the characters “return”. When the push sensor detects that the push button 31B has been operated while the operation promotion display 16TM280 is displayed, the display of the mini reel information ends and the screen returns to the menu screen.

As shown in FIG. 9-11, when the "mini reel information" icon is selected by operating the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B while the menu screen is displayed, "today" and "today" are backed up. The mini reel information based on the history information of "the day before" and "the day before the previous day" is displayed on the image display device 5. Then, in the mini reel information 16TM200, the execution probability of the first setting suggestion effect, and the winning probability of "bell", "(1 / aaaa.a)" [= cumulative number of times "bell" is established / low probability low base Cumulative number of variable displays executed in the state (normal state)] is displayed.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the player himself counts the number of times the first setting suggestion effect is executed, the player himself calculates the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect, and the calculated first setting suggestion effect is performed. It is possible to estimate the set value by determining which of the set values of the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect for each well-known set value the execution ratio is close to. However, when the player himself counts the number of times the first setting suggestion effect is executed, the number of times the first setting suggestion effect is executed may be erroneously counted. In the present embodiment, the player operates the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B during the demonstration display to confirm the execution probability (the winning probability of the "bell") of the first setting suggestion effect in the mini reel information. Therefore, even if the number of executions of the first setting suggestion effect is erroneously counted, the accurate execution probability of the first setting suggestion effect can be easily grasped.

(Other variants)
(1) In the above embodiment, the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect are effects suggesting the currently set value, but the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect are , It can be said that it is a production that suggests that the setting has been changed. For example, the execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect is close to the execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect (well-known execution rate) corresponding to the setting value 4, and the execution rate of the second setting suggestion effect is the set value. It is difficult for the player to estimate the actual set value when the execution ratio (well-known execution ratio) of the second setting suggestion effect corresponding to 2 is approximated. However, in such a situation, the execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect indicated by the mini reel information of "the day before" and "the day before the previous day" is the execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect corresponding to the set value 1 (well known). When it is close to the execution rate of), the player can infer that it is highly likely that the set value has been changed at least. That is, it can be inferred that the set values of "the day before" and "the day before the previous day" are the set values 1, and since there is a high possibility that the set values have been changed for "today", the current set values. Can be inferred to be at least a set value of 2 or more.

The setting suggestion effect (first setting suggestion effect, second setting suggestion effect) may be an effect executed at a different ratio depending on whether or not the set value is changed on the day. For example, when the set value is changed on the day, the setting suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate than when the set value is not changed on the day.

Further, the setting suggestion effect (first setting suggestion effect, second setting suggestion effect) may be an effect executed at different ratios depending on the set value. For example, the effect may be executed at a higher rate when the set value is 3 or more than when the set value is 2 or less. Further, the setting suggestion effect (first setting suggestion effect, second setting suggestion effect) may be an effect in which the effect mode is determined at different ratios according to the set value. For example, when the set value is 2 or less, the display color of the setting suggestion effect is determined to be blue at a rate of 70% and red at a rate of 30%, while the set value is 3 or more. The display color of the setting suggestion effect may be determined to be blue at a rate of 30% and red at a rate of 70%.

(2) In the above embodiment, the degree of expectation that is controlled to the jackpot game state differs depending on the winning combination, and the degree of expectation increases in the order of "missing" <"watermelon" <"cherry" <"7 matching". Although an example is shown, the expectation for a jackpot of a specific jackpot type may be different depending on the winning combination, not limited to such a form. For example, the degree of expectation that the jackpot type will be a probabilistic jackpot differs depending on the winning combination, and the degree of expectation may be higher in the order of "missing" <"watermelon" <"cherry" <"7 sets".

(3) In the above embodiment, an example of executing the first mini-slot variable display (first time) in which the winning combination is "out of place" based on the decision not to execute the first setting suggestion effect. Although shown, not limited to this, based on the decision not to execute the first setting suggestion effect, (i) execute the first mini-slot variable display (first time) in which the winning combination is "off". In some cases, (ii) the first mini-slot variable display itself may not be executed.

In the case where such an effect configuration is adopted and based on the decision not to execute the first setting suggestion effect, (ii) the first mini-slot variable display itself is not executed, (a). When it is decided to execute the expectation notice effect, the first mini-slot variable display related to the expectation notice effect is executed, and a winning combination other than "bell" (including "off") is used as the winning combination. After the establishment, the second mini-slot variable display related to the expectation notice effect is executed. On the other hand, based on the decision not to execute the first setting suggestion effect, it was decided not to execute (b) the expectation notice effect when (ii) the first mini-slot variable display itself is not executed. Occasionally, neither the first mini-slot variable display nor the second mini-slot variable display is executed during the variable display.

(4) In the above embodiment, when the menu screen is displayed during the demo display, the mini reel information is displayed by selecting the "mini reel information" icon by operating the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. An example is shown in which the image display device 5 displays the execution probability of the first setting suggestion effect, but the present invention is not limited to this form, and the mini reel information may be displayed during a period other than the demo display. For example, during the jackpot game state including the fanfare period and the ending period, or during the variable display period, the mini reel information can be obtained by operating the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B to select the "mini reel information" icon. It may be displayed on the image display device 5 to notify the execution probability of the first setting suggestion effect. It should be noted that the execution probability of the first setting suggestion effect may be notified without requiring an operation, for example, an advantage for the player such as an ending period of the big hit game state and a variable display at which the high base state ends. The execution probability of the first setting suggestion effect may be displayed at the end of the above period.

(5) In the above embodiment, an example in which the mini reel information is displayed on the image display device 5 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and the mini reel information is displayed in an area different from the image display device 5. Is also good. For example, in a gaming machine provided with a sub-image display device that displays various effect images different from the image display device 5, mini reel information is displayed on the sub-image display device during a demo display, a jackpot game state, or a variable display. You may.

(6) In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the second change effect is an effect of changing the display mode of the active display, but the second change effect is not limited to such a form, and the second change effect is a hold display. It may be an effect that changes the display mode. For example, the display result (character symbol) of the second mini-slot variable display is used to execute a look-ahead notice effect for notifying the display result of the variable display (variable display that is the target of the look-ahead notice) that has not been executed, and the second A second change effect may be executed in which a character icon based on the display result of the mini-slot variable display is added to the hold display corresponding to the variable display that is the target of the pre-reading notice. As described above, the display result suggested by the second mini-slot variable display is not limited to the display result of the variable display that has been executed, and may be the display result of the variable display that has not been executed. In addition, the target of the response information changed by the second change effect is not limited to the response information corresponding to the executed variation display (active display), but also the response information corresponding to the non-executed variation display (hold display). It may be.

(7) In the above embodiment, the first mini-slot variable display executed in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 (3 reels) is performed twice (the first winning combination is "bell" or "missing". ", The second successful combination is other than" bell "), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first mini-slot variable display may be executed three times or more. For example, based on the decision to execute the first setting suggestion effect, the first mini-slot variable display is executed twice, and the expectation degree advance notice effect is executed. The first mini-slot variable display related to the advance notice effect may be performed twice, and the second mini-slot variable display related to the expectation advance notice effect may be executed. For example, when the first mini-slot variable display is executed a total of four times, the first winning combination is set to "missing" and then the second winning combination is set to "bell" (first setting suggestion effect), the third time. It is possible to set the 4th winning combination to "cherry" after setting the winning combination to "watermelon".

(8) In the above embodiment, an example in which the second mini-slot variable display is executed only once based on the decision to execute the expectation degree advance notice effect is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this. The variable display of 2 mini slots may be executed twice or more. For example, after the display result of the first mini-slot variable display is set to "CHANGE", the display result of the second mini-slot variable display may be set to "extreme heat". In this way, when the second mini-slot variable display is executed a plurality of times, each display result is determined so that the display result with a high expectation is not followed by the display result with a low expectation. The fall of the notice character shall be restricted.

Further, the second change effect may be executed a plurality of times in response to the execution of the second mini-slot variable display a plurality of times. For example, based on the fact that the display result of the first mini-slot variable display is "CHANGE", the character icon of "CHANGE" is superimposed on the active display, and then the display result of the second mini-slot variable display is displayed. Is changed to "super heat", and instead of the character icon of "CHANGE", the character icon of "super heat" may be superimposed on the active display. In this way, when the second change effect is executed a plurality of times, each display mode is determined so that the display mode with high expectation does not change to the display mode with low expectation, and the active display is displayed. It shall limit the decline of the display mode.

(9) In the above embodiment, only the freeze mode is exemplified as the special mode of the variable display of the mini-slot symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of types of special modes may be provided. For example, as a special mode, in addition to the freeze mode described above, a mode in which the speed at which the mini-slot symbol is variably displayed (scrolling speed) is extremely faster or extremely slower than the normal mode may be provided, and the variable display may be provided. The mini-slot symbol to be played may be expanded (for example, 200% of the normal mode). Further, the ratio of the winning combination may be different depending on the type of the special aspect. For example, in the second special mode (freeze mode) than in the first special mode (mode in which the mini slot symbol is enlarged), the winning combination of the variable display of the mini slot symbol is "cherry" or "7 sets". The ratio may be high.

(10) In the above embodiment, a plurality of variable display patterns (variable display times) of mini-slot symbols may be provided. For example, as the variable display pattern of the mini-slot symbol, a variable display pattern having a variable display time of 3.5 seconds and a variable display pattern having a variable display time of 30 seconds may be provided. Then, the winning combination may be determined at different ratios according to the variable display pattern of the mini-slot symbol. For example, in the case of a variable display pattern having a variable display time of 30 seconds, the ratio of the winning combinations being "cherry" or "7 sets" is higher than in the case of a variable display pattern having a variable display time of 3.5 seconds. May be high.

(11) In the above embodiment, at the timing when the combination of the mini-slot symbols is stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 (the winning combination is established), the mini-slot symbol corresponds to the winning combination. The effect image may be displayed in the display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1. For example, when "replay" is established as a winning combination, a blue effect image is displayed, when "bell" is established as a winning combination, a yellow effect image is displayed, and "watermelon" is established as a winning combination. , If a green effect image is displayed and "cherry" is established as a winning combination, a red effect image is displayed, and if "7 alignment" is established as a winning combination, a rainbow-colored effect image is displayed. Good.

(12) In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which "7 sets" is stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 as a winning combination for notifying that the jackpot has been confirmed, but the present invention is not limited to this. , "BAR alignment" may be stopped and displayed as a winning combination to notify that the jackpot has been confirmed. To display the stop display of "BAR alignment" as a winning combination is to stop and display the combination of [BAR], [BAR], and [BAR] in the mini slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1. Further, the probability variation jackpot may be determined when "7 alignment" is established, and the normal jackpot may be determined when "BAR alignment" is established.

(13) In the above embodiment, the mini-slot 16TM030 including the mini-slot symbol does not depend on whether or not the variable display of the special symbol is executed (whether or not the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed). Although an example of information that can be displayed regardless of the number of reserved storages has been shown, the mini slot 16TM030 may be hidden during a predetermined period, not limited to such a form. For example, the mini slot 16TM030 may be hidden during the period when the super reach effect is being executed.

(14) In the above-described embodiment, an example is shown in which the same winning combination (for example, [bell]) is not established multiple times except for "off" during one special symbol variation display. Not limited to such a form, the same winning combination (for example, [bell]) that is not “out of place” may be established multiple times during one variation display of the special symbol. In the case of adopting such a configuration, if the total number of times that the winning combination (for example, [Bell]) is established is included in the cumulative number of times, [How many fluctuation displays out of the executed n fluctuation displays] It becomes extremely difficult to grasp the most important information for guessing the set value, such as whether the winning combination [bell] is established in response to the above, and the importance of the information displayed in the mini reel information 16TM200 becomes important. It may drop and the player may not pay attention. In order to solve such a problem, even if the same winning combination (for example, [Bell]) is established multiple times during one special symbol variation display, the same winning combination is displayed during this variation display. The cumulative number of times is counted, assuming that the number of times it is established is one. For example, even if the winning combination of "bell" is established three times during one special symbol variation display, the number of times the winning combination of "bell" is established during this variation display is regarded as one, and the mini reel Information 16 Add 1 to the cumulative number of times the TM200 "bell" has been won.

(15) In the above embodiment, an example in which the display mode of the variation number display 16TM040 is changed from the normal mode (white mode) to the setting suggestion mode (for example, purple mode) at a rate corresponding to the set value is shown, but it is specified. Regarding the set value of (for example, a set value such as 5 or 6 which is particularly advantageous for the player), the setting suggestion mode may be different from the case of other set values. For example, when the set value is in the range of 1 to 4, the display mode of the fluctuation number display 16TM040 is changed from the normal mode (white mode) to the first setting suggestion mode (for example, purple mode) at a ratio corresponding to the set value. When the set value is 5 or 6, the display mode of the variation number display 16TM040 is changed from the normal mode (white mode) to the second setting suggestion mode (for example, gold mode) at a ratio corresponding to the set value. As for whether or not to use the first setting suggestion mode, the lottery is performed once every 25 times as described above, whereas as to whether or not to use the second setting suggestion mode, 50 A separate lottery may be held at a rate of once per time. Then, when it is decided to use the second setting suggestion mode, the fluctuation number display 16TM040 is displayed as the second setting suggestion mode (for example, the gold mode) regardless of whether or not it is decided to use the first setting suggestion mode. ).

(16) In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect is set in common regardless of the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) in the low probability low base state (normal state). Not limited to this, the execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect may be different depending on the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time). For example, the fluctuation pattern of the long fluctuation time is larger than the fluctuation pattern of the short fluctuation time. , The first setting suggestion effect may be executed at a high rate.

(17) In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the variable display of the mini-slot symbol is executed at the lower center of the screen and the set value is suggested by the display result, but the mini-slot is not limited to such a mode. The set value may be suggested by another effect executed in response to the variable display of the symbol. For example, an effect in which any one of a plurality of types of characters appears in response to the variable display of the mini-slot symbol may be executed, and the set value may be suggested by the type of the appearing character.

It should be noted that the variable display of the mini-slot symbol and other effects corresponding to the variable display of the mini-slot symbol may be executed in an area different from the lower center of the screen. For example, it may be executed in an area that does not overlap (do not overlap) with the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R at the right edge or the left edge of the screen, and is a display device (so-called sub-display device) different from the image display device 5. It may be executed.

(18) In the above embodiment, the effect acting on the hold display and the effect acting on the active display are the lower center (see FIG. 9-10 (11)) or the lower right (FIG. 9-9 (5)) of the screen. Although examples are shown in (see), these effects may be performed in different areas. For example, it may be executed in an area that does not overlap (do not overlap) with the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R at the right edge or the left edge of the screen, and is a display device (so-called sub-display device) different from the image display device 5. It may be executed.

(19) In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the setting suggestion effect and the expectation level advance notice effect by the variable display of the mini slot symbol are executed in the low probability low base state (normal state), but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be executed in a high-accuracy high-base state or a high-accuracy low-base state (KT control that tends to make a small hit than in a normal state).

In such an effect configuration, the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect (the rate at which the winning combination is "bell") is [(a variable display of the decorative symbol (special symbol) executed in the gaming state in which the setting suggestion effect can be executed). The ratio of (the number of times the setting suggestion effect is executed in the game state (the number of times the winning combination is "bell" in the variable display of the mini-slot symbol) to the number of times)]. Therefore, the high accuracy and high base state. If the variable display of the mini-slot symbol is executed in, [(the number of times the winning combination is "bell" in the variable display of the mini-slot symbol executed in the high-accuracy high-base state) ÷ (high-accuracy high-base) The execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect is calculated by the variable display number of the decorative symbol (special symbol) executed in the state), and the set value is suggested by the calculated value. In addition, the high accuracy and low base state (KT state). ) When the variable display of the mini-slot symbol is executed, [(the number of times that the winning combination is "bell" in the variable display of the mini-slot symbol executed in the high accuracy low base state (KT state)) ÷ (Number of variations of the decorative symbol (special symbol) executed in the high-accuracy low-base state (KT state))] calculates the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect, and the calculated value suggests the set value.

The present invention is not limited to those described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiment examples described later.

Further, all or a part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modification, and the configurations shown in the following embodiment and each modification may be arbitrarily combined.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiment and the following-described embodiment disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and are not considered to be restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above and below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention also includes any of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player (setting values 1 to 6 having different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination). Setting means (game control microcomputer 100) that can be set to the set value,
The effect control means (CPU 120 for effect control) that controls the effect,
A display means (CPU 120 for effect control, image display device 5) is provided.
The effect control means can execute the first setting suggestion effect related to the setting suggestion in a specific display area in the display area of the display means (mini slot symbol display area 5L1 of the mini slot 16TM030 at the lower part of the screen of the image display device 5). In 5C1 and 5R1, by stopping and displaying the combination of [bell], [bell], and [bell] mini-slot symbols as the same symbol combination, it is possible to execute the effect of establishing the role of "bell"). , The second setting suggestion effect regarding the setting suggestion can be executed in a predetermined display area in the display area of the display means (the effect of displaying the variation number display 16TM040 in the setting suggestion mode at the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5 can be executed. ) And
The execution ratios of the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect are different from each other (as shown in FIG. 9-6 (G), the execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect is 3% (setting value 1). While it is ~ 8% (set value 6), as shown in FIG. 9-7 (M), the execution rate of the second setting suggestion effect is 10% (set value 1) to 20% (set value). 6)),
The display means (effect control CPU 120, image display device 5) hides the first setting suggestion effect when a specific effect (battle effect in super reach) is executed (see FIGS. 9-10 (12)). As shown, in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 of the image display device 5, the combination of mini-slot symbols corresponding to the first setting suggestion effect (in this example, [bell] [bell] [bell]) is (Hidden),
further,
Specific display means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control that performs hold display or active display) capable of displaying specific display related to variable display on display means, and
It is provided with a change effect executing means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the process of 074AKS035) capable of executing a change effect that changes the display color of the specific display.
The display color of the specific display differs depending on the degree of expectation controlled by the advantageous state (for example, when the active display (including the case where it changes at the hold display stage) changes up to the "red" stage). , The variable display result will always be a "big hit", etc.),
There are a normal effect state and a specific effect state in which a transition from the normal effect state can be performed and the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than that of the normal effect state (for example, a monochrome effect is executed). In that case, the expectation that the variable display result will be a big hit is higher than when the monochrome effect is not executed),
The specific effect state is an effect state in which at least a part of the colors of the display target including the specific display displayed by the display means is displayed less than the normal effect state (for example, the effect). It is an effect of changing the target image displayed on the image display device 3 to a monochrome mode by performing monochrome output processing on the control board 12 side, and is used when displaying a pre-stored effect image. It is a production that displays the number of colors to be performed with a smaller number of colors than the normal production state),
When the change effect is executed by the change effect executing means in the normal effect state, the display color of the specific display is changed to a display color according to the degree of expectation controlled in the advantageous state. When the change effect is executed by the change effect means in the specific effect state, a common display color is used without changing the display color of the specific display regardless of the degree of expectation controlled by the advantageous state. (For example, during the specific effect state (when the monochrome effect flag is on), the monochrome output process is performed, so even if the change effect of the success mode is executed, it is held regardless of the jackpot expectation. The display and active display are displayed in "white". On the other hand, in the normal effect state in which the monochrome effect is not being executed, the display color is displayed according to the expected degree according to the display mode change pattern),
When the specific effect state is changed to the normal effect state, the display color of the specific display is displayed in a display color according to the degree of expectation controlled in the advantageous state (for example, in step 074AKS032 in a monochrome mode). The number of colors used for the target image that was the display target has returned to the normal number of colors, and the hold display and active display whose display mode has changed due to the change effect are displayed in the changed display color), Be done.
According to such a configuration, since the execution ratios of the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect are different, it is possible for the player to guess the setting by combining the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect. Can be improved. Further, the expectation degree notification by color can be suitably performed, and the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, the game state and the setting suggestion effect may be associated with each other. For example, in the normal state, the execution frequency of the setting suggestion effect may be higher than in the specific effect state. By doing so, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the set value in the normal state, and to increase the degree of attention to the big hit in the specific production state, and the interest is improved.

Further, the setting suggestion effect and the change effect may be associated with each other. For example, a plurality of modes of change effect may be provided, and a set value may be suggested in the change effect. By doing so, when the change effect is executed, not only the color change but also the set value can be estimated, and the interest is improved.

Further, the set value and the display color of the specific display may be associated with each other. For example, by providing a plurality of colors, a color related to the jackpot expectation and a color related to the set value, and a color related to the jackpot and the set value, it is possible to estimate the jackpot expectation and the set value, which further improves the interest.

Further, if the suggestion of the set value is performed by a plurality of elements (for example, two elements of the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect and the display color of the specific display), the player can use the plurality of elements. When a favorable setting value is suggested, the player can be more confident that the setting value is favorable to the player, and a setting value favorable to the player is not suggested by a certain factor. Even in this case, if an advantageous setting value is suggested by other factors, the player can maintain the expectation that the setting value is advantageous to the player, so that the game interest can be improved.
It should be noted that the setting value may be suggested by three or more elements. By doing so, if three or more factors suggest a setting value that is favorable to the player, the player can be further convinced that the setting value is favorable to the player, and also. Even if one factor does not suggest a setting value that is favorable to the player, if the remaining factors suggest a setting value that is favorable to the player, the player will be a setting value that is favorable to the player. Since the remaining elements are of multiple types, the number of elements that suggest a setting value that is advantageous to the player changes in the remaining elements (for example, the setting value is suggested by three elements). In the case of performing, there are cases where there are 0, 1 and 2 elements that suggest a setting value that is advantageous to the player in the remaining elements), which broadens the prediction of the set value and makes the game fun. Can be further improved.

Further, as another example of a gaming machine capable of improving the interest, a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can perform variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Specific display means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control that performs hold display or active display) capable of displaying specific display related to variable display on display means, and
It is provided with a change effect executing means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the process of 074AKS035) capable of executing a change effect that changes the display color of the specific display.
The display color of the specific display differs depending on the degree of expectation controlled by the advantageous state (for example, when the active display (including the case where it changes at the hold display stage) changes up to the "red" stage). , The variable display result will always be a "big hit", etc.),
There are a normal effect state and a specific effect state in which a transition from the normal effect state can be performed and the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than that of the normal effect state (for example, a monochrome effect is executed). In that case, the expectation that the variable display result will be a big hit is higher than when the monochrome effect is not executed),
The specific effect state is an effect state in which at least a part of the colors of the display target including the specific display displayed by the display means is displayed less than the normal effect state (for example, the effect). It is an effect of changing the target image displayed on the image display device 3 to a monochrome mode by performing monochrome output processing on the control board 12 side, and is used when displaying a pre-stored effect image. It is a production that displays the number of colors to be performed with a smaller number of colors than the normal production state),
When the change effect is executed by the change effect executing means in the normal effect state, the display color of the specific display is changed to a display color according to the degree of expectation controlled in the advantageous state. When the change effect is executed by the change effect means in the specific effect state, a common display color is used without changing the display color of the specific display regardless of the degree of expectation controlled by the advantageous state. (For example, during the specific effect state (when the monochrome effect flag is on), the monochrome output process is performed, so even if the change effect of the success mode is executed, it is held regardless of the jackpot expectation. The display and active display are displayed in "white". On the other hand, in the normal effect state in which the monochrome effect is not being executed, the display color is displayed according to the expected degree according to the display mode change pattern),
When shifting from the specific effect state to the normal effect state, the display color of the specific display is displayed in a display color according to the degree of expectation controlled in the advantageous state (for example, in step 074AKS032 in a monochrome mode). The number of colors used for the target image that was the display target returns to the normal number of colors, and the hold display or active display whose display mode has changed due to the change effect is displayed in the changed display color, etc.) .. A form example of this game machine will be described below as another form example.

10-1 (A) and 10-1 (B) are explanatory views showing a display result determination table. Of these, FIG. 10-1 (A) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special figure used when the variable special figure is the first special figure, and FIG. 10-2 (A) shows the variable special figure. A configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used when the figure is the second special figure is shown. The display result judgment table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit judgment value compared with the random number value MR1 for each set value is set as a variable display result (special figure display result) of a special symbol. Is. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated in the range of 0 to 65535. The hit determination value in the display result determination table is also assigned to the special figure display result in the range of 0 to 65535. The display result judgment table is not limited to the one in which the first special figure and the second special figure use individual display result judgment tables, and the display result judgment common to the first special figure and the second special figure. A table may be used.

Among the cases where the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". Among the cases where the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit judgment value compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the display result is 1020 to 1346. Is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Among the cases where the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". Among the cases where the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1346. Are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses".

Among the cases where the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1253 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". Of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result when the game state is the probabilistic state in the case where the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, 1020 to Up to 1383 is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Among the cases where the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1253 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". Among the cases where the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020-1383. Is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss".

Among the cases where the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020-1272 is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Among the cases where the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1429. Is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Among the cases where the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020-1272 is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Among the cases where the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1429. Are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses".

Among the cases where the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". Among the cases where the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1487. Is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Among the cases where the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". Among the cases where the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1487. Are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses".

Among the cases where the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1317 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". Among the cases where the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1556. Is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Among the cases where the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1317 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". Among the cases where the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1556. Is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss".

Among the cases where the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". Among the cases where the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1674. Is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Among the cases where the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". Among the cases where the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1674. Is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss".

In each display result judgment table, when the game state is the probability change state (high probability state), more judgment values than when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state) are the special figures of "big hit". It is assigned to the display result. As a result, in the probability change state (high probability state) in which the probability change control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is controlled as a "big hit" in the big hit game state in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Then, the probability of being determined (for example, 1/300 when the set value is 1, 1/280 when the set value is 2, 1/260 when the set value is 3, and 1 / when the set value is 4). Compared to 240, 1/220 when the set value is 5, and 1/200 when the set value is 6, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled as a "big hit" and controlled to the big hit gaming state is higher. (For example, 1/200 when the set value is 1, 1/180 when the set value is 2, 1/160 when the set value is 3, 1/140 when the set value is 4, and the set value is When it is 5, it is 1/120, and when the set value is 6, it is 1/100). The probability of being determined to control the jackpot game state is higher when the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probability change state (high probability state) than in the normal state or the time saving state. In the result determination table, the determination value is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state.

The magnification of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time saving state is different according to each set value (for example, if the setting value is 1, the magnification of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time saving state). Is 1.5 times, and if the set value is 2, the ratio of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is about 1.56 times, and if the setting value is 3, the normal state or the time saving state The magnification of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in is not limited to 1.625 times), and the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time saving state at each set value. The multiples of the jackpot probability in the above may be set to be constant (for example, 5 times).

In each first special figure display result determination table, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is the same regardless of the game state or the set value. Judgment value is assigned. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-1 (A), in the display result determination table for the first special figure, the special figure display result is set as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or the set value. The probability of being determined to control the game state is set to 1/200. On the other hand, in each display result determination table for the second special figure, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as a "small hit" is determined regardless of the game state or the set value. Judgment values are assigned so that the values are the same as those in the display result judgment table for figures. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-1 (B), in the display result determination table for the second special figure, the special figure display result is set as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or the set value. The probability of being determined to control the game state is set to 1/100.

Regardless of the set value, the special figure display result is not limited to the form in which the probability determined to control the small hit game state as "small hit" is the same probability, and the special figure display result is displayed according to the set value. The probability of being determined to control the small hit gaming state as a "small hit" may be different. It is not limited to the form in which the probability of being determined to control the small hit game state by setting the special figure display result as "small hit" according to the variable special map is different, and the special figure display result is "small hit" regardless of the variable special map. The probability of being determined to control the small hit gaming state as "small hit" may be the same probability.

Focusing on the numerical range of the hit judgment values assigned to "big hit" and "small hit" in each display result judgment table, in the display result judgment table for the first special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. , The range from 1024 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 to set. In the case of the value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is a range of 1238 to 1253 for the set value 2, a range of 1238 to 1272 for the set value 3, a range of 1238 to 1292 for the set value 4, and a range of 1238 to 1317 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively. As described above, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, when the set value is 1 among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, While only the values in the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "big hit", when the set value is 2 or more, the numerical value in the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range is " It is assigned to "big hit". The non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1238 as the value of the set value increases. Therefore, the jackpot probability becomes higher as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value (big hit reference value) of the jackpot judgment value. I will go.

In the display result judgment table for the first special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 32767 to 33094 of the hit judgment values is a small hit for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the judgment value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, in this case, 102 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, while the small hit judgment value is the case where the set value is 6. In a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value (1020 to 1346), 32767 is set as a reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit determination value in the range of 32767 to 33094. As a result, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result judgment table for the first special figure when the game state is the probability change state, the range from 102 to 1346 of the hit judgment values is a common numerical range of the big hit judgment values for judging the big hit regardless of the set value. Is set to. When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020-1346 is assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 to set. In the case of the value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the set value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the set value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for the set value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively. In this way, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the probabilistic state, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, when the set value is 1, the common numerical range While only the numerical values in (1020 to 1346) are assigned to "big hit", when the set value is 2 or more, the numerical value in the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range becomes "big hit". Assigned. The non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1347 as the value of the set value increases. Therefore, the jackpot probability becomes higher as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value (big hit reference value) of the jackpot judgment value. I will go.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the probability change state, 32767 of the hit determination values are the same as the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. The range from ~ 33094 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, in this case, 102 to 1674 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, while the small hit judgment value is the case where the set value is 6. In a numerical range different from the range of the jackpot determination value (1020 to 1674), 32767 is set as a reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit determination value in the range of 32767 to 33094. As a result, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result judgment table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of the hit judgment values from 1020 to 1237 is the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range. When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 to set. In the case of the value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is a range of 1238 to 1253 for the set value 2, a range of 1238 to 1272 for the set value 3, a range of 1238 to 1292 for the set value 4, and a range of 1238 to 1317 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively. In this way, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, when the set value is 1 among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, While only the numbers in the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "big hit", when the set value is 2 or more, the numerical value in the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range is " It is assigned to "big hit". The non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1238 as the value of the set value increases. Therefore, the jackpot probability becomes higher as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value (big hit reference value) of the jackpot judgment value. I will go.

In the display result judgment table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit judgment values is a small hit for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the judgment value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, in this case, 102 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, while the small hit judgment value is the big hit when the set value is 6. In a numerical range different from the range of determination values (1020 to 1346), 32767 is set as a reference value (small hit reference value) for small hit determination values in the range of 32767 to 33421. As a result, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result judgment table for the second special figure when the game state is the probabilistic state, the range from 102 to 1346 of the hit judgment values is a common numerical range of the big hit judgment values for judging the big hit regardless of the set value. Is set to. When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020-1346 is assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 to set. In the case of the value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the set value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the set value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for the set value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively. As described above, in the display result determination table for FIG. 2 when the game state is the probabilistic state, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, when the set value is 1, the common numerical range ( While only the numerical values in 1020 to 1346) are assigned to "big hit", when the set value is 2 or more, the numerical value in the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range is assigned to "big hit". Has been done. The non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1347 as the value of the set value increases. Therefore, the jackpot probability becomes higher as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value (big hit reference value) of the jackpot judgment value. I will go.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the probabilistic state, among the hit determination values, as in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. The range from 32767 to 33421 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, in this case, 102 to 1674 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, while the small hit judgment value is the big hit when the set value is 6. In a numerical range different from the range of determination values (1020 to 1674), 32767 is set as a reference value (small hit reference value) for small hit determination values in the range of 32767 to 33421. As a result, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In each display result judgment table, regardless of the game state and the set value, the judgment included in a continuous numerical range consisting of a common numerical range or a common numerical range and a non-common numerical range with the hit judgment value 1020 as a reference. The value is set as the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, and the judgment value included in the continuous numerical range of 1 (common numerical range) based on the hit judgment value of 32767 is used as the small hit judgment regardless of the game state and the set value. The variable display result is judged as the numerical range of the value.

In each display result judgment table, when the fluctuation special figure is the same, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the same regardless of the game state (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the same). is there. In addition, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value differs depending on whether the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure (small in the display result judgment table for the first special figure). While the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the hit judgment value is 328, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the display result judgment table for the second special figure is about 655. On the other hand, the numerical range of the small hit determination value itself is set with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value).

In each gaming state, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the probability that it is determined that the special figure display result is controlled to the jackpot gaming state as "big hit" is the lowest, and the value of the set value is Judgment values are assigned so that the larger the value, the higher the probability that the special figure display result will be determined as a "big hit" and controlled to the big hit gaming state (big hit probability: setting value 6> setting value 5> setting value 4> setting). Value 3> Set value 2> Set value 1). The CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and when the value of the random number value MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the jackpot, the CPU 103 hits the jackpot (big hit) with respect to the special symbol. It is decided to be A to jackpot C). Further, when the random number value MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hit, it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. In this way, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is decided with the probability according to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIG. 10-1 indicates the probability of a big hit (ratio) and the probability of a small hit (ratio). Further, determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control the big hit game state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a big hit design. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control the small hit game state, but the stop in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B It also means deciding whether or not to make the symbol a small hit symbol.

The setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are not limited to a total of 6 setting values 1 to 6, and the setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are 5 or less. It may be 7 or more. The larger the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player (the probability of big hits increases, the specific big hit type can be easily determined, etc.), and the pachinko game is not limited to the form. The smaller the set value set in the machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be.

While the jackpot probability changes according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the game playability itself is not limited to the form that does not change, and the game is played according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The sex may change. For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variation state is 65%, which is the game property (so-called probability variation loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the gaming ball is set in the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game. While controlling the game state after the end of the big hit game to a probabilistic state based on passing through, the game property (so-called V) in which the ratio of the game ball passing through the predetermined switch during the big hit game is different according to the fluctuation special figure. Probability variation type), and when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the game is played during high base (during time reduction control). It may be a game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) in which the ball is controlled to a big hit gaming state based on passing through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the game playability is the same, but the jackpot probability and the small hit are higher than when these set values are any of 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game is small while the probability is high (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6). When the playability is changed according to the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, the predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as the effect switch (to execute the predetermined effect each time the game ball passes through the predetermined area. When the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is used as a game switch (for controlling the game state to the probability change state or the jackpot game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch). It may be used as a switch).

Next, the processing in the game control main processing in the feature unit related to the set value will be described. FIG. 10-2 is a flowchart showing an example of processing performed in the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103. The processing in the game control main processing is, for example, in the game control main processing shown in FIG. 3, after the interrupt is set to prohibit, the stack pointer is set, the built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output port, etc. ), The setting for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like may be executed after the initial setting is performed.

When the processing in the game control main processing is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko game machine 1 is activated while the clear switch is being operated. (Step S1A). Before the process of step S1A, a process of clearing the RAM clear flag indicating that the RAM clear process has been executed according to a predetermined condition may be performed.

When the clear switch is ON (step S1A; Yes), the RAM clear flag is set (step S2A) and the process proceeds to step S3A. When the clear switch is OFF (step S1A; No), step S2A The process proceeds to step S3A without executing the process of.

In step S3A, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch is ON (step S3A). When the lock switch is ON (step S3A; Yes), it is further determined whether or not the release sensor is ON (step S4A). When the release sensor is ON, that is, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with the lock switch ON and the game machine frame open (step S4A; Yes), is the RAM clear flag set? Whether or not it is determined (step S5A).

When the RAM clear flag is set (step S5A), the set value change process (step S6A) for changing the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed to proceed to the process of step S8A. When the RAM clear flag is not set (step A5A; No), the set value confirmation process (step S7A) for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed to perform the process of step S8A. move on. If the lock switch is OFF (step S3A; No) or the release sensor is OFF (step S4A; No), the process proceeds to step S8A as it is.

The setting value change process is performed by turning on the lock switch and the clear switch while the gaming machine frame is open when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is once turned off (power cut) and then restarted. This is the process to be performed. In the set value change process, a process of transmitting a set value change start notification command to the effect control board 12, a process of updating the content of the address F001 in the RAM 102 as a temporary set value based on the operation of the setting changeover switch, A process of updating and storing a temporary set value as an actual set value at the address F000 in the RAM 102 and a process of transmitting a set value change end notification command to the effect control board 12 are performed according to the state of the lock switch.

In the set value confirmation process, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is once turned off (power cut) and then restarted, the lock switch 207SG051 is turned on (clear switch is off) with the gaming machine frame open. It is a process performed by doing. In the set value confirmation process, a process of transmitting a set value confirmation start notification command to the effect control board 12, a display of the set value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 is started on the display monitor, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided. The process of outputting a security signal to a management device such as a management computer of a game hall via a terminal board (not shown), the display or the like is terminated according to the state of the lock switch, and the setting is set for the effect control board 12. The process of sending the value confirmation end notification command is performed.

In the set value change process and the set value confirmation process, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the round display are turned on from the start of each process, and the first hold display 25A, By starting the second hold display 25B and the blinking of the right-handed lamp, the player, the staff of the game hall, etc. are changing or setting the set value of the pachinko game machine 1 from the front side of the pachinko game machine 1. It suffices if it is possible to recognize that the value is being confirmed. Further, the lighting pattern of the segment constituting the round display may be any mode as long as it does not correspond to any of the plurality of jackpot types. Further, the segments constituting the round display may be lit in different modes at the start of the set value change process and the start of the set value confirmation process.

In step S8A, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, that is, whether or not the RAM 102 is cleared (whether or not the RAM clear process (step S9A) is executed) when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started this time. (Step S8A). If the RAM clear flag is set (step S8A; Yes), the RAM clear process (step S9A) is executed and then the process proceeds to step S10A. If the RAM clear flag is not set (step S8A; No), the RAM is cleared. The process proceeds to step S10A without executing the process (step S9A). Then, as another process, for example, depending on whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, the CPU 103 recovers whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start or in a state before the power failure (starts by a hot start). ), Performs processing according to each (step S10A), and ends the processing in the game control main processing.

In the RAM clear process, the data other than the set value and the RAM clear flag are cleared by storing "00H" in an address other than the first address (F000) in which the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stored. Processing is done. In the RAM clear processing, instead of clearing the data other than the set value, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, the predetermined address of the RAM 102 (the address F000 in the feature unit 048AK of this embodiment). It is also possible to clear only the game information stored in (F003 or later) of ~ FXXX).

The process of step S10A includes a process of blinking all the segments constituting the display monitor for a period (for example, 5 seconds) of the cold start notification timer at the time of calling and starting the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition, only a part of the segments may be blinked, or at least a part of all the segments constituting the display monitor may be turned on. Further, in the processing in the game control main processing, for example, based on the fact that an abnormal setting value is stored in the RAM 102 (setting value abnormality error), the recovery from the power failure during the setting change, and the like. A process of transmitting an error designation command according to an abnormality of the set value to the effect control board 12 may be included. Further, as a notification (error notification) of the occurrence of an abnormal setting value error or recovery from a power failure during setting change, the first display unit, the second display unit, the third display unit, and the fourth display that constitute the display monitor are displayed. A process of displaying "E." may be performed in each of the parts. Further, the CPU 103 blinks all the LEDs constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and manages the game hall via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. A security signal is output to a management device such as a computer, and thereafter, the CPU 103 displays until the pachinko game machine 1 is turned off (until the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned off by the operation of a clerk at the game hall). The occurrence notification of an error may be executed by the monitor, the first special symbol display device 4A, and the second special symbol display device 4B.

In the process in the game control main process, when the lock switch is determined to be ON in step S3A and then the release sensor is determined to be OFF in step S4A, the opening of the game machine frame is detected. Since the operation of the lock switch is detected without this, an error designation command may be transmitted to the effect control board 12 and an error notification may be performed by a display monitor or the like. The process of step S10A may include a process of transmitting a set value notification command to the effect control board 12. The set value notification command may be transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by the process of step S10A regardless of whether or not the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed. As a result, on the side of the effect control board 12, when the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on, the set value can be identifiable and stored regardless of whether or not the set value of the pachinko game machine 1 is changed. it can.

When an abnormal set value is set or when the setting value is being changed and the power is restored, the display monitor, the first special symbol display device 4A, and the second special symbol display device 4B notify the occurrence of an error. By executing the above, the staff of the game hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 1 has recovered from the occurrence of an error or the power failure during the change of the set value from both the front side and the back side of the pachinko game machine 1. .. In addition, the security of the pachinko game machine 1 can be improved by making it possible for the management device of the game hall to recognize the occurrence of an error in the pachinko game machine 1 and the recovery from the power failure while changing the set value. Will be.

As described above, the display result determination table included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is, as shown in FIG. 10-1, up to 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values regardless of the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The range of is set as a common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 2 to 6 (when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is other than 1), the value corresponding to each set value is set from 1238. The range up to is set as a non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 2 to 6, the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value are continuous with the hit determination value 1020 as the jackpot reference value. Since it is set to be in the numerical range, when determining whether or not it is controlled in the jackpot gaming state, the value of the random number MR1 is from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range according to each set value. It may be determined whether or not it is within the numerical range up to. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls in an advantageous state.

Since the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value within the range of 0 to 65535 is set at one place with 1020 as the reference value, it is more disturbed than the case where a plurality of numerical ranges of the advantageous state judgment value are provided. It is not necessary to determine whether or not the numerical value MR1 is within the numerical range of the jackpot determination value (whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state) multiple times. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls in an advantageous state.

As shown in FIG. 10-1, in the display result determination table, regardless of whether the game state is a normal state, a time saving state, or a probability variation state, the hit determination value 1020 is used as the jackpot reference value to determine the jackpot. Since the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the values are set to be continuous numerical ranges, the value of the random number value MR1 is used when determining whether or not the game is controlled to the jackpot game state. Whether it is within the numerical range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range according to the normal state or the time saving state, and whether it is within the range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range according to the probabilistic state. It may be judged whether or not. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls the jackpot gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 10-1, in the display result judgment table, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value depending on whether the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. (While the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the first special figure display result judgment table is 328, the small hit judgment value in the second special figure display result judgment table The number of judgment values included in the numerical range of is 655, which is about twice.) On the other hand, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value itself is set to 32767 as a reference value (small hit reference value). Therefore, when determining whether or not the small hit game state is controlled, the value of the random number MR1 is within the numerical range from 32767 to the maximum value of the small hit determination value according to the fluctuation special chart. It suffices to judge whether or not it is. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls the small hit game state.

As shown in FIG. 10-1, the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the display result determination table is the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is set to a numerical range (32767 to 33094 or 32767 to 33421) different from the numerical range of the judgment value of the jackpot in the case of 6. Therefore, when determining whether or not the game is controlled by the jackpot game state, it is determined whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the numerical range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range corresponding to each set value. When determining whether or not the small hit game state is controlled, the random number value MR1 is within the range from 32767 to the maximum value of the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the fluctuation special chart. It may be determined whether or not. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls to the big hit game state and the processing load for determining whether or not to control the small hit game state.

(Explanation of feature 74AK)
Next, the feature portion 074AK of this embodiment will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 074AK of this embodiment, as a look-ahead notice effect, a change effect is performed to change the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 074AK, any type of image including an image that notifies at least the degree of expectation controlled in an advantageous state by a color type, such as a variable display compatible display, is set in a monochrome mode. It is possible to execute a monochrome effect that makes it invisible to the player whether it is displayed in the color of (which is the display color of the expected degree). In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 074AK of this embodiment, when the change effect is executed during the execution of the monochrome effect, the display color of the variable display compatible display is displayed in a common color regardless of the degree of expectation. It has a feature that when the monochrome effect is completed, it becomes possible to visually recognize which expected display color is. Hereinafter, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 074AK having such features will be described. The same parts as those described in the above basic explanation will be omitted.

Further, a state in which a monochrome effect is being executed is referred to as a monochrome effect state or a specific effect state, and a state in which a monochrome effect is not being executed may be referred to as a normal effect state. Further, in the monochrome effect state in this embodiment, the background image is also in a monochrome mode, and is expressed only by shades of black. In the monochrome effect state (specific effect state), the image may be displayed in shades of red or blue in addition to shades of black, or may be black on a green background or black on a red background. Furthermore, if the degree of expectation by color is unrecognizable and the number of colors used is smaller than in the normal production state (unless it is full color), the entire display is not limited to monochrome, for example, the background. A part may be displayed in monochrome (shades of black) and the other part may be displayed in two colors (a specific color such as yellow is displayed in that color, and the other parts are displayed in that color). It may be displayed in shades of black). Further, in the monochrome effect, the target image displayed on the image display device 3 is changed to the monochrome mode by performing the monochrome output process on the effect control board 12 side when the execution of the monochrome effect is started. This is an effect, in which the number of colors used when displaying a pre-stored effect image is displayed with a smaller number of colors than in the normal effect state. In other words, it does not store other data such as a production image for monochrome production, and while the monochrome production is being executed (during a specific production state), the target image such as hold display or active display is subject to change production. It is displayed in monochrome mode regardless of whether it was damaged or not.

FIG. 11-1 is a flowchart showing an example of the start winning determination process executed in step S101 of FIG. When the start winning prize determination process is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the first starting port switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A is on (). Step S201). When it is determined that the first start port switch 22A is on (step S201; Yes) because it is determined that the first start port switch 22A is on in the switch processing, the CPU 103 sets the first special drawing. It is determined whether or not the first special figure reserved storage number, which is the reserved stored number of the special figure game used, is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”) (step S202). At this time, the CPU 103 is the first stored value of the first special figure reserved storage number counter (counter for counting the first special figure reserved storage number) provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (game control counter setting unit, etc.). It suffices if the first special figure reserved storage number can be specified by reading the special figure reserved storage number count value. When it is determined in step S202 that the number of reserved storages in the first special figure is not the upper limit value (step S202; No), the CPU 103 stores the start port buffer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 (game control buffer setting unit, etc.). The starting port buffer value, which is a value, is set to "1" (step S203).

When it is determined in step S201 that the first start port switch 22A is off (step S201; No), or when it is determined in step S202 that the number of reserved first special figure has reached the upper limit value (step S202; Yes), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second start opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B is on (step S204). When it is determined that the second start port switch 22B is on (step S204; Yes) because the second start port switch 22B is determined to be on in the switch processing, the CPU 103 sets the second special figure. It is determined whether or not the second special figure reserved storage number, which is the reserved stored number of the special figure game used, is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”) (step S205). At this time, the CPU 103 is a second stored value of a second special figure reserved storage number counter (counter for counting the number of second special figure reserved storage) provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (game control counter setting unit, etc.). It suffices if the second special figure reserved storage number can be specified by reading the special figure reserved storage number count value. When it is determined in step S205 that the number of reserved second special figure is not the upper limit value (step S205; No), the CPU 103 sets the start port buffer value to "2" (step S206). When it is determined that the second start port switch 22B is not on (step S204; No), or when it is determined that the second special figure reserved storage number is the upper limit value (step S205; Yes), the CPU 103 determines. Start The winning prize determination process ends.

After executing either the process of step S203 or S206, the CPU 103 updates so as to add 1 to the special figure reserved storage count value according to the start port buffer value (step S207). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the 1st special figure hold storage count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the 2nd special figure hold memory count value is added. Add 1 In this way, the 1st special figure reserved memory count value is incremented by 1 when the game ball enters the 1st start winning opening and the 1st start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the 1st special figure is satisfied. Updated to (increment). In addition, the second special figure reserved memory count value is incremented by 1 when the game ball enters the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied. Updated to (increment). At this time, the total hold storage count value, which is the stored value of the total hold storage counter provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 (game control counter setting unit, etc.), is updated so as to be added by 1 (step S208).

After executing the process of step S208, the CPU 103 extracts a predetermined game random number corresponding to the occurrence of the start winning prize (step S209). As an example, in the process of step S209, the random number for determining the special figure display result is determined from the numerical data updated by the random number counter or the like provided in the predetermined area (game control counter setting unit or the like) of the random number circuit 104 or the RAM 102. Numerical data indicating the numerical value MR1, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted. Numerical data indicating each random number value extracted in this way is stored as hold data by being set at the beginning of a free entry in the special figure hold storage unit corresponding to the start port buffer value (step S210). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the hold data is set in the first special figure hold storage unit. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the hold data is set in the second special figure hold storage unit. At this time, when the hold data is set in the first special figure hold storage unit, the CPU 103 can control the first hold indicator 25A to specify the number of the first special figure hold storage added by one. The first hold indicator 25A may be made to perform such a display (for example, the number of LEDs lit by one is increased). When the hold data is set in the second special figure hold storage unit, the CPU 103 controls the second hold indicator 25B to display a display capable of specifying the number of the second special figure hold storage added by one. The second hold indicator 25B may be made to perform (for example, increase the number of LEDs lit by one).

The first special figure holding storage unit is a special figure game (first special figure game) in which the game ball enters the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A and the first starting winning is generated, but the game has not been started yet. The hold data of the special figure game) using the first special figure in the symbol display device 4A is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit associates the winning order with the first starting winning opening (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number, and based on the establishment of the first starting condition by the entry of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 are stored as pending data. Is stored until a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4") is reached. In this way, the hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit indicates that the execution (variable display) of the special figure game using the first special figure is held, and the variable display result in this special figure game. Hold that makes it possible to determine whether or not it is determined to control the jackpot game state based on (special figure display result), and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is a specific mode (for example, reach effect). It becomes stored information.

It should be noted that the hold number of the first special figure hold storage unit and the display position of the hold display symbol (controlled by the effect control board 12 side) basically correspond to each other. Therefore, when the hold data is stored in the first special figure hold storage unit, the hold display symbol is displayed at the display position corresponding to the hold number associated with the hold data. For example, when the hold data is newly stored in association with the hold number "1", the hold display symbol is displayed at the first display position on the leftmost side of the first hold display unit 5HL. For example, when the hold data is newly stored in association with the hold number "2", the hold display symbol is displayed at the second display position located on the right side of the first display position of the first hold display unit 5HL. To do.

The second special figure holding storage unit is a special figure game (second) that has not been started yet, although the game ball enters the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B and the second starting winning is generated. The reserved data of the special figure game) using the second special figure in the special symbol display device 4B is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit associates the winning order with the second starting winning opening (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number, and based on the establishment of the second starting condition by the entry of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104 or the like are set as pending data, and the numbers are Storage is performed until a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4") is reached. In this way, the hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit indicates that the execution (variable display) of the special figure game using the second special figure is held, and the variable display result in this special figure game. Hold that makes it possible to determine whether or not it is determined to control the jackpot game state based on (special figure display result), and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is a specific mode (for example, reach effect). It becomes stored information.

It should be noted that the hold number of the second special figure hold storage unit and the display position of the hold display symbol (controlled by the effect control board 12 side) basically correspond to each other. Therefore, when the hold data is stored in the second special figure hold storage unit, the hold display symbol is displayed at the display position corresponding to the hold number associated with the hold data. For example, when the hold data is newly stored in association with the hold number "1", the hold display symbol is displayed at the first display position on the leftmost side of the second hold display unit 5HR. For example, when the hold data is newly stored in association with the hold number "2", the hold display symbol is displayed at the second display position located on the right side of the first display position of the second hold display unit 5HR. To do.

After executing the process of step S210, the CPU 103 makes a setting for transmitting the start port winning designation command prepared in advance to the effect control board 12 (step S211). After that, the CPU 103 makes a setting for transmitting the hold storage number notification command prepared in advance to the effect control board 12 (step S212).

Subsequently, the CPU 103 executes a winning random number value determination process (step S213). As described above, the winning random number value determination process is a process of determining the starting winning value, and the random number value is based on the random number values MR1 and MR3 of the random number values MR1 to 3 extracted in step S209. This is a process for determining whether or not the variable display result of the variable display of the execution target is a “big hit” or a “small hit” and the fluctuation pattern of the variable display (see FIG. 11-4). After that, the CPU 103 determines whether the start port buffer value is "1" or "2" (step S214). At this time, if it is determined that the start port buffer value is "2" (step S214; "2"), the CPU 103 clears the start port buffer and initializes the stored value to "0" (). Step S215), the start winning determination process is completed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the start port buffer value is "1" (step S214; "1"), the CPU 103 clears the start port buffer and initializes the stored value to "0". (Step S216), the process proceeds to step S204. As a result, even when both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect a valid start prize for the game ball, the process based on the detection of both valid start prizes can be reliably completed.

FIG. 11-2 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S213 of FIG. 11-1 as the winning random number value determination process. In this embodiment, when the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is started, the special symbol display result (variable display result of the special symbol) is set as a "big hit" or a "small hit" by the special symbol normal processing, and the big hit game. A decision is made as to whether or not to control the state or the small hit game state. Further, in the variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern corresponding to the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is determined. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, in the winning random number value determination process, the game ball is extracted at the starting winning timing detected at the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening) at this timing. Judgment as to whether or not the variable display result of the variable display of the execution target of the randomized value (random value extracted in the process of step S209) is "big hit" or "small hit", and variable display of the decorative symbol. It determines which fluctuation pattern will be (so-called "look-ahead"). As a result, before the variable display of the special symbol or decorative symbol based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the start winning opening is started (before the start condition of the special symbol game is satisfied), the special symbol display result is "big hit" or It is pre-read that it will be a "small hit" and that the variable display mode of the decorative symbol will be the predetermined display mode, and based on this pre-reading result, the effect control board 12 will hold the display by the effect control CPU 120 or the like. The display mode and the like can be determined.

In the winning random number value determination process shown in FIG. 11-2, the CPU 103 first, for example, a time saving flag (a flag that turns on when the time saving state is set) provided in a predetermined area (game control flag setting unit or the like) of the RAM 102. ) And the state of the probability change flag (the flag that is turned on when the probability change state is reached) to specify the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (step S301). The CPU 103 determines whether or not the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the jackpot gaming state by checking the value of the special figure process flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 (game control flag control unit, etc.). To identify. For example, when the value of the special figure process flag is "4" to "7", it may be specified that the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the jackpot gaming state.

Following the process of step S301, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the specified gaming state is in the jackpot gaming state (step S302). When it is determined that the jackpot is not hit (step S302; No), the CPU 103 further determines whether or not the high base is in the high open control accompanying the time reduction control in the probability variation state or the time reduction state (step S303). ). When it is determined that the base is high (step S303; Yes), or when it is determined that the jackpot is in the process of step S302 (step S402; Yes), the CPU 103 has a start port buffer value of "2". It is determined whether or not there is (step S304). When it is determined that the start port buffer value is not "2" (step S304; No), the CPU 103 makes a setting for limiting the determination at the time of winning (step S306).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the start port buffer value is "2" (step S304; Yes), or when it is determined that the high base is not in the process of step S303 (step S303; No), the CPU 103 is shown in FIG. From the 1st special figure display result determination table or the 2nd special figure display result determination table shown in 10 (A) and (B), the start port buffer value ("1" or "2") and the current gaming state are supported. The special figure display result determination table used for determining the special figure display result is selected (step S305).

Following the process of step S305, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range (step S307). The CPU 103 compares, for example, the individual determination values included in the jackpot determination range with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted by the process of step S209 shown in FIG. 11-1 one by one. It may be determined whether or not there is a determined value that matches the random number value MR1. Alternatively, a numerical value indicating a minimum value (lower limit value) and a maximum value (upper limit value) of the decision value included in the jackpot determination range is set, and the CPU 103 sets the random number MR1 and the minimum value or maximum value of the jackpot determination range. By comparing, it may be determined whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range. At this time, if it is determined that the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range, it is determined that the variable display result based on the reserved data including the random number value MR1 is determined as "big hit" (big hit start determination). it can.

In the process of step S307, for example, the CPU 103 may read the random number value MR1 stored in the special figure reservation storage unit in step S210, and perform the above determination using the read random number value MR1. Further, the CPU 103 holds the random number value MR1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (an area other than the special figure reservation storage unit) or a storage area of the CPU 103 separately from the step S210, and makes the above determination based on the held random number value. May be done. This also applies to the random number value MR3 described later. As described above, the random number value used in the winning random number value determination process does not have to be the random number value stored in the special figure holding storage unit.

When it is determined in the process of step S307 that the jackpot is within the jackpot determination range (step S307; Yes), the CPU 103 determines the jackpot type based on the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type (step S308). At this time, the CPU 103 responds to the fluctuation special figure (“first special figure” corresponding to “1” or “second special figure” corresponding to “2”) specified corresponding to the start port buffer value. , Select the jackpot type determination table data from the jackpot type determination table. The CPU 103 determines which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is determined by referring to the selected jackpot type determination table data.

Following the process of step S308, the CPU 103 selects a jackpot variation pattern determination table (see FIG. 11-5), which will be described later, prepared in advance by storing it in a predetermined area of the ROM 101, and sets it in the use table (step). S309). The jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table is a table for determining the variable display fluctuation pattern in which the variable display result is "big hit", and a determination value to be compared with the random number value MR3 is assigned to each fluctuation pattern.

In the fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 11-5, the determination ratio is described instead of the range of determination values. In the actual table, it is sufficient that the determination values in the range corresponding to the determination ratio of FIG. 11-5 are assigned to each fluctuation pattern. The determination ratio is a ratio in which the entire range (1 to 900) of the values that the random number value MR3 can take is set to 100. For example, as shown in FIG. 11-5 (A), when the jackpot type is probabilistic / non-probable, the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern PB1-1 is 5, the determination rate of the variation pattern PB1-2 is 25, and the variation pattern. Since the determination rate of PB1-3 is 70, the variation pattern PB1-1 is assigned a determination value 1 to 45 (range of 5%) to be compared with the random number value MR3, and the variation pattern PB1-2 is assigned a random number value. A decision value of 46 to 270 (range of 25%) to be compared with MR3 is assigned, and a decision value of 271 to 900 (range of 70%) to be compared with the random value MR3 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern PB1-3. The allocation of such a decision value is the same for other tables in which the decision ratio is described.

When it is determined in the process of step S307 that it is not within the jackpot determination range (step S307; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 is within the predetermined small hit determination range (step). S310). The CPU 103 executes the same processing as in the case of the big hit determination range for the determination value assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit" in the special figure display result determination table selected by the process of step S305. It suffices if it can be determined whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the small hit determination range.

When it is determined that the small hit is within the small hit determination range (step S310; Yes), the small hit fluctuation pattern determination table prepared by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 in advance (see FIG. 11-5 (B)). Is selected and set in the usage table (step S312). The small hit fluctuation pattern determination table is a table for determining the variable display fluctuation pattern in which the variable display result is "small hit", and a determination value to be compared with the random number value MR3 is assigned to each fluctuation pattern. ..

On the other hand, when it is determined that the table is not within the small hit determination range (step S310; No), a loss variation pattern determination table prepared by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 in advance (FIGS. 11-5 (C), (See (D)) is selected and set in the usage table (step S311). Specifically, when the current gaming state specified in step S301 is a non-time saving state (low base state) (when the time saving flag is off), the loss fluctuation pattern of FIG. 11-5 (C) is determined. When the table is set as the table to be used and the current gaming state specified in step S301 is the time saving state (high base state) (when the time saving flag is on), the loss variation in FIG. 11-5 (D) Set the pattern determination table to the used table. The loss variation pattern determination table is a table for determining the variation pattern of the variable display in which the variable display result becomes "loss", and a determination value to be compared with the random number value MR3 is assigned to each variation pattern.

After executing any of steps S309, S311, and S312, the CPU 103 determines the jackpot fluctuation pattern set in the use table based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern extracted in step S209. The variation pattern assigned to the determination value that matches the random number value MR3 is determined by referring to any one of the table, the small hit variation pattern determination table, and the loss variation pattern determination table (step S313). The CPU 103 determines the variation pattern by, for example, comparing the individual determination values assigned to each variation pattern with the random number value MR3 one by one to determine whether or not there is a determination value that matches the random number value MR3. Alternatively, the CPU 103 sets a numerical value indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and the maximum value (upper limit value) of the determination value assigned to each fluctuation pattern, and the CPU 103 sets the random value MR3 and the minimum value of the determination value. Or the fluctuation pattern may be determined by comparing with the maximum value.

After executing any of the processes of steps S306 and S313, the CPU 103 sets the transmission of the start winning command according to the determination results of steps S308 and S313 (step S314), and determines the random value at the time of winning. To finish. The start winning command is composed of a starting opening winning designation command, a special figure hold storage number designation command, a symbol judgment result designation command, and a variation pattern judgment result designation command. When the start opening buffer value is "1", the first start winning opening designation command, the first special figure hold storage number designation command, the symbol judgment result designation command, and the variation pattern judgment result designation are used as start winning commands. Set the command and send. When the start opening buffer value is "2", the second start winning opening designation command, the second special figure hold storage number designation command, the symbol judgment result designation command, and the variation pattern judgment result designation are used as start winning commands. Set the command and send. The command set for transmission is transmitted in the command control process.

The 1st special figure hold storage number specification command and the 2nd special figure hold storage number specification command to be set for transmission are commands for specifying the current 1st special figure hold storage number and 2nd special figure hold storage number (to the storage number). The command including the corresponding EXT data) may be specified, and the number of special figure reserved storage to be specified may be specified by the count value of the first special figure reserved storage number counter or the second special figure reserved storage number counter. When the determination result in step S307 is within the jackpot determination range (step S307; Yes), the symbol specification command to be set for transmission is a command that specifies that the determination result of the variable display result is "big hit" (in "big hit"). A command that includes the corresponding EXT data), and when the determination result in step S307 is within the small hit determination range (step S310; Yes), a command that specifies that the determination result of the variable display result is "small hit" ("small hit"). A command that includes EXT data corresponding to "small hit"), and when the judgment result in step S310 is not within the small hit determination range (step S310; No), a command that specifies that the judgment result of the variable display result is "missing". (A command including EXT data corresponding to "loss"), and when the determination result in step S303 is the start port buffer value = 1 (step S304; No), the determination at the time of starting winning is not performed "No determination". It may be a command that specifies that (a command that includes EXT data corresponding to "no judgment"). The variation pattern determination result specification command to be set for transmission is a command for specifying the variation pattern that is the determination result when the variation pattern is determined in step S313 (a command that includes EXT data corresponding to the variation pattern that is the determination result). When the determination result in step S304 is the start port buffer value = 1 (step S304; No), the command (EXT corresponding to "no determination") that specifies that the determination at the time of starting winning is not performed is "no determination". It can be a command that includes data).

In the winning random number value determination process, as described above, regarding the variable display corresponding to the random number values MR1 to 3 extracted in step S209 this time, the variable display result of the variable display (special figure game) is "big hit" or "small". Whether or not it becomes a "hit" and the fluctuation pattern of the variable display (see FIG. 11-5) are determined, and so-called look-ahead is performed. In this process, the determination is made based on the current gaming state, and the determination is not made based on the gaming state when the variable display is actually executed. Therefore, the determination is not always accurate, but to some extent. Variable display results and fluctuation patterns can be predicted with accuracy. Further, in the winning random number value determination process, the start is started by the process of step S304 based on the case where it is determined that the big hit is being made in the process of step S302 or the time reduction control is being performed in the process of step S303. It is determined whether or not the mouth buffer value is "2". At this time, if the start port buffer value is "1" and not "2", the process proceeds to step S314 without executing the process such as step S305, and the determination at the time of starting winning is not performed. In this way, when the high opening control accompanying the time saving control is performed or when the big hit game state is performed, each of the above is based on the occurrence of the start prize (first start prize) due to the game ball entering the first start prize opening. Limit the judgment so that it is not made. As a result, when the special figure game using the second special figure is executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure, and when the time reduction control is in progress or the jackpot game state is in effect, the first start prize is won. It is possible to ensure the soundness of the game by limiting the pre-reading based on the above.

FIG. 11-3 is a flowchart showing an example of the fluctuation pattern setting process executed in step S111 shown in FIG. When the variation pattern setting process is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag is on (step S261). When it is determined that the jackpot flag is on (step S261; Yes), the CPU 103 determines the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the jackpot when the special figure display result is "big hit" (step S262). When it is determined in the process of step S261 that the big hit flag is in the off state (step S261; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the small hit flag is in the on state (step S263). When it is determined that the small hit flag is on (step S263; Yes), the CPU 103 determines the variation pattern corresponding to the small hit when the special figure display result is "small hit" (step S264). On the other hand, when it is determined that the small hit flag is in the off state (step S263; No), the CPU 103 determines the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the loss when the special figure display result is "loss" according to the number of reserved storages. (Step S265).

FIG. 11-4 shows a specific example of the fluctuation pattern in this embodiment.

The variation pattern PA1-1 is selected when the variable display result is "missing", specifies non-reach (the variable display mode does not become the reach mode), and has a normal special figure variation time. It is a non-reach variation pattern of length. The fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern selected when the number of reserved storages is less than 2.

The fluctuation pattern PA1-2 is selected when the variable display result is "missing", specifies non-reach (the variable display mode does not become the reach mode), and the special figure fluctuation time is longer than usual. Is also a short (shortening variation) non-reach variation pattern. The fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern selected when the number of reserved storages is 2 or more.

The variation pattern PA2-1 is selected when the variable display result is “missing”, and is a reach variation pattern that specifies the execution of normal reach. The variation pattern PA2-2 is selected when the variable display result is “missing”, and is a reach variation pattern that specifies the execution of the super reach A. The variation pattern PA2-3 is selected when the variable display result is “missing”, and is a reach variation pattern that specifies the execution of the super reach B.

The variation pattern PB1-1 is selected when the variable display result is “big hit”, and is a reach variation pattern that specifies execution of normal reach. The variation pattern PB1-2 is selected when the variable display result is "big hit", and is a reach variation pattern that specifies the execution of super reach A. The variation pattern PB1-3 is selected when the variable display result is "big hit", and is a reach variation pattern that specifies the execution of the super reach B.

The variable pattern PC1-1 is selected when the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability", and when the variable display result is "small hit", and specifies non-reach. It is a non-reach fluctuation pattern. The variable pattern PC1-2 is selected when the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "sudden probability", and when the variable display result is "small hit", and is exclusively for sudden / small hit. A reach variation pattern that specifies the execution of reach. Here, the reach for exclusive use of the sudden / small hit is a reach that can be selected and determined only when the variable display result is the sudden big hit or the small hit. The decorative symbol for the sudden jackpot is a symbol in which the combination of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols is stopped and displayed at "3", "5", and "7". The decorative symbol for small hits is a symbol in which the combination of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols is stopped and displayed at "2", "4", and "6".

In the process of step S262 shown in FIG. 11-3, for example, the fluctuation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 11-5 (A) stored in advance in a predetermined area of ROM 101. Will be done. As an example, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern may be assigned to the determination result of the fluctuation pattern. The CPU 103 refers to the jackpot variation pattern determination table based on the numerical data indicating the variation pattern determination random number value MR3 read from the variation random number buffer, and thereby assigns the variation assigned to the determination value matching the random number value MR3. The pattern may be determined (selected) as the current fluctuation pattern. In FIG. 11-5 (A), the determination ratio is shown instead of the determination value.

In the process of step S264 shown in FIG. 11-3, for example, the fluctuation pattern at the time of small hit is used in the small hit fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 11-5 (B) stored in advance in the predetermined area of the ROM 101. Is determined. As an example, in the small hit variation pattern determination table, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern may be assigned to the determination result of the variation pattern. The CPU 103 is assigned to a determined value that matches the random number value MR3 by referring to the small hit variation pattern determination table based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern read from the random number buffer for variation. The fluctuation pattern may be determined (selected) as the current fluctuation pattern. In addition, in FIG. 11-5 (B), the determination ratio is shown instead of the determination value.

In the process of step S265 shown in FIG. 11-3, for example, the loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 11-5 (C) and 11-5 (D), which is stored in advance in the predetermined area of the ROM 101, is used at the time of loss. The fluctuation pattern is determined. When the gaming state is the non-time saving state (time saving flag is off), the CPU 103 refers to the loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 11-5 (C). When the game state is the time saving state (time saving flag is on), the CPU 103 refers to the loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 11-5 (D). As an example, in each loss fluctuation pattern determination table, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern may be assigned to the determination result of the fluctuation pattern. The CPU 103 refers to the loss variation pattern determination table based on the numerical data indicating the variation pattern determination random number value MR3 read from the variation random number buffer, and thereby assigns the variation assigned to the determination value matching the random number value MR3. The pattern may be determined (selected) as the current fluctuation pattern. In FIGS. 11-5 (C) and 11-5 (D), the determination ratio is shown instead of the determination value.

As shown in FIG. 11-5, at the time of big hit (probability change / non-probability change), the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern PB1-3 that executes the super reach B is the highest, and the fluctuation pattern PB1-2 and the normal reach of the super reach A are the highest. The determination rate gradually decreases in the order of the fluctuation pattern PB1-1. At the time of loss, the determination rate of the non-reach variation pattern PA1-1 (including PA1-2) is the highest, and the normal reach variation pattern PA2-1, the super reach A variation pattern PA2-2, and the super reach B are determined. The determination rate gradually decreases in the order of the fluctuation pattern PA2-3. From this, when Super Reach B is executed, the variable display result becomes a "big hit" at the highest rate. Then, in the order of Super Reach A and Normal Reach, the rate at which the variable display result becomes a "big hit" (so-called big hit expectation) decreases. That is, the variable display in which the reach effect of the super reach is performed has a higher ratio of the variable display result being a "big hit" than the variable display in which the reach effect is not performed. In other words, the longer the variable display period (variable display time), the higher the proportion of the variable display result being a "big hit".

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-5, at the time of big hit (sudden probability), the determination ratio of the variation pattern PC1-2 of the collision / small hit reach is higher than the determination ratio of the non-reach variation pattern PC1-1. On the other hand, at the time of small hit, the determination ratio of the non-reach fluctuation pattern PC1-1 is higher than the determination ratio of the sudden / small hit reach fluctuation pattern PC1-2. From this, when the variation pattern PC1-2 of the sudden / small hit reach is executed, the variable display result tends to be “big hit (abrupt probability)”, and when the non-reach variation pattern PC1-1 is executed, The variable display result tends to be a "small hit".

After executing any of the processes of steps S262, S264, and S265 of FIG. 11-3, the CPU 103 sets the special figure fluctuation time (also referred to as fluctuation time), which is the variable display time of the special symbol (step S266). The special symbol fluctuation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the time required from the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol in the special symbol game until the definite special symbol, which is the variable display result (special symbol display result), is derived and displayed. Is. As shown in FIG. 12, the special figure fluctuation time is predetermined in accordance with a plurality of fluctuation patterns prepared in advance. The CPU 103 can set the timing at which the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is derived by setting the special symbol variation time corresponding to the variation pattern selected in each of the processes of steps S262, S264, and S265. The special figure fluctuation time is set, for example, by setting a timer value according to the special figure fluctuation time in a game control process timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102.

Following the process of step S266, the start of the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A and the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. A setting for starting the fluctuation of the special symbol is made so as to start any of the special symbol games for which the conditions are satisfied (step S267). As an example, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", a setting is made to transmit a drive signal for updating the display of the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. On the other hand, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", a setting is made to transmit a drive signal for updating the display of the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. As a result, the special figure game is started. When the CPU 103 starts the variable display using the first special figure, the CPU 103 controls the first hold display 25A to display a display capable of specifying the subtracted 1st special figure hold storage number. The hold indicator 25A may be made to perform (for example, reduce the number of LEDs lit by one). When the CPU 103 starts the variable display using the second special figure, the CPU 103 controls the second hold display 25B to display a display capable of specifying the subtracted second special figure hold storage number. The hold indicator 25B may be made to perform (for example, reduce the number of LEDs lit by one).

After executing the process of step S267, the CPU 103 issues a command at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol (command at the start of fluctuation) in order to notify the effect control board 12 of the special symbol display result, the determination result of the fluctuation pattern, and the like. Transmission settings are made (step S268). For example, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103 sends the first fluctuation start designation command and the fluctuation pattern designation command as the fluctuation start command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 ( A command including EXT data indicating the fluctuation pattern determined in steps S262, S264, or S265), a display result specification command (a command including EXT data indicating the determined variable display result), and a first special figure hold storage number specification command (command containing EXT data indicating the determined variable display result). The 1-decreased 1st special figure reserved memory count value, that is, the command including the EXT data indicating the 1st special figure reserved memory when one reserved memory is exhausted by the start of execution of the special figure game) is sequentially transmitted. Set the transmission settings for this. On the other hand, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 sends the second fluctuation start designation command and the fluctuation pattern designation command as the fluctuation start command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 ( A command including EXT data indicating the fluctuation pattern determined in steps S262, S264 or S265), a display result specification command (a command including EXT data indicating the determined variable display result), and a second special figure hold storage number specification command (1). The decremented second special figure reserved memory count value, that is, a command including EXT data indicating the second special figure reserved memory when one reserved memory is exhausted by the start of execution of the special figure game) is sequentially transmitted. Set the transmission settings for.

After executing the process of step S268, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to "2" (step S267), and then ends the variation pattern setting process. By updating the value of the special figure process flag to "2" in step S267, when the next timer interrupt occurs, the special symbol variation process of step S112 shown in FIG. 5 is executed.

Next, the processing of the feature unit 074AK on the effect control board 12 in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 11-6 is a flowchart showing an example of command analysis processing. In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 receives a start winning command (start winning opening designation command, special figure hold storage number designation command, symbol judgment result designation command, variation pattern judgment result designation command) from the main board 11. It is determined whether or not it was present (step S401).

When it is determined that the start winning command has been received (step S401; Yes), the received command is stored in the starting winning command buffer (step S402). When the 1st start winning opening designation command or the 1st special figure hold storage number designation command is received as the start winning command, the start winning command (1st start winning opening designation command, 1st special figure hold storage number designation command) , The symbol determination result specification command, the variation pattern determination result specification command) are stored in the first start winning command buffer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122. When a second start winning opening designation command or a second special figure hold storage number designation command is received as a start winning command, a start winning command (second start winning opening designation command, second special figure hold storage number designation command) , The symbol determination result specification command, the variation pattern determination result specification command) are stored in the second start winning command buffer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122.

FIG. 11-7 (A) is a configuration example of the command buffer at the time of winning the first start. In the first start winning command buffer, various command data constituting the starting winning command received at the time of the first starting winning is stored. The command buffer at the time of winning the first start corresponds to each of the storage areas (hold display numbers 1 to 4) capable of storing various data corresponding to the maximum value (for example, 4) of the number of hold storages in the first special figure. Area to be used) is provided. As shown in the figure, the command buffer at the time of the first start winning in the feature unit 074AK in this embodiment has an area in which various command data corresponding to the variable display during execution are stored as the hold display number “0”. Is provided (the same applies to the command buffer at the time of winning the second start).

When there is a start prize to the 1st start winning opening, 4 commands, 1st starting winning opening designation command, 1st special figure hold memory designation command, symbol judgment result designation command, and variation pattern judgment result designation command, are 1 The set effect control command (command at the time of starting winning) is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In the command buffer at the time of the first start winning, in addition to these first start winning opening designation command, first special figure hold memory designation command, symbol judgment result designation command, variation pattern judgment result designation command, and other information are held. A storage area is secured so that it can be stored in association with the stored information.

The effect control CPU 120 stores the data for specifying the start winning command from the beginning of the free area of the first start winning command buffer according to the reception order. The free area of the command buffer at the time of winning the first start, that is, the data in the area where the data is not stored is "0000 (H)". Therefore, when the start winning command is received, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the minimum hold display number in which the storage area of the start winning command is "0000 (H)" in the first start winning command buffer. Each effect control command data is stored in the storage area in the order of the first start winning opening designation command, the first special figure hold storage designation command, the symbol judgment result designation command, and the variation pattern judgment result designation command.

Further, the command buffer at the time of the first start winning is provided with a storage area for storing other information corresponding to each of the hold display numbers, and a storage area for storing the display mode change pattern described later. .. The display mode change pattern is a type showing a change (transition) pattern of the display mode of the hold display. The display mode change patterns corresponding to the hold display numbers "0" to "4" in the example shown in FIG. 11-7 (A) include "PT4-4-22", "PT3-2-04", and "0", respectively. , "0", "0" are stored. As will be described later, "PT4-4-22" and "PT3-2-04" are display mode change patterns determined when the number of reserved memories (number of reserved items) is "4" and "3", respectively. There are a pattern in which the display mode changes twice and a pattern in which the display mode changes once. When the display mode change pattern is "0", the display mode change pattern is not set and the hold notice effect is not executed. Therefore, the display mode (display color) of the hold display and the active display is the normal mode. It remains "white" and does not change (in the example shown, the hold is not remembered in the first place). Although not shown, the command buffer at the time of winning the first start shown in FIG. 11-7 (A) contains information (stage) indicating which stage of the display mode change pattern is the hold display. An area (stage number storage area) for storing the number) is also provided (the same applies to the second start winning command buffer shown in FIG. 11-7 (B)).

Further, FIG. 11-7 (B) is a configuration example of the command buffer at the time of winning the second start. In the second start winning command buffer, various command data constituting the start winning received command received at the time of the second starting winning is stored. The command buffer at the time of winning the second start corresponds to each of the storage areas (hold display numbers 1 to 4) capable of storing various data corresponding to the maximum value (for example, 4) of the second special figure hold storage number. Area to be used) is provided. Similar to the command buffer at the time of the first start winning, the command buffer at the time of the second start winning in the feature unit 074AK in this embodiment has a hold display number “0” as shown in the variable display during execution. An area is provided for storing various corresponding command data.

When there is a start prize to the 2nd start winning opening, 4 commands: 2nd starting winning opening designation command, 2nd special figure hold memory designation command, symbol judgment result designation command, and variation pattern judgment result designation command are 1 The set effect control command (command at the time of starting winning) is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In the command buffer at the time of the second start winning, in addition to these second start winning opening designation command, second special figure hold memory designation command, symbol judgment result designation command, variation pattern judgment result designation command, and other information are held. A storage area is secured so that it can be stored in association with the stored information.

The effect control CPU 120 stores the data for specifying the start winning command from the beginning of the free area of the second start winning command buffer according to the reception order. The free area of the command buffer at the time of winning the second start, that is, the data in the area where the data is not stored is "0000 (H)". Therefore, when the start winning command is received, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the minimum hold display number in which the storage area of the start winning command is "0000 (H)" in the second start winning command buffer. Each effect control command data is stored in the storage area in the order of the second start winning opening designation command, the first special figure hold storage designation command, the symbol judgment result designation command, and the variation pattern judgment result designation command.

Further, in the second start winning command buffer, similarly to the first starting winning command buffer, a storage area for storing other information corresponding to each of the hold display numbers is provided, and a display stage change pattern described later is provided. A storage area for storing is provided. In the example shown in FIG. 11-7 (B), an example is shown in which the effect control command data is not stored in any of the storage areas of the hold display numbers “0” to “4”.

Returning to the description of the flowchart of the command analysis process shown in FIG. 11-6, after executing step S402, or when it is determined that the command at the time of starting winning is not received (step S401; No), the effect control CPU 120 , It is determined whether or not the game state designation command has been received (step S403). When it is determined that the game state designation command has been received (step S403; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 switches the on / off state of the high accuracy flag and the high base flag based on the content of the received game state designation command. (Step S404).

The high-probability flag is provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (for example, the effect control flag setting unit) and is turned on in response to the probable change state, and is a probabilistic flag on the main board 11 side. The on / off state is switched according to the switching of the on state / off state. The high base flag is provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (for example, the effect control flag setting unit) and is turned on in response to the time saving state, and is a time saving flag on the main board 11 side. The on / off state is switched according to the switching of the on state / off state. For example, when the game state specification command specifies the high accuracy high base state (for example, when the probability variation flag and the time saving flag are specified to be on), the effect control CPU 120 has a high accuracy flag and a high accuracy flag. Turn both base flags on (if they are already on, keep them on. The same applies to the on / off states for both flags). When the game state specification command specifies the high probability low base state (for example, when the probability variation flag is on and the time saving flag is off), the high probability flag is turned on and the high base is set. Turn off the flag. When the game state specification command specifies the low probability low base state (normal state) (for example, when the probability variation flag and the time saving flag are specified to be off), both the high probability flag and the high base flag are used. Turn it off.

After executing step S404, or when it is determined that the start winning command has not been received (step S403; No), the effect control CPU 120 executes other analysis processing (step S405), and the command analysis processing To finish.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 11-8, a process executed in response to the reception of each effect control command in the command analysis process will be described. The content shown in the item of "process content" shown in FIG. 11-8 is, for example, the process executed in step S405. Further, the step number shown in the item of "process content" indicates the step number in the flowchart shown in FIG. 11-6, and means that the corresponding step process is executed. Further, each reception flag and each storage area shown in the item of "processing content" are provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. Also, setting the receive flag means turning it on.

For example, when the received effect control command is a variation pattern designation command, the effect control CPU 120 stores the received variation pattern command in the variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM 122. Then, the effect control CPU 120 sets the variation pattern command reception flag.

Further, for example, when the received effect control command is a display result specification command, the effect control CPU 120 stores the received display result specification command in the display result specification command storage area formed in the RAM 122.

FIG. 11-9 is a flowchart showing an example of the lookahead advance notice setting process in step S161 shown in FIG. 7. When the look-ahead advance notice setting process shown in FIG. 11-9 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a start winning command has been received (step 074AKS001). When it is determined that the start winning command has been received (step 074AKS001; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines that the received starting winning command is the first hold storage number addition designation command received in the low base state, or the high. It is determined whether or not the command is one of the second hold storage number addition designation commands received in the base state (step 074AKS002). In this embodiment, by executing the process of step 074AKS002, the hold notice effect (change effect) can be executed when the hold memory increases based on the winning of the first start winning opening in the low base state. , In the high base state, the hold notice effect (change effect) can be executed when the hold memory increases based on the winning of the second start winning opening.

When it is determined that either the first start winning opening designation command received in the low base state or the second starting winning opening designation command received in the high base state (step 074AKS002; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 Determines the display mode of the active display as the final display mode of the pending display to be displayed (step 074AKS003). The effect control CPU 120 is first reserved with reference to the active display mode determination table shown in FIG. 11-10, which is stored in advance in a predetermined area of the ROM 121, for example, according to the variable display result and the variation pattern of the variable display. The display mode of the active display as the final change destination of the display or the hold display displayed as the second hold display (how many steps to change when the change effect is executed) is determined. The effect control CPU 120 may acquire the variable display result and the variation pattern of the variable display by referring to the symbol determination result designation command and the variation pattern determination result specification command included in the start winning command.

Next, the determination of the display mode of the active display will be described. In this embodiment, a change effect is executed in which the display mode (including at least color) of the hold display corresponding to the variable display that has not been started and the active display corresponding to the variable display being executed is changed stepwise. .. The active display mode determination table shown in FIG. 11-10 is a table for predetermining the display mode (also referred to as “final display mode”) of the active display, which is the final stage of the change (transition) of the display mode. As shown in FIG. 11-10, the active display mode determination table is used to determine which of stages 1 to 4 the final display mode should be for each variable display result (including jackpot type and variation pattern). The decision rate of is assigned. More specifically, the variable display results are classified into "big hit (probability / non-probability)", "big hit (probability)", "loss (super reach) / small hit", and "other than the above". Different decision ratios are assigned to "white", "blue", "green", and "red" prepared as display colors of the active display. In this embodiment, active display is performed in colors such as white in stage 1, blue in stage 2, green in stage 3, and red in stage 4.

As shown in FIG. 11-10, when the variable display result is a "big hit (probability / non-probability change)" in which a 16-round game is executed, the active display mode (display color), which is the final display mode, is set. The decision rate of "green" which is "stage 3" is the highest, and the decision rate is lower in the order of "blue" of "stage 2", "white" of "stage 1", and "red" of "stage 4". Is set to. On the other hand, when the variable display result is "big hit (probability)" in which the two-round game is executed, the determination ratio of "green", which is "stage 3", is the highest as the active display mode (display color). Next, the determination ratio of "blue" in "stage 2" is high, and the determination ratio of "red" in "stage 4" and "white" in "stage 1" is set to be the lowest. Further, when the variable display result is "loss (super reach)" or "small hit" including the super reach effect in the fluctuation pattern, the active display mode (display color) is "stage 2", "blue". The decision rate is the highest, and the decision rate is set so that "white" in "stage 1" and "green" in "stage 3" have the same ratio, followed by "red" in "stage 4". There is. If the variable display result does not correspond to any of the above-mentioned "big hit (probability / non-probability)", "big hit (probability)", "loss (super reach)", and "small hit", the active display mode (active display mode) The determination ratio is set only for "white" for the display color). Further, when the variable display result is "missing", the active display mode (display color) is set so as not to be determined to be "red".

With such a setting, if the active display (including the case where it changes at the hold display stage) changes up to the "red" stage of "stage 4", the variable display result will always be a "big hit". It can be notified. In addition, when the active display changes to the "green" stage of "stage 3", it can be suggested that the variable display result is likely to be "big hit" (probability change / non-probability change / sudden change). .. In addition, if it remains "white" in "stage 1", there is a high possibility that the variable display result will be "missing" or "small hit", and when the hold notice effect is executed (that is,). It can be suggested that when the display mode of the hold display is changed), it is more likely to be controlled in a state advantageous to the player than when it is not executed.

In the change effect (hold notice effect), the display mode of "red" in "stage 4" in which the variable display result is always "big hit" is also called the big hit confirmation stage. The display mode of "red" in "stage 4" is the jackpot confirmation stage, and as shown in FIG. 11-10, 10% when the variable display result is "big hit (probability change / non-probability change)". Only selected, so the rarity value is high. In the illustrated example, the display mode of "red" in "stage 4" is shown as the big hit confirmation stage, but it is also determined when the variable display result is "miss" or "small hit", for example. (That is, the jackpot does not have to be confirmed). In this case, if the display mode of "red" in "stage 4" is determined, the possibility of becoming a "big hit" increases (the higher the number of stages, the higher the possibility of becoming a "big hit". To) The decision ratio may be set.

Returning to FIG. 11-9, after determining the display mode of the active display by the process of step 074AKS003, the effect control CPU 120 determines the display mode of the active display determined in step 074AKS003, the first special figure reserved memory number designation command, and the first 2 The display mode change pattern is determined according to the number of reserved memories indicated by any of the special figure reserved memory number designation commands, and the first reserved display or the second reserved display is displayed (step 074AKS004). As for the number of reserved storages, the first special figure holding storage number designation command is received when the first start winning opening designation command is received, and the second special figure is obtained when the second starting winning opening designation command is received. It may be specified by referring to the hold storage number specification command. In the process of step 074AKS004, the display mode change pattern in the first hold display or the second hold display is determined with reference to the display mode change pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 11-11 to 11-15. The display mode change pattern indicates a change pattern such as which stage (which display color) is to be transitioned after the number of shifts of the hold display before the active display, which is the final stage, is displayed. The display mode change pattern determined in step 074AKS004 is stored in the display mode change pattern in the first start winning command buffer shown in FIG. 11-7 or in the second start winning command buffer shown in FIG. 11-7. Stored in the area.

As described above, the display mode change pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 11-11 to 11-15 determines a display mode change pattern indicating a change in the display mode of the hold display and the active display, which is the target of the notice of the hold notice effect. It is a table referenced to do. The display mode change pattern determination table is classified according to the number of holds (hold display number of the hold storage which is the notice target of the hold notice effect) and the active display mode (final display mode). Specifically, the number of holds of "4" to "2" is different, and the active display of "white", "blue", "green", and "red" such as "stage 1" to "stage 4" is displayed. The display mode change pattern determination table is divided according to the display color. In addition, in each display mode change pattern determination table classified by the number of holds and the active display mode, "big hit (16R)" ("big hit (probability change / non-probability change)"), "big hit (probability change)", "loss (super)" Different determination ratios are assigned to the display mode change patterns set according to the active display mode (final display mode) for each variable display result such as "reach)" and "small hit".

The hold display is displayed in any of "white", "blue", "green", and "red" such as "stage 1" to "stage 4" at the start of the hold display accompanying the start winning. In addition, the hold display is shifted and displayed as the hold memory is exhausted, and at the timing when the change effect (hold notice effect) is executed, while a new variable display is being executed (including the variable display corresponding to the active display). , Can be changed to different display colors (stages), "stage 1" "white" → "stage 2" "blue" → "stage 3" "green" → "stage 4" "stage 4" It changes step by step in the order of "red". In addition, the active display may be displayed at a different stage from the hold display corresponding to the hold display number "1". In addition, when changing the stage, only the change to the upper stage is allowed (it does not change from the upper stage to the lower stage), for example, "white" in "stage 1" → "green" in "stage 3". It may be omitted in the middle and changed to a higher stage.

11-11 (A) to 11-12 (D) show when the number of reserved memories (number of pending) is "4" (when the reserved memory to be notified of the pending notice effect is the reserved display number "4"). It is a display mode change pattern determination table referred to in the above, and a display mode change pattern indicating a change in the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the hold display numbers "4" to "1" and the active display corresponding to "0" is set. Has been done.

FIG. 11-11 (A) is a display mode change pattern determination table referred to when the active display mode (final display mode) is “white” in “step 1”. As shown in FIG. 11-11 (A), when the final display mode is "white" in "stage 1", it corresponds to the hold display corresponding to the hold display numbers "4" to "1" and "0". Only the display mode change pattern PT4-1-01 (display mode change count "0") that does not change while the display color of the active display remains "white" in "stage 1" is set, and the determination ratio assigned to each variable display result. Is 100% uniformly.

FIG. 11-11 (B) is a display mode change pattern determination table referred to when the active display mode (final display mode) is “blue” in “step 2”. As shown in FIG. 11-11 (B), as the display mode change pattern, the display colors of the hold display corresponding to the hold display numbers "4" to "1" and the active display corresponding to "0" are "stage 2". PT4-2-01 (display mode change count "0") that does not change as "blue" and "stage 1" in the hold display corresponding to the hold display number "4", and the hold display number "3" PT4-2-02-05 (Display mode change) in which the display color changes from "white" in "stage 1" to "blue" in "stage 2" in either the hold display or the active display corresponding to "0". The number of times "1") is set.

As shown in FIG. 11-11 (B), when the variable display result is "loss (super reach)" or "small hit", the display mode change pattern PT4-2-02 in which the number of changes in the display mode is "1". Of ~ 05, the determination ratio assigned to the display mode change pattern PT4-2-05 is the highest as compared with the case of other variable display results, and the determination ratio assigned to PT4-2-02 is the lowest. On the other hand, when the variable display result is "big hit (16R)", it is assigned to PT4-2-02 among the display mode change patterns PT4-2-02 to 05 in which the number of changes in the display mode is "1". The decision rate is the highest, and the decision rate assigned to PT4-2-05 is the lowest.

With such a setting, when the change effect is performed, the later the timing at which the display mode changes from "white" in "stage 1" to "blue" in "stage 2", the more the variable display becomes "big hit (16R)". It can be suggested that there is a high possibility of becoming. Apart from this, when the display mode change pattern PT4-2-01 that does not change while the hold display remains "stage 2" is executed, there is a high possibility that the variable display result will be "big hit (16R)". The determination ratio of the display mode change pattern determination table may be set as described above. According to this, since the hold display of "stage 2" is performed from the beginning of winning, the player can be given a sense of security. In addition, the display mode change pattern determination table is determined so that the earlier the timing at which the display mode of the hold display changes from "stage 1" to "stage 2" is, the higher the possibility that the variable display result will be "big hit (16R)". You may set the ratio. According to this, the player's attention to the hold display can be attracted.

FIG. 11-11 (C) is a display mode change pattern determination table referred to when the active display mode (final display mode) is “green” in “stage 3”. As shown in FIG. 11-11 (C), as the display mode change pattern, the display colors of the hold display corresponding to the hold display numbers "4" to "1" and the active display corresponding to "0" are "stage 3". PT4-3-01 (display mode change count "0") that does not change as "green" and "stage 1" in the hold display corresponding to the hold display number "4", and the hold display number "3" PT4-3-02-05 that changes from "white" in "stage 1" to "green" in "stage 3" in either the hold display or the active display corresponding to "0" (display mode change count "1" ”) And in the hold display corresponding to the hold display number“ 4 ”, which is“ blue ”in“ stage 2 ”and in either the hold display or the active display corresponding to the hold display numbers“ 3 ”to“ 0 ”. In PT4-3-06 to 09 (display mode change count "1") that changes from "blue" in "stage 2" to "green" in "stage 3", and in the hold display corresponding to the hold display number "4". It is "white" of "stage 1", and "white" of "stage 1" to "blue" of "stage 2" in either the hold display or the active display corresponding to the hold display numbers "3" to "0". , And PT4-3-10-14 (display mode change count "2") that changes from "blue" in "stage 2" to "green" in "stage 3" is set.

As shown in FIG. 11-11 (C), in the feature unit 074AK in this embodiment, the determination ratio is such that the higher the number of changes in the display mode, the higher the expectation that the variable display becomes a “big hit (16R)”. Is assigned. Further, the determination ratio is assigned so that the later the timing of changing to the "green" display mode of "stage 3", the higher the expectation that the variable display will be "big hit (16R)".

With such a setting, when the change effect is performed, the later the timing at which the display mode changes to "green" in "stage 3" and the larger the number of changes, the more the variable display becomes "big hit (16R)". It can be suggested that it is likely. Apart from this, when the display mode change pattern PT4-3-01 that does not change while the hold display remains "stage 3" is executed, there is a high possibility that the variable display result will be "big hit (16R)". The determination ratio of the display mode change pattern determination table may be set as described above. According to this, since the hold display of "stage 3" is performed from the beginning of winning, the player can be given a sense of security. In addition, the determination ratio of the display mode change pattern determination table is set so that the earlier the timing at which the display mode of the hold display changes to "stage 3" is, the higher the possibility that the variable display result will be "big hit (16R)". May be good. According to this, the player's attention to the hold display can be attracted. In addition, the display mode change pattern is determined so that the variable display result is more likely to be "big hit (16R)" as the pattern changes from "white" in "stage 1" to "green" in "stage 3" at once in multiple stages. You may set the determination ratio of the table. According to this, it is possible to exert the effect of being upgraded in a plurality of stages (impact on the player), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

FIG. 11-12 (D) is a display mode change pattern determination table referred to when the active display mode (final display mode) is “red” in “step 4”. As shown in FIG. 11-12 (D), as the display mode change pattern, the display colors of the hold display corresponding to the hold display numbers "4" to "1" and the active display corresponding to "0" are "stage 4". PT4-4-01 (display mode change count "0") that does not change as "red" in the above, and "white" in "stage 1" in the hold display corresponding to the hold display number "4", and the hold display PT4-4-02-05 (display mode) that changes from "white" in "stage 1" to "red" in "stage 4" in either the hold display or the active display corresponding to the numbers "3" to "0". The number of changes "1") and the hold display corresponding to the hold display number "4" are "blue" in "stage 2", and the hold display or active display corresponding to the hold display numbers "3" to "0". Corresponds to PT4-4-06 to 09 (display mode change count "1") that changes from "blue" in "stage 2" to "red" in "stage 4" and the hold display number "4" in any of the above. "Green" of "Stage 3" in the hold display to be performed, and "Green" to "Stage 4" of "Stage 3" in either the hold display or the active display corresponding to the hold display numbers "3" to "0". PT4-4-10-13 (display stage change count "1") that changes to "red" in "" and "white" in "stage 1" in the hold display corresponding to the hold display number "4". In either the hold display or the active display corresponding to the hold display numbers "3" to "0", from "white" in "stage 1" to "blue" in "stage 2", and further from "blue" in "stage 2". PT4-4-14-19 (display stage change count "2") that changes to "red" in "stage 4" and "white" in "stage 1" in the hold display corresponding to the hold display number "4" Therefore, in either the hold display or the active display corresponding to the hold display numbers "3" to "0", "white" of "stage 1" to "green" of "stage 3", and further "stage 3" of "" PT4-4-20 to 25 (display mode change count "2") that changes from "green" to "red" in "stage 4" and "stage 1" "stage 1" in the hold display corresponding to the hold display number "4" It is "white", and in either the hold display or the active display corresponding to the hold display numbers "3" to "0", "white" of "stage 1" to "blue" of "stage 2", and further "stage 2". PT4-4-26-29 (display stage change count "3") that changes from "blue" in "stage 3" to "green" in "stage 3" and from "green" in "stage 3" to "red" in "stage 4" ") Is set.

As shown in FIG. 11-12 (D), in the feature unit 074AK in this embodiment, the determination ratio is such that the higher the number of changes in the display mode, the higher the expectation that the variable display becomes a “big hit (16R)”. Is assigned. Further, the determination ratio is assigned so that the later the timing of changing to the "red" display mode of "stage 4" is, the higher the expectation that the variable display will be "big hit (16R)". Further, when the variable display result is "loss (super reach)" or "small hit", the final display mode is not "stage 4", so that the display stage change patterns PT4-4-01 to 17 have a determination ratio. Not assigned.

With such a setting, when the change effect is performed, the later the timing at which the display mode changes to "red" in "stage 4" and the larger the number of changes, the more the variable display becomes "big hit (16R)". It can be suggested that it is likely. Apart from this, when the display mode change pattern PT4-4-01 that does not change while the hold display remains "stage 4" is executed, there is a high possibility that the variable display result will be "big hit (16R)". The determination ratio of the display mode change pattern determination table may be set as described above. According to this, since the hold display of "stage 4" is performed from the beginning of winning, the player can be given a sense of security. In addition, the determination ratio of the display mode change pattern determination table is set so that the earlier the timing at which the display mode of the hold display changes to "stage 4" is, the higher the possibility that the variable display result will be "big hit (16R)". May be good. According to this, the player's attention to the hold display can be attracted. In addition, the display mode change pattern is determined so that the variable display result is more likely to be a "big hit (16R)" as the pattern changes from "white" in "stage 1" to "red" in "stage 4" at once in multiple stages. You may set the determination ratio of the table. According to this, it is possible to exert the effect of being upgraded in a plurality of stages (impact on the player), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

11-13 (A) to 11-14 (D) are display stages referred to when the number of holds is "3" (when the hold memory of the notice target of the hold notice effect is the hold display number "3"). In the change pattern determination table, a display stage change pattern indicating a change in the display stage of the hold display corresponding to the hold display numbers “3” to “1” and the active display corresponding to “0” is set. Further, FIGS. 11-15 (A) to 11-15 (D) show a display stage change pattern referred to when the number of holds is "2" (when the hold memory of the notice target of the hold notice effect is the hold display number "2"). It is a determination table, and a display stage change pattern indicating a display stage of a hold display corresponding to the hold display numbers "2" to "1" and an active display corresponding to "0" is set. As with the display mode change pattern determination table in FIGS. 11-11 (A) to 11-12 (D), the later the timing at which the display mode changes to the final display mode and the greater the number of changes, the more these are changed. The decision ratio is assigned so that the variable display is more likely to be a "big hit (16R)".

Returning to the description of the pre-reading notice setting process shown in FIG. 11-9, after executing the process of step 074AKS004, the effect control CPU 120 sets the degree of expectation to be controlled to at least an advantageous state, such as a variable display compatible display, as a color type. By setting the image including the image notified by the above in a monochrome mode, a monochrome effect that makes it impossible for the player to see which kind of color is displayed (which expected display color). The monochrome effect setting process for execution is executed (step 074AKS005). In the feature unit 074AK of this embodiment, the processing of step 074AKS003 and step 074AKS004 is executed, and then the monochrome effect setting process is performed in step 074AKS005. However, the monochrome effect setting process is performed first to perform the monochrome effect. The display mode of the active display and the display mode change pattern may be determined depending on whether or not the above is executed.

FIG. 11-16 is a flowchart showing an example of the monochrome effect setting process executed in step 074AKS005 of FIG. 11-9. When the monochrome effect setting process shown in FIGS. 11-16 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the monochrome effect flag indicating that the monochrome effect is being executed is set to the ON state (step). 074AKS051). If the monochrome effect flag is on (step 074AKS051; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 ends the monochrome effect setting process as it is. The monochrome effect flag may be provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, for example.

When the monochrome effect flag is off (step 074AKS051; No), the effect control CPU 120 holds the display mode of the hold (including the active display) before the current hold, which is the target of the pre-reading notice. Is present or not, that is, whether or not the display mode of the hold or active display (display mode in front) existing in front is changed (step 074AKS051A). In step 074AKS051A, the contents of the command buffer at the time of starting winning may be confirmed and determined. Specifically, the display mode change pattern corresponding to the hold display number before the hold display number targeted this time is confirmed. Then, it may be determined whether or not the display mode in the foreground changes.

When the display mode in the foreground changes (step 074AKS051A; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 ends the monochrome effect setting process. In the feature unit 074AK, once the monochrome effect is executed, at least the monochrome effect is continued until the variable display corresponding to the target hold display is started. Therefore, the hold display existing before the target hold display And the change in the active display becomes impossible to see. Therefore, when the front display mode changes, the monochrome effect is not executed, and the change in the front display mode can be visually recognized.

When the display mode in front does not change (step 074AKS051A; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the number of times the display mode is changed is one or more, that is, whether or not to execute the change effect (step 074AKS052). ). Whether or not the number of display mode changes is one or more may be determined by checking the display mode change pattern determined in step 074AKS004 of FIG. 11-9. When the number of changes in the display mode is 0 (step 074AKS052; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the monochrome effect setting process.

When the number of times the display mode is changed is one or more (step 074AKS052; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the monochrome effect is executed according to the determination ratio shown in FIGS. 11-17 according to the variable display result (step 074AKS052; Yes). Step 074AKS053). As shown in FIG. 11-17, in the feature unit 074AK in this embodiment, the determination ratio is such that when the monochrome effect is executed, the expectation that the variable display result becomes a big hit is higher than when the monochrome effect is not executed. Is assigned. In addition, when the monochrome effect is executed, the determination ratio is assigned so as to be equal to or higher than the super reach (super reach loss, small hit, big hit). Not limited to this, even in the case of normal reach loss or non-reach loss, the monochrome effect may be executed at a lower rate than other variable display results. In the illustrated example, an example in which the determination ratio of whether or not the monochrome effect is executed is assigned according to the variable display result is shown. For example, depending on which display color the active display display mode is. The decision ratios may be different. For example, the determination ratio may be highest when the display mode of the active display is "red", and the determination ratio may be decreased in the order of "green"> "blue"> "white". According to this, it is possible to notify that the display mode of the active display finally changes to a display color having a high degree of expectation, and it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the change in the active display.

After returning to FIG. 11-16 and executing the process of step 074AKS053, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is determined to execute the monochrome effect, that is, whether or not the monochrome effect is executed (step 074AKS054). When the monochrome effect is not executed, that is, when the monochrome effect is not executed (step 074AKS054; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the monochrome effect setting process.

When the monochrome effect is executed (step 074AKS054; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets the end timing of the monochrome effect from "timing 1" to "timing" according to the determination ratio shown in FIG. 11-18 according to the variable display result. It is determined at any of the timings of "3" (step 074AKS055). "Timing 1" of the feature portion 074AK in this embodiment is the timing of the normal reach, that is, the timing immediately after the reach state is reached, and "timing 2" is the timing at the start of the reach production of the super reach, and "timing 3". Is the timing of the middle stage of the reach production of Super Reach. That is, the timing of "timing 1" is the earliest timing after the start of the variable display, then "timing 2" is the earliest, and "timing 3" is the latest timing. As shown in FIG. 11-18, in the feature unit 074AK in this embodiment, the expectation degree is “timing 3”> “timing 2”> “timing 1”, and the variable display is started and then ended. The determination ratio is set so that the longer the period (the later the end timing) (in other words, the longer the execution period of the monochrome effect), the higher the expectation that the variable display result will be a "big hit". Therefore, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the execution period of the monochrome effect. As shown in the figure, when the variable display result is "other than the above" which is neither "big hit (probability change / non-probability change)", "big hit (probability change)", or "loss (super reach) / small hit". , Since the monochrome effect is not executed, the decision ratio is not assigned.

After returning to FIG. 11-16 and executing the process of step 074AKS055, the effect control CPU 120 performs monochrome effect execution control to execute the monochrome effect (step 074AKS056). By performing the process of step 074AKS056, the execution of the monochrome effect (monochrome output process) is started. As a result, the target image in monochrome mode such as hold display, active display, background image, etc. is displayed in monochrome mode. In the feature unit 074AK in this embodiment, the hold display and the active display are displayed in "white" in the first stage (displayed in a display color displayed at a high rate before the change effect is executed). In step 074AKS056, the output sounds such as the sound effects and the effect sounds from the speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting the sound effects and the like in accordance with the execution of the monochrome effect are muted, and the game effect lamp for the game effect is muted. Control is performed to turn off 9. After executing the process of step 074AKS056, the effect control CPU 120 sets the monochrome effect flag to the ON state (step 074AKS057), and then ends the monochrome effect setting process. In step 074AKS056, for example, when the image to be monochrome is displayed in two colors of black and white by the monochrome effect, the lighting color of the game effect lamp 9 is also changed to two colors of black and white. The number of colors may correspond to the number of colors.

Returning to the description of the pre-reading notice setting process shown in FIG. 11-9, in the process of step 074AKS002, the first start winning slot designation command received in the low base state and the second starting winning slot designation received in the high base state. When it is determined that neither of the commands is used (step 074AKS002; No), the effect control CPU 120 displays the first hold display or the second hold display in the display mode of the first stage (white) (step 074AKS005A). ).

After executing any of the processes of step 074AKS005 and step 074AKS005A, or when it is determined in the process of step 074AKS001 that the start winning command has not been received (step 074AKS001; No), the effect control CPU 120 specifies the variable start. It is determined whether or not a command has been received (step 074AKS006). Whether or not the effect control CPU 120 has received the fluctuation start designation command by referring to whether or not either the first fluctuation start designation command reception flag or the second fluctuation start designation command reception flag is set, for example. It may be judged whether or not. When it is determined that the fluctuation start designation command has not been received (step 074AKS006; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the hold display setting process.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start designation command has been received (step 074AKS006; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the received fluctuation designation command is the second fluctuation start designation command (step 074AKS007). .. When it is determined that the received fluctuation start designation command is not the second fluctuation start designation command, that is, the received fluctuation start designation command is the first fluctuation start designation command (step 074AKS007; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines. Each first hold display was associated with each of the display stage variation patterns stored in the storage area of the display stage variation pattern in the command buffer at the time of the first start winning as shown in FIG. 11-7 (A). It is changed or maintained according to the display stage fluctuation pattern, and the hold display of the hold display number "1" is moved (shifted) to the active display area in the first hold display unit 5HL of the image display device 5, and "2". The display position of each first hold display corresponding to "4" is moved (shifted) to the right by one (step 074AKS008).

After executing the process of step 074AKS008, the effect control CPU 120 erases the stored contents of the hold display number "0" in the command buffer at the time of the first start winning, and corresponds to the hold display numbers "1" to "4". After shifting the stored contents one by one (step 074AKS009), the look-ahead notice setting process ends. Regarding the stored contents of the hold display number "0" in the command buffer at the time of the first start winning, after the final stop symbol is derived and displayed in the variable display effect processing in step S172, that is, the variable display result is derived and displayed. You may erase it afterwards.

In the process of step 074AKS007, when it is determined that the received variation designation command is the second variation start designation command (step 074AKS007; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 receives the second start winning prize as shown in FIG. 11-7 (B). With reference to the display stage variation pattern stored in the storage area of the display stage variation pattern in the hour command buffer, each second hold display is changed or maintained according to the display stage variation pattern associated with the display device. In the second hold display unit 5HR of 5, the hold display of the hold display number “1” is moved (shifted) to the active display area, and each second hold display corresponding to “2” to “4” is displayed. The display position of is moved (shifted) to the left one by one (step 074AKS010).

After executing the process of step 074AKS010, the effect control CPU 120 erases the stored contents of the hold display number "0" in the command buffer at the time of the second start winning, and corresponds to the hold display numbers "1" to "4". After shifting the stored contents one by one (step 074AKS011), the look-ahead notice setting process ends. Regarding the stored contents of the hold display number "0" in the command buffer at the time of the second start winning, after the final stop symbol is derived and displayed in the variable display effect processing in step S172, that is, the variable display result is derived and displayed. You may erase it afterwards.

FIG. 11-19 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start setting process executed in step S171 of FIG. 7. When the variable display start setting process is started, the effect control CPU 120 first features, for example, based on a display result specification command (command stored in the display result specification command storage area) transmitted from the main board 11. It is determined whether or not the figure display result is "missing" (step S551). When it is determined that the special figure display result is "missing" (step S551; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 is stored in, for example, the variation pattern specification command (variation pattern specification command storage area) transmitted from the main board 11. The variation pattern specified by the command) is a non-reach variation pattern (PA1-1, PA1-2, PC1-1) corresponding to the case of "non-reach" in which the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode. Whether or not it is determined (step S552).

When it is determined in the process of step S552 that the pattern is a non-reach variation pattern (step S552; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines a combination of fixed decorative symbols to be the final stop symbol constituting the non-reach combination (step S553). ). The effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a decorative symbol of a non-reach combination updated by, for example, an effect random counter provided in a predetermined area of the random number circuit 124 or the RAM 122, and outputs the ROM 121. The fixed decorative symbol (decorative symbol of the non-reach combination) is determined by referring to the decorative symbol determination table of the non-reach combination prepared in advance.

When it is determined in the process of step S552 that the pattern is not a non-reach variation pattern (step S552; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines a combination of fixed decorative symbols to be the final stop symbol constituting the reach combination (step S554). ). The effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a decorative symbol of the reach combination updated by, for example, a random number circuit 124 or a random counter for effect, and stores the reach combination in advance in the ROM 121. The final decorative design (decorative design of the reach combination) is determined by referring to the decoration design determination table of.

When it is determined in the process of step S551 that the special figure display result is not "missing" (step S551; No), whether the special figure display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability" in the effect control CPU 120. , Or, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is a "small hit" (step S555). When it is determined that the special figure display result is "probability" or "small hit" (step S555; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 is in the case of "probability" or "small hit", for example, at the opening chance eye. A combination of fixed decorative symbols to be the final stop symbol corresponding to the case is determined (step S556). The effect control CPU 120 finally configures one of a plurality of types of open chance eyes in response to the designation of either the fluctuation pattern PC1-1 or PC1-2 by the fluctuation pattern designation command. Determine the combination of fixed decorative symbols that will be the stop symbols. In this case, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the chance eye, which is updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit, is extracted, and a predetermined chance eye determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like is used. By referring to or the like, the combination of the definite decorative symbols constituting any of the opening chance eyes may be determined. In the chance eye determination table, for example, "3", "5", "7" composed of odd numbers as chance eyes for sudden big hits, and "2", "2", "7" composed of even numbers as chance eyes for small hits. It suffices if "4", "6" and the like are set.

When it is determined in the process of step S555 that the special figure display result is neither "probability" nor "small hit" (step S555; No), the effect control CPU 120 is a final stop symbol that constitutes the big hit combination. The combination of symbols is determined (step S557). The effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a jackpot confirmed symbol, which is updated by, for example, a random number circuit 124 or a random number counter for effect. Subsequently, by referring to the jackpot confirmation symbol determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121 according to the jackpot type specified by the display result designation command transmitted from the main board 11, the image display device 5 A decorative symbol having the same stop-displayed symbol number is determined in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right" in the display area.

After executing any of the processes of steps S553, S554, S556, and S557, the effect control CPU 120 has a plurality of types of change effects having different periods from the start of the variable display to the change of the display mode of the hold display. Among them, the change effect setting process for setting which type of change effect is to be executed is executed (step 074AKS021).

FIG. 11-20 is a flowchart showing an example of the change effect setting process executed in step 074AKS021 of FIG. 11-19. When the change effect setting process is started, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the display mode of either the hold display or the active display changes in the variable display executed this time (step 074AKS022). In step 074AKS022, by referring to the display stage change pattern determined in step 074AKS004 of FIG. 11-9, in the variable display executed this time, at least one of the displayed hold displays is displayed as a hold display. It may be determined whether or not the display mode of the active display changes.

When the display mode of the hold display or the active display changes in the variable display to be executed this time (step 074AKS022; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 makes settings for executing the change effect of the success mode (step 074AKS023). , End the change effect setting process. On the other hand, when the display mode of the hold display or the active display does not change in the variable display to be executed this time (step 074AKS022; No), after making the setting for executing the change effect of the failure mode or the setting not to execute the change effect. (Step 074AKS024), the change effect setting process is completed. In step 074AKS024, whether or not to execute the change effect of the failure mode may be determined according to, for example, the variable display result or the variation pattern.

The effect of changing the success mode of the feature unit 074AK in this embodiment is an effect of changing the display mode when the shooting star image 074AK001 collides with the hold display or the active display of the change target. The change effect of the failure mode is an effect in which the shooting star image 074AK002 collides with the hold display or the active display of the change target, but does not change the display mode. Each of the change effects is an image of a shooting star, and it is impossible to recognize whether or not the display mode of the target changes until after the collision. In addition, at the time of monochrome production, since the hold display and active display of the change target are also displayed in monochrome, it becomes impossible to visually determine whether the executed change effect is a success mode or a failure mode. There is.

In the processing of step 074AKS023 and step 074AKS024, when the change effect is executed, the execution period (change effect period) of the change effect is also set. The change effect period may be any period as long as the variable display during execution is not performed during the reach effect of the super reach. This is to prevent the player's attention from being dispersed by the degree of expectation being dispersed between the reach effect being executed and the change effect.

In addition, when there are a plurality of change targets, it is sufficient to determine one of a success mode, a failure mode, and no change effect for each hold (including active display). Further, when determining the display mode change pattern, the pattern of the change effect may be determined from among a plurality of patterns for one display mode change pattern.

Returning to the description of the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 11-19, after executing the process of step 074AKS021, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect control pattern to one of a plurality of prepared patterns (step S560). ). The effect control CPU 120 selects and uses one of a plurality of prepared effect control patterns (special figure variation effect control pattern) in response to, for example, the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern determination result specification command. Set as a pattern. Further, the effect control CPU 120 selects one of a plurality of prepared effect control patterns (hold display change patterns) in response to the execution setting of the hold display change effect by the hold display setting process in step S161, and uses the pattern. Set as. If it is determined in step S559 that the specific effect is to be executed, one of the effect control patterns (specific effect control pattern) corresponding to the execution of the specific effect is selected and set as the pattern to be used.

Following the process of step S560, the effect control CPU 120 is provided in a predetermined area (effect control timer setting unit, etc.) of the RAM 122 in response to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern determination result designation command, for example. The initial value of the control process timer is set (step S561). Then, a setting is made on the display screen of the image display device 5 to start the fluctuation of the decorative pattern or the like (step S562). At this time, the effect control CPU 120, for example, issues a display control command specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern (effect control pattern when the special figure fluctuates) determined in the process of step S559 to the VDP of the display control unit 123. In each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the display area of the image display device 5, the decorative symbols are started to fluctuate. Just do it.

After executing the process of step S562, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to "2", which is a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S563), and then performs the variable display start setting process. To finish.

FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display effect processing executed in step S172 shown in FIG. When the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 30 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern has elapsed based on the timer value of the effect control process timer. (Step S801). For example, when the effect control CPU 120 updates the timer value of the effect control process timer (for example, 1 is subtracted) and the end code is read from the effect control pattern in response to the updated effect control process timer value. In addition, it may be determined that the variable display time has elapsed.

When it is determined in the process of step S801 that the variable display time has not elapsed (step S801; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the reach effect period for executing the reach effect (step S801). S802). The reach effect period may be predetermined, for example, in the effect control pattern determined according to the fluctuation pattern. When it is determined that the reach effect period is reached (step S802; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 controls to execute the reach effect (step S803).

After executing the process of step S803, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the end timing of the monochrome effect (step 074AKS031). Since the end timing of the monochrome effect is determined by any of timings 1 to 3 in step 074AKS055 of FIG. 11-16, in step 074AKS031 at the determined end timing of timings 1 to 3. It may be determined whether or not there is.

When it is the end timing of the monochrome effect (step 074AKS031; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 performs the monochrome effect end control for ending the monochrome effect (step 074AKS032) and clears the monochrome effect flag to the off state (step). 074AKS033). In the process of step 074AKS032, since the monochrome output process is completed, the number of colors used for the target image to be displayed in the monochrome mode returns to the normal number of colors. Therefore, the hold display and the active display whose display mode has changed due to the change effect are displayed in the changed display color, and the success sound is output.

After executing the process of step 074AKS033, when it is determined in step S802 that it is not the reach effect period (step S802; No), or when it is determined in step 074AKS031 that it is not the end timing of the monochrome effect (step 074AKS031; No). The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the change effect period for executing the change effect of the success mode or the failure mode (step 074AKS034). The change effect period is set when the change effect is set to be executed in step 074AKS023 or step 074AKS024 of FIG. 11-20. When it is determined that it is the change effect period (step 074AKS034; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 controls to execute the change effect of the success mode or the failure mode (step 074AKS035). In the process of step 074AKS035, since the monochrome output process is performed during the specific effect state during the execution of the monochrome effect (when the monochrome effect flag is on), even if the change effect of the success mode is executed, The hold display and active display are displayed in "white" regardless of the jackpot expectation level. On the other hand, in the normal effect state in which the monochrome effect is not being executed, the display colors are displayed according to the degree of expectation according to the display mode change pattern. Further, in the process of step 074AKS035, the execution start sound of the change effect of the success mode or the failure mode, that is, the effect start sound for notifying the player that the image of the shooting star is displayed, and the success effect or the failure effect are performed. It outputs a success sound or a failure sound that makes it recognizable by hearing. However, while the monochrome effect is being executed (when the monochrome effect flag is on), only the execution start sound is output, and the success sound or the failure sound is not output. The success sound or the failure sound may be output at the timing when the monochrome effect is completed. For example, the success sound or the failure sound may be output in the process of step 074AKS032. According to this, the player can easily recognize that the display mode of the hold display or the active display of the change target has changed after the end of the monochrome effect.

After executing the process of step 074AKS035, or when it is not the change effect period (step 074AKS034; No), the effect control CPU 120 may be, for example, based on the settings in the effect control pattern determined corresponding to the fluctuation pattern, or the like. , Control is performed to execute the effect during the variable display including the variable display operation of the decorative symbol (step 808).

When it is determined in the process of step S801 that the variable display time has elapsed (step S801; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 transmits, for example, a predetermined display control command to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123. , Control is performed to derive and display the final stop symbol (fixed decorative symbol) that is the display result in the variable display of the decorative symbol (step S809). Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 sets a predetermined fixed time as a waiting time for receiving the jackpot start designation command (step S811). Next, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to "3", which is a value corresponding to the special figure hit wait process (step S812).

After executing any of the processes of steps S808 and S812, or when it is determined that the symbol confirmation command has not been received in the process of step S809 (step S809; No), the effect control CPU 120 is performing the variable display effect. End the process.

11-22 and 11-23 show an example of the effect operation when the monochrome effect and the change effect are performed. As shown in FIG. 11-22 (A), a variable display corresponding to the active display AH displayed in the active display area AHA is displayed in a state where three hold displays H1 to hold display H3 are stored. In this state, output sounds such as sound effects and effect sounds from the speakers 8L and 8R are output, and the game effect lamp 9 for the game effect is also lit.

Then, when a new game ball wins the first start winning opening (hold display H4 is displayed), the monochrome effect setting process is performed in the read-ahead notice setting process of FIG. 11-9, and the monochrome effect is executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-22 (B), the background image, the hold display, and the like are displayed in monochrome mode on the image display device 5, and the sound effects and the effect sounds from the speakers 8L and 8R are output. Control is performed to mute the sound and turn off the game effect lamp 9 for the game effect. FIG. 11-22 (B) shows an example in which the variable display being executed is completed in FIG. 11-22 (A). Further, an example is shown in which the display mode of the hold display H4 changes according to the display mode change pattern of PT4-4-22 of FIG. 11-12. In this example, it is assumed that the end timing of the monochrome effect is determined at the timing C, which is the middle stage of the super reach, in step 074AKS055 of FIG. 11-16.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 11-22 (C), when each hold display shifts and the variable display corresponding to the hold display H1 is started, the hold display H1 is displayed as the active display AH. Then, since the hold of the hold display H4 changes according to the display mode change pattern of PT4-4-22, the display mode of the hold display H4 changes in this variable display. Therefore, the change effect of the success mode set in the process of step 074AKS023 of FIG. 11-20 is performed. As described above, since the monochrome effect is being executed, as shown in FIG. 11-22 (C), the execution start sound, that is, the image of the shooting star is displayed even if the change effect of the success mode is executed. Although the effect start sound for notifying the player is output, the success sound is not output. Further, since the hold display is displayed in the monochrome mode during the monochrome effect, the player cannot visually recognize which display color has changed (whether it is the success mode or the failure mode).

Then, as shown in FIG. 11-22 (D), the reach effect of the super reach A is performed, and as shown in FIG. 11-22 (E), when the variable display corresponding to the hold display H1 is completed, FIG. 11 As shown in -22 (F), each hold display shifts, and the variable display corresponding to the hold display H2 is started. Here, since the hold of the hold display H4 changes according to the display mode change pattern of PT4-4-22, the display mode of the hold display H4 does not change in this variable display. Therefore, when the failure mode change effect is set in the process of step 074AKS024 of FIG. 11-20, the failure mode change effect is performed as shown in FIG. 11-22 (F). Even if the change effect of the failure mode is executed, the execution start sound, that is, the effect start sound for notifying the player that the image of the shooting star is displayed is output, but the failure sound is not output. Further, since the hold display is displayed in the monochrome mode during the monochrome effect, the player cannot visually recognize which display color has changed (whether it is the success mode or the failure mode).

Subsequently, when a new game ball wins the first start winning opening (hold display H5 is displayed), the monochrome effect setting process is performed in the read-ahead notice setting process shown in FIG. 11-9, but the monochrome effect is displayed. Since it is being executed, the execution setting of the monochrome effect is not performed (see FIG. 11-16), but since the processes of step 074AKS003 and step 074AKS004 of FIG. 11-9 are executed, the display mode of the hold display changes. It will be. FIG. 11-22 (G) shows an example in which the variable display being executed in FIG. 11-22 (F) is completed. Further, an example is shown in which the display mode of the hold display H5 changes according to the display mode change pattern of PT3-2-04 of FIG. 11-13.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-22 (H), each hold display shifts, and the variable display corresponding to the hold display H3 is started. Here, since the hold of the hold display H4 changes according to the display mode change pattern of PT4-4-22, the display mode of the hold display H4 does not change in this variable display, while the hold of the hold display H5 is PT3. Since the display mode changes according to the display mode change pattern of -2-04, the display mode of the hold display H5 changes in this variable display. Therefore, the change effect of the failure mode is performed for the hold display H4, and the change effect of the success mode is performed for the hold display H5. As described above, since the monochrome effect is being executed, the player cannot recognize whether each change effect is a success mode or a failure mode.

Then, as shown in FIG. 11-23 (I), the reach effect of the super reach A is performed, and as shown in FIG. 11-23 (J), when the variable display corresponding to the hold display H3 is completed, FIG. 11 As shown in -23 (K), each hold display shifts, and the variable display corresponding to the hold display H4 is started. Here, since the hold (active display AH) of the hold display H4 changes according to the display mode change pattern of PT4-4-22, the display mode of the active display AH changes in this variable display. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 11-23 (L), the effect of changing the success mode is performed. Note that FIG. 11-23 (L) shows an example in which the change effect period is during the reach effect of the super reach in the process of step 074AKS023 of FIG. 11-20. On the other hand, since the hold of the hold display H5 changes according to the display mode change pattern of PT3-2-04 of FIG. 11-13, the display mode of the hold display H5 does not change in this variable display. In the illustrated example, an example is shown in which the hold display H5 is set not to execute the change effect in the process of step 074AKS024 of FIG. 11-20.

In the middle of the super reach, it is determined in step 074AKS031 of FIG. 11-21 that the monochrome effect ends, and as shown in FIG. 11-23 (M), the monochrome effect ends, and in accordance with this, the game effect is used. The game effect lamp 9 is turned on, and a success sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. In this example, the success sound is output if the display mode changes even once during the monochrome effect. For example, the failure effect is performed twice and the success effect is performed once before the change is performed once. In this case, the failure sound may be output twice and then the success sound may be output once so that the player can recognize by the player's hearing how many times the display mode has changed. .. According to this, it is possible to notify the player of the timing when the display mode is changed, and it is possible to improve the game interest. As shown in FIG. 11-23 (M), when the monochrome effect is completed, the display color of the hold display H5 and the display color of the active display AH become visible. After that, the variable display ends. In the example shown in FIG. 11-23 (M), the display mode of the active display AH changes according to the display mode change pattern of PT4-4-22 in FIG. 11-12, and thus becomes “red”. The variable display result after that is a "big hit". Since the hold display H5 changes according to the display mode change pattern of PT3-2-04 in FIG. 11-13, the display mode is “green” in the example shown in FIG. 11-23 (M). As the change in the display mode, the shape may be changed in addition to the color. Further, for example, the color of the effect image displayed around the active display or the hold display may be changed. Further, in addition to changing the shape of the active display and the hold display, the color of the effect image may also be changed. Such changes may be made during the monochrome effect, or the monochrome effect may be started by making these changes.

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 074AK in this embodiment, the following effects can be obtained.

The effect control CPU 120 can execute a monochrome effect, and while the monochrome effect is being executed (specific effect state), the number of colors of the image including the hold display and the active display is displayed to be smaller than that in the normal effect state. In the specific effect state, the jackpot expectation is higher than in the normal effect state, and in the normal effect state, the display color of the hold display or the active display is changed to the color according to the expectation by executing the change effect. In the specific effect state, monochrome output processing is performed to display the display modes of the hold display and the active display in a common color regardless of the degree of expectation. Then, when the state shifts from the specific effect state to the normal effect state, the monochrome output process ends, and the display modes of the hold display and the active display are displayed in colors according to the degree of expectation. Therefore, the expectation degree notification by color can be suitably performed, and the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 displays the display mode of the hold display or the active display in the first stage "white" regardless of the degree of expectation during the specific effect state. Therefore, the expectation degree notification by color can be suitably performed, and the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, in the process of step 074AKS056, for example, when the image to be monochrome is displayed in two colors of black and white by the monochrome effect, the effect control CPU 120 also has two colors of black and white for the lighting color of the game effect lamp 9. The number of colors is set to correspond to the number of colors of the image in the monochrome mode. According to this, it is possible to make it stand out that it is in a specific production state, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 starts executing the monochrome effect (monochrome output process) in the process of step 074AKS056. As a result, the target image in monochrome mode such as hold display, active display, background image, etc. is displayed in monochrome mode. According to this, it is possible to make it stand out that it is in a specific production state, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 mutes the output sound during the specific effect state, outputs only the execution start sound for the change effect, and does not output the success sound or the failure sound for the change effect. According to this, it is possible to make it stand out that it is in the specific effect state, and it is possible to recognize the start of execution of the change effect. Then, the success sound or the failure sound is output at the timing when the monochrome effect is completed. According to this, it is possible to easily recognize that the specific display such as the hold display or the active display has changed, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

(Modification example of feature part 074AK)
The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 does not have to have all the technical features shown in the above-described embodiment, and has been described in the above-described embodiment so as to solve at least one problem in the prior art. It may have a structure of parts. In addition, at least a part of each of the following modifications may be combined.

In the above embodiment, an example in which the variable display compatible display and the background image are in the monochrome mode in the specific effect state during the monochrome effect execution is shown, but this is an example. For example, in addition to the variable display compatible display, an image that notifies the jackpot expectation by the displayed color, such as notifying the expectation by the color of the displayed character or message, may be in monochrome mode. According to this, as the effect of the specific effect state, it is possible to make the state in which the degree of expectation cannot be recognized more preferably, and it is possible to arouse the expectation of the player. On the other hand, on the contrary, it is not an image displayed by lottery on the side of the effect control board 12 (not an image displayed by lottery according to the degree of expectation), but by a command or the like transmitted from the side of the main board 11. The image (special information) for displaying the information shall be displayed in a normal mode (for example, full color) instead of a monochrome mode. Specifically, it is composed only of numbers, for example, odd numbers are displayed in red, even numbers are displayed in blue (displayed in the same color as the decorative pattern), always small symbols that are always visible to the player, and special figures. By displaying the number of holds in 1 and special figure 2 in numbers, the number of holds is always displayed so that the player can identify it, and the right-handed display is controlled so that it is not in the monochrome mode in the monochrome effect. Just do it. Since the right-handed display is displayed in the probabilistic state, it may be possible to execute the monochrome effect even in the probable change state. Further, in the normal effect state, a small symbol, a constant hold number display, a right-handed display, or the like may be displayed in a monochrome mode, and may be displayed in another color such as red in the specific effect state. According to this, the content suggested by the special information can be recognized even in the specific production state, and it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the game interest.

Further, in the above embodiment, in the specific effect state, an example in which the variable display compatible display (specific display) such as the hold display and the active display is displayed in "white" which is the first stage is shown, but the normal effect state It may be displayed in a display mode that is not displayed in, and is displayed only in a specific effect state (for example, it is grayed out regardless of the degree of expectation).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the monochrome effect is executed, the display mode of the hold display or the active display always changes, but this is an example. For example, the process of step 074AKS052 of FIG. 11-16 may not be executed, and the monochrome effect may be executed regardless of whether or not the display mode of the hold display or the active display changes.

Further, in the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the execution start timing of the monochrome effect is the start winning time (that is, the timing when the game medium wins the prize), but this is an example. The execution timing of the monochrome effect may be a predetermined timing during variable display. For example, the monochrome effect is performed at the start of execution of the step-up notice in which the frame color changes in the order of white, blue, green, and red. As the execution timing, the player may not be able to specify to what stage the color of the frame has changed until the end of the monochrome effect. That is, if the monochrome effect can be executed during the execution of the effect that notifies the jackpot expectation degree by the displayed color, the execution timing of the monochrome effect may be arbitrary.

(Explanation of feature 75AK)
Next, the feature portion 075AK of this embodiment will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 075AK of this embodiment, unlike the feature unit 074AK, the monochrome effect ends when the display mode (display color) of the specific display such as the hold display or the active display changes. That is, the change timing is the end timing of the monochrome effect. Hereinafter, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 075AK having such features will be described. The same parts as those described in the above basic explanation and the same parts as those explained in the feature part 074AK will be omitted.

FIG. 11-25 is a flowchart showing an example of the lookahead advance notice setting process executed by the feature unit 075AK. The part that performs the same processing as the lookahead advance notice setting process executed by the feature unit 074AK is assigned the same number as the lookahead advance notice setting process shown in FIG. 11-9. In the lookahead advance notice setting process shown in FIG. 11-25, in step 074AKS003, after determining the display mode of the active display as the final display mode of the hold display to be displayed, the setting process such as monochrome effect is executed ( Step 075AKS001). The monochrome effect setting process of step 075AKS001 is a process of determining whether or not the monochrome effect is executed, its end timing, and the display mode change pattern of the hold display and the active display.

FIG. 11-25 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting process such as monochrome effect executed in step 075AKS001 of FIG. 11-24. In the illustrated example, the parts that perform the same processing as the monochrome effect setting processing of FIGS. 11-16 are assigned the same numbers as those of FIGS. 11-16. When the monochrome effect setting process shown in FIG. 11-25 is started, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the monochrome effect flag is set to the ON state, as in the monochrome effect setting process of FIG. 11-16. In the case of (step 074AKS051), if it is in the off state (step 074AKS051; No), whether or not there is a hold (including an active display) whose display mode changes before the current hold that is the target of the pre-reading notice. That is, it is determined whether or not the display mode (display mode in front) of the hold or active display existing in the foreground changes (step 074AKS051A). When the monochrome effect flag is on (step 074AKS051; Yes) or when the front display mode changes (step 074AKS051A; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 ends the monochrome effect setting process.

When the front display mode does not change (step 074AKS051A; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the display mode of the active display is other than "white" (step 075AKS012). Whether or not the display mode of the active display is other than “white” may be determined by checking the display mode of the active display determined in step 074AKS003 of FIG. 11-24. When the display mode of the active display is "white" (step 075AKS012; No), that is, when the display mode of the active display does not change from the hold display, the effect control CPU 120 determines the PT4-4-01 according to the number of holds. , PT3-1-01, or PT2-2-01, and the display mode change pattern is determined (not shown), and the setting process such as monochrome effect is completed.

When the display mode of the active display is "blue", "green", or "red" other than "white" (step 075AKS012; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the monochrome effect is executed as a variable display result. Accordingly, determination is made according to the determination ratio shown in FIG. 11-17 (step 074AKS053). After executing the process of step 074AKS053, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is determined to execute the monochrome effect, that is, whether or not the monochrome effect is executed (step 074AKS054).

When the monochrome effect is not executed, that is, when the monochrome effect is not executed (step 074AKS054; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines according to the determination ratio of the display mode change pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 11-11 to 11-15. The display mode change pattern is determined according to the display mode of the active display determined in step 074AKS003 and the number of reserved storages indicated in either the first special figure reserved storage number designation command or the second special figure reserved storage number designation command ( Step 075AKS013), the setting process such as monochrome effect is completed.

When the monochrome effect is executed, that is, when the monochrome effect is executed (step 074AKS054; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 steps according to the display mode change pattern determination table (in monochrome) shown in FIGS. 11-26 (A). The display mode change pattern is determined according to the display mode of the active display determined in 074AKS003 and the number of reserved storages indicated in either the first special figure reserved storage number designation command or the second special figure reserved storage number designation command (step). 075AKS014).

The display mode change pattern determination table (at the time of monochrome) shown in FIG. 11-26 (A) is a table referred to for determining the change pattern of the display mode of the hold display and the active display when the monochrome effect is executed. .. In the feature unit 075AK, when the monochrome effect is executed, the display mode of the hold display does not change, and only the display mode of the active display changes. Specifically, as shown in the figure, the display mode of the hold display is "white", and the number of holds is determined so that the display mode of the active display is determined to be a display mode change pattern of any one of "blue" to "red". Each display mode change pattern is set according to the above.

After returning to FIG. 11-25 and determining the display stage change pattern in step 075AKS014, the effect control CPU 120 changes the active display according to the active display change timing determination table shown in FIG. 11-26 (B). Is determined at any of the timings A to C according to the display mode of the active display (step 075AKS015).

In this embodiment, the "timing A" of the feature portion 075AK is the timing before the reach, that is, the timing immediately before the reach state is reached, and the "timing B" is the timing at the start of the reach production of the super reach, and "timing C". Is the timing of the middle stage of the reach production of Super Reach. That is, the "timing A" timing is the earliest timing after the start of the variable display, then the "timing B" is the earliest, and the "timing C" is the latest timing. As shown in FIGS. 11-26, in the feature unit 075AK in this embodiment, the display mode of the active display changes to a mode with high expectation in the order of “timing C”> “timing B”> “timing A”. The determination rate is set so that the later the timing from the start of the variable display to the change, the higher the rate at which the display mode of the active display changes to the display color that is highly expected by the player. Has been done.

After returning to FIG. 11-25 and executing the process of step 075AKS015, the effect control CPU 120 determines the timing immediately after the change timing determined in the process of step 075AKS015 as the end timing of the monochrome effect (step 075AKS016). As a result, the monochrome output process ends at the timing when the display mode of the active display changes, and the active display is displayed in the changed display mode. After executing the process of step 075AKS016, the effect control CPU 120 performs monochrome effect execution control to execute the monochrome effect (step 074AKS056), sets the monochrome effect flag to the ON state (step 074AKS057), and then performs the monochrome effect, etc. End the setting process. When the process of step 074AKS056 is performed, the execution of the monochrome effect (monochrome output process) is started, so that the target image in the monochrome mode such as the hold display, the active display, the background image, etc. is in the monochrome mode. The point to be displayed is the same as that of the feature unit 074AK. In addition, in the specific effect state during the monochrome effect execution, the hold display and active display are displayed in the first stage "white" (displayed in a display color displayed at a high rate before the change effect is executed). , Control to mute the output sounds such as sound effects and production sounds from the speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like in accordance with the execution of the monochrome effect, and to turn off the game effect lamp 9 for the game effect. The point that is performed is the same as that of the feature unit 074AK.

After returning to FIG. 11-24 and executing the process of step 074AKS001, the effect control CPU 120 displays the first hold display or the second hold display according to the display mode change pattern determined in step 075AKS013 and step 075AKS014 of FIG. 11-25. Is displayed (step 075AKS002). After executing the process of step 075AKS002, the same process as the lookahead advance notice setting process shown in FIG. 11-9 is performed (the same process as that of the feature unit 074AK is performed).

FIG. 11-27 is a flowchart showing an example of the change effect setting process performed in the variable display start setting process in the feature unit 075AK (see FIG. 11-19). The change effect setting process performed by the feature unit 075AK differs in that the processes of steps 075AKS021 to 075AKS023 are executed in addition to the change effect setting process performed by the feature unit 074AK, but they are the same in other respects. To do.

When the change effect setting process shown in FIGS. 11-27 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the monochrome effect flag is set to the ON state (step 075AKS021). When the monochrome effect flag is off (step 075AKS021; No), the effect control CPU 120 executes the processes of steps 074AKS022 to step 074AKS024 as in the feature unit 074AK.

On the other hand, when the monochrome effect flag is set to the ON state (step 075AKS021; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the display mode of the active display changes in the variable display executed this time (step 074AKS022). ). When the display mode of the active display does not change in the variable display executed this time (step 074AKS022; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the change effect setting process as it is.

When the display mode of the active display changes in the variable display executed this time (step 074AKS022; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets the change effect pattern, which is the execution pattern of the change effect, into the change pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 11-28. According to this, after setting according to the change timing determined in step 075AKS015 of FIG. 11-25 (step 075AKS023), the change effect setting process is terminated.

FIG. 11-28 is a diagram showing an example of a change pattern determination table. As shown in the figure, when the change timing determined in step 075AKS015 of FIG. 11-25 is the timing C, that is, the middle stage of the super reach, the change effect of the failure mode is performed immediately before the reach state which is the timing A, and the timing B At the start of the reach effect of the super reach, the change effect of the failure mode is performed, and in the middle of the super reach, which is the timing, the change effect pattern of the pattern 1 is set. When the change timing determined in step 075AKS015 of FIG. 11-25 is the timing B, that is, the start of the reach effect of the super reach, the change effect of the failure mode is performed immediately before the reach state which is the timing A, and the change effect of the failure mode is performed at the timing B. At the start of the reach effect of a certain super reach, the change effect pattern of the pattern 2 that executes the change effect of the success mode is set. When the change timing determined in step 075AKS015 of FIG. 11-25 is immediately before the reach state, that is, the change effect pattern of the pattern 3 that executes the change effect of the success mode immediately before the reach state which is the timing A. Is set.

In the illustrated example, an example in which the change effect of the failure mode is executed at the timing when the display mode of the active display does not change is shown, but there may be a pattern in which the change effect is not executed.

FIG. 11-29 is a diagram showing an example of an effect operation when a monochrome effect and a change effect are executed. As shown in FIG. 11-29 (A), a state in which one of the hold display H1 is stored and a variable display corresponding to the active display AH displayed in the active display area AHA is performed. In addition to outputting sound effects such as sound effects and directing sounds from the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9 for the game effect is also lit.

Then, when a new game ball wins the first start winning opening, the hold display H2 is displayed, the display mode of the active display is determined in the pre-reading notice setting process of FIG. 11-24, and the monochrome effect setting process is performed. When the monochrome effect is executed in, the image display device 5 displays the background image, the hold display, and the like in a monochrome mode, and the effects from the speakers 8L and 8R, as shown in FIG. 11-29 (B). Control is performed to mute output sounds such as sounds and production sounds, and to turn off the game effect lamp 9 for game effects. FIG. 11-29 (B) shows an example in which the variable display being executed is completed in FIG. 11-29 (A). Further, in the illustrated example, the display mode of the active display in the hold display H2 is determined to be "red" (step 074AKS003 in FIG. 11-24), and the display mode change pattern of PT2-4-02 is determined (FIG. It is assumed that the active display change timing is determined at the timing C in step 075AKS014 of 11-25 (step 075AKS015 of FIG. 11-25). That is, the change effect of the failure mode and the success mode is executed according to the change effect pattern of the pattern 1 (see FIGS. 11-27 and 11-28).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 11-29 (C), when each hold display shifts and the variable display corresponding to the hold display H1 is started, the hold display H1 is displayed as the active display AH. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-29 (D), when the variable display corresponding to the hold display H1 ends and the variable display corresponding to the hold display H2 starts, as shown in FIG. 11-29 (E). The hold display H2 is displayed as the active display AH. In the example shown in FIG. 11-29 (E), an example of the timing (timing A) immediately before the variable display corresponding to the hold display H2 reaches the reach state is shown. Since the change effect of the failure mode and the success mode is executed according to the change effect pattern of the pattern 1, in the illustrated example, when the change effect of the failure mode is performed at the timing (timing A) immediately before the reach state. Is shown. In the change effect, the execution start sound, that is, the effect start sound for notifying the player that the image of the shooting star is displayed is output, but the success sound and the failure sound are not output. Is similar to.

Then, when the reach effect of the super reach is started (the timing of the timing B) after the reach state is reached, as shown in FIG. 11-29 (F), the change effect of the failure mode is performed again. At the timing C in the middle of the super reach, as shown in FIG. 11-29 (G), a change effect of the success mode is performed, which is the end timing of the monochrome effect, as shown in FIG. 11-29 (H). , The monochrome effect is completed, and in accordance with this, the game effect lamp 9 for the game effect is turned on, and the success sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. As shown in FIG. 11-29 (H), the monochrome effect ends due to the change in the display mode of the active display, and the display color of the active display AH becomes visible. In the example shown in FIG. 11-29 (H), the display mode of the active display AH changes according to the display mode change pattern of PT2-4-02 of FIG. 11-15, and thus becomes “red”. The variable display result after that is a "big hit".

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 075AK in this embodiment, the following effects can be obtained.

The effect control CPU 120 can execute a monochrome effect, and while the monochrome effect is being executed (specific effect state), the number of colors of the image including the hold display and the active display is displayed to be smaller than that in the normal effect state. In the specific effect state, the jackpot expectation is higher than in the normal effect state, and in the normal effect state, the display color of the hold display or the active display is changed to the color according to the expectation by executing the change effect. In the specific effect state, the state is changed from the specific effect state to the normal effect state at the timing immediately after the display mode of the active display is changed. Therefore, the production pattern becomes various and the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a change effect of the success mode that changes the display mode of the active display and a change effect of the failure mode that does not change the display mode of the active display. Then, the monochrome effect is terminated at the timing immediately after the change effect of the success mode is executed and the display mode of the active display is changed. Therefore, it is possible to easily recognize that the display mode of the active display has changed, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 executes a setting process such as a monochrome effect in the lookahead advance notice setting process executed at the timing when the hold display is displayed, that is, the timing when the game medium wins a prize, and starts the monochrome effect. Then, the variable display corresponding to the hold display of the target is started, and after being displayed as the active display, the monochrome effect is ended at the timing immediately after the change effect of the success mode is executed for the active display. Therefore, it is possible to easily recognize that the display color of the active display has changed, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 changes the display mode of the active display at any of the timings A to C. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-26 (B), the later the change timing, the higher the expectation of the active display, and the later the change timing, the higher the jackpot expectation. According to this, the production pattern becomes various and the game entertainment can be improved.

(Modification example of feature part 075AK)
The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 does not have to have all the technical features shown in the above-described embodiment, and has been described in the above-described embodiment so as to solve at least one problem in the prior art. It may have a structure of parts. In addition, at least a part of each of the following modifications may be combined. Further, all or a part of the features shown in the modified example of the feature portion 074AK may be combined.

In the above embodiment, the timing at which the display mode of the active display changes in the specific effect state in which the monochrome effect is being executed is determined by the process of step 075AKS015 in FIG. 11-25, from timing A to timing in FIG. 11-26 (B). An example of determining one of C has been shown, but in addition to this, for example, the timing at which the display mode of the hold display or the active display changes even in the normal effect state is the timing A in FIGS. 11-26 (B). ~ Timing C may be determined. In this case, the timing at which the display mode of the active display changes may be determined at the timing C higher in the specific effect state than in the normal effect state. According to this, it is possible to improve the expectation for the specific effect state during the execution of the monochrome effect.

Further, in the above embodiment, the end timing of the monochrome effect is shown immediately after the display mode of the active display is changed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the timing may be the same as the timing of the change. Further, the display mode is not limited to the active display, and the timing immediately after the display mode of the hold display changes or the changed timing may be set as the end timing of the monochrome effect. That is, the end timing of the specific effect state may include at least the timing when the change effect is executed and the display mode (display color) of the hold display or the active display changes, and the timing or change at the same time as the change. It may be the timing immediately after, or the end timing of the changed variable display. In this case, the monochrome effect can be executed when the number of reserved memories is "3" or more, and the timing after the display mode changes after the hold display is shifted twice is determined as the end timing of the monochrome effect. Just do it. Specifically, in the monochrome effect setting process shown in FIG. 11-25, when the effectiveness of the monochrome effect is determined on the condition that the number of reserved memories is "3" or more and the monochrome effect is executed, the monochrome effect is used. Count the number of times the hold has shifted since the start of execution. Then, when the count value is "2" or more, it is assumed that the end condition of the monochrome effect is satisfied, and the timing at which the display mode of the hold display after that is changed may be determined as the end timing of the monochrome effect. According to this, although it is a condition for ending the monochrome effect that the display mode is changed, the viewing period of the monochrome effect can be secured, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

Further, in the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the display mode of the active display always changes when the monochrome effect is executed, but this is an example. Even when the monochrome effect is executed, the display mode of the active display may not change (that is, the decision to execute the monochrome effect may be made when the display mode of the active display does not change. ). In this case, the monochrome effect may be terminated by the end of the variable display corresponding to the hold that was the target when the monochrome effect was determined to be executed.

(Explanation of feature section 153SG)
Next, the game machine in the feature unit 153SG of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-30 to 11-44.

FIG. 11-30 is a part of the flowchart of the effect control process process (S76) in the feature unit 153SG of this embodiment. In the effect control process process in the feature unit 153SG of this embodiment, after the pre-reading notice setting process (S161) shown in FIG. 7 is executed, the first reserved storage display area 153SG005D and the second reserved storage display area 153SG005U (FIG. 11-). 42) The display mode and the number of display of the hold memory display are updated according to the start winning command buffer 153SG194A. After executing the hold display update process, any of S170 to S177 shown in FIG. Is supposed to be executed. The start winning command buffer 153SG194A corresponds to the first starting winning command buffer and the second starting winning command buffer in the feature unit 074AK (see FIG. 11-7), and is used in the starting winning command buffer 153SG194A. Is the storage area (area corresponding to the buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages in the first special figure reserved storage, and the variable display. A storage area corresponding to the first special figure in the inside (an area corresponding to the buffer number "1-0" and corresponding to active display) is provided. In addition, the start winning command buffer 153SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4" corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages in the second special figure reserved storage. (Area corresponding to) and a storage area corresponding to the second special figure during variable display (the area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0” and corresponding to the active display) are provided.

FIG. 11-31 is a flowchart showing a lookahead advance notice setting process (S161) executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 11-30. In the lookahead advance notice setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the contents of the start winning command buffer 153SG194A (153SGS241), and determines whether or not there is an entry for which the hold display flag is not set (153SGS242). If there is no entry for which the hold display flag is not set, the lookahead advance notice setting process is terminated. If there is an entry for which the hold display flag is not set, the value of the hold display flag is already set to one of 1 to 4. It is determined whether or not there is an entry set (153SGS243).

If there is already an entry in which the value of the hold display flag is set to any of 1 to 4, that is, if the hold display notice effect has already been executed, the hold display flag is set in the entry (153SGS242). Set the hold display flag of (entry determined not to be present) to "0" corresponding to the non-execution of the hold display notice effect (that is, it is decided to display the hold storage display corresponding to the entry with "○"). The pre-reading notice setting process is terminated (153SGS251). As will be described later, the case where there is an entry in which the value of the hold display flag is already set to any of 1 to 4 is the case where the hold display notice effect has already been executed. That is, in the process of 153SGS243, when the hold display notice effect is already executed, the execution of the new hold display notice effect is restricted.

If there is no entry set in any of the values 1 to 4 of the hold display flag in 153SGS243, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the entry (in 153SGS242, the hold display flag is not set). ) Is determined whether or not the symbol designation command indicates a big hit (153SGS244). When the symbol designation command of the entry indicates a jackpot, the jackpot type is specified from the symbol designation command of the entry (153SGS245), and extracted from, for example, the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 153SG193. Based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the hold display notice effect and the jackpot type specified in 153SGS245, by referring to the hold display notice effect determination table (not shown), the presence / absence of execution of the hold display notice effect and the hold display The display pattern when the advance notice effect is executed is determined (153SGS246).

In 153SG246, for example, whether or not to execute the hold display advance notice effect and the display pattern (notice type) are determined at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. 11-32 (A). In the setting example of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 11-32 (A), the presence / absence of the hold display advance notice effect and the determination ratio of the display pattern (notice type) are different depending on the jackpot type specified in the processing of 153SGS245.

In the feature unit 153SG of this embodiment, four types of display patterns (notice types) of the hold display notice effect are provided: display pattern α, display pattern β, display pattern γ, and display pattern δ. Of these, when the display pattern of the hold display notice effect is determined to be the display pattern α, the hold storage display is displayed in the first hold storage display area 153SG005D or the second hold storage display area 153SG005U as a white square (◇). When the display pattern of the hold display notice effect is determined to be the display pattern β, the hold storage display is displayed in the first hold storage display area 153SG005D or the second hold storage display area 153SG005U in a white star shape (☆). When the display pattern of the hold display notice effect is determined to be the display pattern γ, the hold storage display is displayed on the first hold storage display area 153SG005D or the second hold storage display area 153SG005U by the blue camera, and the hold display is displayed. When the display pattern of the advance notice effect is determined to be the display pattern δ, the hold storage display is displayed by the red camera in the first hold storage display area 153SG005D or the second hold storage display area 153SG005U. When it is decided not to execute the hold display notice effect, the hold storage display is displayed in a white circle (◯) in the first hold storage display area 153SG005D or the second hold storage display area 153SG005U.

Here, as shown in FIG. 11-32 (A), when the jackpot type is jackpot A (non-probability variable jackpot), non-execution of the hold display notice effect is determined at a rate of 5%, and a rate of 55%. The execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern α is decided, the execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern β is decided at a rate of 20%, and the hold display notice effect in the display pattern γ is decided at a rate of 10%. Is decided, and the execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern δ is decided at a rate of 10%. If the jackpot type is jackpot B or jackpot C (probability variation jackpot), non-execution of the hold display notice effect is determined at a rate of 5%, and the hold display notice effect with the display pattern α is determined at a rate of 20%. Execution is decided, execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern β is decided at a rate of 55%, execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern γ is decided at a rate of 10%, and execution is decided at a rate of 10%. The execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern δ is determined.

Returning to 153SGS244, the effect control CPU 120 identifies the variation category from the variation category specification command of the entry (153SGS248) when the symbol designation command of the entry is a miss or a small hit, for example, the random number circuit 124 or the effect control. Based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the hold display notice effect extracted from the random counter of the counter setting unit 153SG193 and the big hit type specified in 153SGS249, refer to the hold display notice effect determination table at the time of small hit / miss (not shown). By doing so, it is determined whether or not the hold display notice effect is executed and the display pattern.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-32 (B), when the variable display result is out of alignment and the variable category is non-reach, the non-execution of the hold display notice effect is determined at a rate of 95%. The execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern α is decided at a rate of 5%, the execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern β is decided at a rate of 0%, and the execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern γ is decided at a rate of 0%. The execution of the hold display notice effect is determined, and the execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern δ is determined at a rate of 0%. In addition, when the variable display result is out of order or small hit and the variable category is other (when the normal reach is out of order or small hit), it is decided that the hold display notice effect is not executed at a rate of 75%, and 20%. The execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern α is decided at the ratio, the execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern β is decided at the ratio of 5%, and the hold display notice effect in the display pattern γ is decided at the ratio of 0%. The execution of the effect is determined, and the execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern δ is determined at a rate of 0%. In addition, when the variable display result is out of alignment and the variable category is Super Reach, it is decided that the hold display notice effect is not executed at a rate of 55%, and the hold display notice effect in the display pattern α is determined at a rate of 25%. Execution is decided, execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern β is decided at a rate of 10%, execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern γ is decided at a rate of 5%, and execution is decided at a rate of 5%. The execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern δ is determined.

That is, as shown in FIGS. 11-32 (A) and 11-32 (B), in the feature unit 153SG of this embodiment, when the hold display notice effect is executed, the hold display notice effect is not executed. When the jackpot game state is controlled at a higher rate than when the hold display notice effect is executed in the display pattern β, the hold display notice effect is executed in the display pattern α. The jackpot type is set to be jackpot B or jackpot C (probability variation jackpot) at a high rate. With such a setting, when the variable display result is "big hit" and the display pattern β is displayed as the display pattern (notice type), the big hit type is higher than when the display pattern α is displayed. Is a probabilistic jackpot, and the player's expectation of becoming a probabilistic jackpot can be increased.

Since the display pattern γ and the display pattern δ are display patterns that suggest the execution of the setting suggestion effect described later, the degree of expectation that the display pattern α and the display pattern β are controlled to the big hit game state (big hit expectation) Is not set to be high, and the degree of expectation (probability variation big hit expectation) that the big hit type is big hit B or big hit C is the same.

In the feature unit 153SG of this embodiment, the fluctuation patterns that can be determined when the variable display result is a big hit are the fluctuation patterns of normal reach and super reach, and as shown in FIGS. 11-32, the display pattern γ and The case where the display pattern δ is determined is the case where the variable display result is a big hit or the variable display result is out of order and the variable category is super reach. That is, it is also suggested that the hold storage display of the display pattern γ and the display pattern δ (a mode of the blue or red camera) is a variable display of super reach that can execute the setting suggestion effect described later. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11-32 (B), when the fluctuation category is non-reach or other (normal reach or small hit), that is, when it is determined that the special figure fluctuation time is shorter than the super reach. The hold memory display is not displayed in the form of a blue or red camera.

Returning to FIG. 11-31, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the hold display advance notice effect is determined after the processing of the 153SGS246 or 153SGS249 is executed (153SGS250). If it is decided to execute the hold display notice effect, the hold display flag of the entry is set to a value (any of 1 to 4) corresponding to the display pattern determined by the processing of 153SGS246 or 153SGS249 and read ahead. The notice setting process is terminated (153SGS247). If it is decided not to execute the hold display notice effect, the hold display flag of the entry is set to "0" corresponding to the non-execution of the hold display notice effect, and the lookahead notice setting process is terminated ( 153SGS251).

11-33 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (S171) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variable start command reception flag is set (153SGS271). When the first variable start command reception flag is set (153SGS271; Y), the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure hold storage in the start winning command buffer (not shown) are set. Various command data and various flags stored in association with each other (that is, various command data and various flags corresponding to the first special symbol being variably displayed) in the first to fourth first special figure hold storage The corresponding various command data and various flags) are shifted upward by one buffer number (153SGS272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

Specifically, the shift is made so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-1" of the first special figure hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "1-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-1". 1 Special figure The first special figure is shifted so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-3" of the hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "1-2". The various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-4" of the hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-3".

If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is not set in the 153SGS271 (153SGS271; N), it is determined whether or not the second fluctuation start command reception flag is set (153SGS273). When the second fluctuation start command reception flag is not set (153SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and when the second fluctuation start command reception flag is set (153SGS273; Y), the figure is shown. No start The various command data and various flags (that is, variable display is being displayed) stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure hold storage in the received command buffer at the time of winning. Various command data and various flags corresponding to the second special symbol (various command data and various flags corresponding to the first to fourth second special symbol hold storage) are shifted upward by one buffer number. (153SGS274). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

Specifically, the shift is made so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-1" of the second special figure hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "2-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-2" of the second special figure hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-1". 2 Special figure The second special figure is shifted so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-3" of the hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "2-2". The various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" of the hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-3".

After executing the 153SGS272 or 153SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (153SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative symbol is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) (153SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the display result specified by the display result specification command, and stores the data indicating the determined stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. To do.

In the feature unit 153SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the jackpot A, the effect control CPU 120 has, for example, three symbols as even symbols as stop symbols. Determine the combination of the aligned decorative symbols (big hit symbol). Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the third variable display result specification command corresponding to the jackpot B, a plurality of combinations of odd-numbered symbols other than "7" (for example, "111", "11", " It is determined from a combination of decorative patterns such as "333", "555", and "999"). In addition, when the received variable display result specification command is the fourth variable display result specification command corresponding to jackpot C, a combination of decorative symbols (big hit symbol) in which three symbols are aligned with "7" is determined as a stop symbol. To do. In addition, when the received variable display result specification command is the fifth variable display result specification command corresponding to a small hit, the chance eye indicating that it is a small hit as a stop symbol (third symbol is under a specific rule). It is determined from "334", "556", "778", etc.) that are not uniform. Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the first variable display result specification command corresponding to the deviation, it is a decorative symbol in which the three symbols are not uniform as the stop symbol, and a combination other than the above-mentioned chance eyes. (Out of design) is decided.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 uses, for example, a stop symbol determination table in which random numbers for determining stop symbols are extracted and data indicating a combination of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variable display variation pattern is a super reach variation pattern (153SGS277). If the variable display variation pattern is not the super reach variation pattern, the process proceeds to 153SGS285. If the variable display variation pattern is the super reach variation pattern, the rear variable display suggestion effect is displayed during the variable display reach effect. Is executed (153SGS278), which determines whether or not to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect and which effect is to be executed as the rear variable display suggestion effect (153SGS278). That is, in the feature unit 153SG of this embodiment, as shown in 153SGS277 to 153SG278, the rear variable display suggestion effect (big hit suggestion effect or setting suggestion effect) is a variable pattern of the super reach variation with a long special figure variation time. It can be executed only on the display, and is not executed on the variable display of the normal reach and non-reach fluctuation patterns with a short special figure fluctuation time.

In the variable display of the super reach in the feature unit 153SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11-41, the variable display result becomes a big hit as a suggestion effect during the front variable display from the start timing of the variable display. It is possible to execute a character effect suggested by the character displayed on the image display device 5 or a timer effect suggesting that the variable display result is a big hit and a period until the start of execution of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display. , A setting that suggests a jackpot suggestion effect that suggests that the variable display result is a big hit or a setting value that is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 as a suggestion effect during the rear variable display during the reach effect that is the latter half of the variable display. Suggestive effects can be performed. That is, the process of 153SGS278 is a process of determining whether to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect and whether to execute the jackpot suggestion effect or the setting suggestion effect during the reach effect as the rear variable display suggestion effect. ..

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the rear variable display suggestion effect (either the jackpot suggestion effect or the setting suggestion effect) is determined in the process of the 153SGS278 (153SGS279). If it is decided not to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect in the processing of 153SGS278, the process proceeds to 153SGS285. The front variable display suggestion effect determination process for determining whether to execute the character effect or the timer effect as the variable display suggestion effect is executed (153SGS280). That is, the feature unit 153SG of this embodiment does not determine the execution of the front variable display suggestion effect unless the execution of the rear variable display effect is determined, that is, the setting suggestion effect cannot be executed. In the variable display of reach and normal reach, the timer effect and the character effect are not executed as the suggestion effect during the front variable display.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the character effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the front variable display (153SGS281). When it is decided to execute the character effect as the suggestion effect during the front variable display, the period until the start of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display on the timer for waiting for the suggestion effect during the rear variable display (as shown in FIG. 11-41 (A)). Set a value according to (5 seconds after the start of the reach effect) and proceed to 153SG285 (153SGS282). During variable display at the rear of the timer, the period until the start of the suggestion effect (as shown in FIG. 11-41 (B), a value corresponding to the effect pattern of the timer effect (specifically, the effect pattern of the timer effect is the effect for 25 seconds). If the period is pattern TS-1, 5 seconds after the start of the reach effect, and if the timer effect pattern is the pattern TS-2, which is the effect period of 30 seconds, 10 seconds after the start of the reach effect). ) To proceed to 153SGS285 (153SGS283).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 selects an effect control pattern (process table) according to the fluctuation pattern in the 153 SGS 285. Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (153SGS286).

In the process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are controlled. The sound control execution data, the operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, and the like are arranged in order in chronological order in association with each process data n (1 to N). There is.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays the effect device (image display as an effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as production parts, speakers 8L and 8R as production parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (153SGS287). For example, the image display device 5 outputs a command to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern. Further, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting / extinguishing of various lamps. Further, in order to output the voice from the speakers 8L and 8R, the control signal (sound number data) is output to the voice control board 13.

In the feature unit 153SG, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern designation command so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed according to the variation pattern corresponding to one-to-one. However, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern. The fluctuation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns corresponding to the specified command.

Then, a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variable pattern designation command is set in the variable display time timer (153SGS288). Further, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (153SGS289). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms. Each time the predetermined time elapses, the effect control CPU 120 writes the image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols to the VRAM, and the display control unit 123 writes the image data to the VRAM. A signal corresponding to the image data is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image according to the signal, whereby variable display (variation) of the decorative pattern is realized. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect processing during variable display (S172), and the variable display start setting process is terminated (153 SGS290).

FIG. 11-34 is a flowchart showing a suggestion effect determination process (153SGS278) during the rear variable display in the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 11-33. In the rear variable display suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 10-34, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the value of the hold display flag corresponding to the variable display with reference to the start winning command buffer 153SG194A (153SGS301). In this process, when the first variable display start command reception flag is set, the value of the hold display flag of the entry of "1-0" of the start winning command buffer 153SG194A is specified, and the second variable is displayed. When the display start command reception flag is set, the entry of "2-0" in the start winning command buffer 153SG194A may be specified.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect and the effect to be executed as the rear variable display suggestion effect based on the value of the hold display flag specified in 153SGS301 (153SG302).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-35 (A), when the value of the hold display flag specified in 153SGS301 is "0", that is, the hold display notice effect is executed for the variable display. If not, 90% of the respondents decided not to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect, 10% decided to execute the jackpot suggestion effect as the rear variable display suggestion effect, and 0% decided to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect. Set as a suggestion effect during variable display Determines to execute the suggestion effect. Further, when the value of the hold display flag specified in 153SGS301 is "1" or "2", that is, the hold storage display is displayed as a white square or star as a hold display notice effect for the variable display. If so, the non-execution of the rear variable display suggestion effect is decided at a rate of 50%, the execution of the jackpot suggestion effect is decided as the rear variable display suggestion effect at a rate of 50%, and the execution of the jackpot suggestion effect is decided at a rate of 0%. Set as a suggestion effect during variable display at the rear Determines to execute the suggestion effect.

Further, when the value of the hold display flag specified in the 153 SGS 301 is "3", that is, when the hold storage display is displayed by the blue camera as the hold display notice effect for the variable display, 30 %% Decided not to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect, 35% decided to execute the jackpot suggestion effect as the rear variable display suggestion effect, and 35% decided to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect. Decide to execute the setting suggestion effect. Then, when the value of the hold display flag specified in 153SGS301 is "4", that is, when the hold storage display is displayed by the red camera as the hold display notice effect for the variable display, it is 0. %% Decided not to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect, 30% decided to execute the jackpot suggestion effect as the rear variable display suggestion effect, and 70% decided to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect. Decide to execute the setting suggestion effect.

That is, in the feature unit 153SG of this embodiment, when the hold display notice effect is executed for the variable display, it is more than the case where the hold display notice effect is not executed for the variable display. It is set so that the execution of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display is determined at a high rate. Further, when the hold storage display is displayed by the blue or red camera as the hold display notice effect for the variable display (when the value of the hold display flag is "3" or "4"), It is higher than the case where the hold memory display is displayed as a white square or a star as a hold display notice effect for the variable display (when the value of the hold display flag is "1" or "2"). It was set so that the execution of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display was determined by the ratio, and the hold memory display was displayed as a white square or star as a hold display notice effect for the variable display. It is set so that the execution of the setting suggestion effect is decided as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display at a higher rate than the case.

Also, pay attention to the case where the hold storage display is displayed by the blue or red camera as the hold display notice effect for the variable display (when the value of the hold display flag is "3" or "4"). Then, if the hold storage display is displayed on the red camera as the hold display notice effect for the variable display, the hold memory display is displayed on the blue camera as the hold display notice effect for the variable display. The camera is set so that the execution of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display is determined at a higher rate than when it is displayed, and the hold memory display is blue as the hold display notice effect for the variable display. It is set so that the execution of the setting suggestion effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display at a higher rate than the case where it is displayed in.

From the above, in the feature unit 153SG of this embodiment, when the hold memory display is displayed in a quadrangle or a star shape as a hold display notice effect for the variable display, it is used as a suggestion effect during the rear variable display. While it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the jackpot suggestion effect is executed, the hold memory display is displayed by the blue or red camera as the hold display notice effect for the variable display. In that case, the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display.

Furthermore, if the hold storage display is displayed on the red camera as the hold display notice effect for the variable display, the hold memory display is displayed on the blue camera as the hold display notice effect for the variable display. Since the ratio of the setting suggestion effect being executed as the rear variable display suggestion effect is higher than the case where the setting suggestion effect is executed as the rear variable display suggestion effect, the game is further played. It is possible to draw people's attention.

Returning to FIG. 11-34, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display is determined in the process of the 153SGS 302 (153SGS303). If it is decided not to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect in the processing of 153SGS302, the rear variable display suggestion effect determination process is terminated, and if it is decided to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect in the processing of 153SGS302, further. , 153 SGS 302 determines whether or not the execution of the jackpot suggestion effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display (153SGS304).

When it is decided to execute the jackpot suggestion effect as the rear variable display suggestion effect in the processing of 153SGS302, the effect pattern of the jackpot suggestion effect is determined and stored based on the variable display result, and the rear variable display suggestion effect determination process is performed. Finish (153SGS305).

As the effect patterns that can be determined in the processing of the 153 SGS 305, as shown in FIG. 11-35 (B), a total of three effect patterns from pattern AS-1 to pattern AS-3 are provided. Among these effect patterns, pattern AS-1 is an effect pattern (big hit expectation: low) that suggests that the rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit (big hit expectation) is the lowest, and pattern AS-2 is It is an effect pattern (big hit expectation: medium) that suggests that the ratio of the variable display result to a big hit is higher than that of the pattern AS-1, and the putter AS-3 has the highest ratio of the variable display result to a big hit. It is a production pattern (big hit expectation: high) that suggests that it is high.

Then, in the above-mentioned processing of the 153SGS305, as shown in FIGS. 11-36, when the variable display result is a big hit, the effect control CPU 120 changes the effect pattern of the big hit suggestion effect at a rate of 10% as pattern AS-1. Is determined to be pattern AS-2 at a rate of 30%, and pattern AS-3 is determined at a rate of 60%.

On the other hand, when the execution of the setting suggestion effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display in the processing of the 153SGS 302, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the RAM 122 and sets a value (pachinko gaming machine 1) from the set value designation command received from the CPU 103. (Set value set in) is specified (153SGS306). Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines and stores the effect pattern of the setting suggestion effect based on the specified set value, and ends the suggestion effect determination process during the rear variable display (153SGS307).

As the effect patterns that can be determined in the 153SG 307, as shown in FIG. 11-35 (B), a total of five patterns from the pattern SS-1 to the pattern SS-5 are provided. Of these patterns SS-1 to pattern SS-5, pattern SS-1 suggests that the set value may be an odd number (for example, 1, 3, 5), and pattern SS-2 has an even number of set values (for example, 1, 3, 5). For example, the pattern SS-3 suggests the possibility of 2, 4, 6), and the pattern SS-3 suggests the possibility that the set value is equal to or higher than the intermediate setting (for example, 3 or 5) closer to the odd number. Suggests that the set value may be greater than or equal to the even-numbered intermediate setting (eg, 4 or 6), and pattern SS-5 suggests that the set value may be the highest setting (eg, 6).

The patterns SS-1 and SS-2 are determined at a high rate when the set value is any of 1 to 4 (low setting), and therefore, any of the set values 5 and 6 (high setting). It is said that the degree of expectation is low, and for pattern SS-3 and pattern SS-4, when the set value is either 5 or 6, it is determined at a high rate, so that the set value 5 and It is said that the expectation of being 6 is high.

In the feature unit 153SG, the set values 1 to 4 are set as low settings and the set values 5 and 6 are set as high settings, but the set values 1 to 3 may be set as low settings and the set values 4 to 6 may be set as high settings. Then, the execution ratio of the effect pattern may be set with the setting values 1 and 2 being the low setting, the setting values 3 and 4 being the intermediate setting, and the setting values 5 and 6 being the high setting.

In the processing of the above-mentioned 153SGS307, as shown in FIGS. 11-37, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect pattern at a ratio of 60% to the pattern SS-. Determined to be 1, pattern SS-2 at a rate of 25%, pattern SS-3 at a rate of 9%, pattern SS-4 at a rate of 6%, pattern at a rate of 0% Decide on SS-5. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern SS-1 at a rate of 25%, pattern SS-2 at a rate of 60%, and 6 The rate of% determines the pattern SS-3, the rate of 9% determines the pattern SS-4, and the rate of 0% determines the pattern SS-5. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern SS-1 at a rate of 50%, pattern SS-2 at a rate of 20%, and 20 The rate of% determines the pattern SS-3, the rate of 10% determines the pattern SS-4, and the rate of 0% determines the pattern SS-5.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern SS-1 at a rate of 20%, pattern SS-2 at a rate of 50%, and 10 The rate of% determines the pattern SS-3, the rate of 20% determines the pattern SS-4, and the rate of 0% determines the pattern SS-5. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 5, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern SS-1 at a rate of 20%, pattern SS-2 at a rate of 30%, and 30 The rate of% determines the pattern SS-3, the rate of 20% determines the pattern SS-4, and the rate of 0% determines the pattern SS-5. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern SS-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern SS-2 at a rate of 20%, and 15 The rate of% determines the pattern SS-3, the rate of 30% determines the pattern SS-4, and the rate of 5% determines the pattern SS-5.

As described above, in the feature unit 153SG, it is suggested that the set value is one of 1 to 4 by executing the set value suggestion effect in the pattern SS-1 or the pattern SS-2, and the set value suggestion It is suggested that the set value is 5 or 6 by executing the effect in the pattern SS-3 or the pattern SS-4. Then, when the setting suggestion effect is executed in the pattern SS-5, it is confirmed that the set value is 6.

FIG. 11-38 is a flowchart showing a front variable display suggestion effect determination process (153SGS280) executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 11-33. In the front variable display suggestion effect determination process shown in FIGS. 11-38, the effect control CPU 120 first specifies the variable display result of the variable display (153SGS311). In addition, it is determined whether or not the execution of the setting suggestion effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display (153SGS312).

If it is decided to execute the jackpot suggestion effect as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, whether or not the front variable display suggestion effect is executed and the suggestion during the front variable display based on the execution of the jackpot suggestion effect and the variable display result. The effect to be executed as the effect is determined from the character effect and the timer effect (153SGS313). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-39 (A), when the variable display result is a big hit, the non-execution of the suggestion effect during the front variable display is determined at a rate of 40%, and a rate of 30%. Determines the execution of the character effect as the suggestion effect during the front variable display, and determines the execution of the timer effect as the suggestion effect during the front variable display at a rate of 30%. If the variable display result is out of order, 70% of the time, 70% of the time, the non-execution of the front variable display suggestion effect is decided, and 25% of the time, the character effect is decided as the front variable display, the suggestion effect. Then, at a rate of 5%, the execution of the timer effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the front variable display.

In other words, when the execution of the jackpot suggestion effect is decided as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, when the variable display result is a big hit, the front variable display is performed at a higher rate than when the variable display result is out of order. The execution of the suggestion effect is determined, and if the variable display result is a big hit, the execution of the character effect and the execution of the timer effect are determined at the same ratio as the suggestion effect during the front variable display, while the variable display result. If is off, the execution of the character effect is determined at a higher rate than the execution of the timer effect as a suggestion effect during the front variable display, that is, the jackpot expectation of the timer effect is higher than the jackpot expectation of the character effect. It is set.

Further, when the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of the setting suggestion effect as the rear variable display suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 executes the setting suggestion effect and executes the front variable display suggestion effect based on the variable display result. The presence / absence and the effect to be executed as the suggestion effect during the variable front display are determined from the character effect and the timer effect (153SGS314). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-39 (B), when the variable display result is a big hit, the non-execution of the suggestion effect during the front variable display is determined at a rate of 30%, and the rate is 0%. Determines the execution of the character effect as the suggestion effect during the front variable display, and determines the execution of the timer effect as the suggestion effect during the front variable display at a rate of 70%. If the variable display result is out of alignment, 80% of the time, 80% of the time, the non-execution of the front variable display suggestion effect is decided, and 0% of the time, the character effect is decided as the front variable display, the suggestion effect. Then, at a rate of 20%, the execution of the timer effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the front variable display.

That is, when the execution of the setting suggestion effect is decided as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, when the variable display result is a big hit, the front variable display is performed at a higher rate than when the variable display result is out of order. It is set so that the execution of the suggestion effect is determined, and the execution of the character effect is not determined as the suggestion effect during the front variable display regardless of whether the variable display result is a big hit or not. That is, the jackpot expectation of the timer effect is set higher than the jackpot expectation of the character effect.

For this reason, when the variable display result is a big hit, the execution of the timer effect is determined at a higher rate than when the variable display result is out of order as a result. When a timer effect is executed as an effect, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fact that the variable display result is a big hit.

Then, as shown in FIG. 11-38, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the suggestion effect during the front variable display is determined after the execution of the 153 SGS 313 or the 153 SGS 314 (153 SGS 315). If it is decided not to execute the suggestion effect during the front variable display, the suggestion effect determination process during the front variable display is terminated, and if it is decided to execute the suggestion effect during the front variable display, the front part is further determined. It is determined whether or not the execution of the character effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the variable display (153SGS316).

If the execution of the character effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the front variable display, the effect pattern of the character effect is determined and stored based on the variable display result, and the suggestion effect determination process during the front variable display is terminated. (153SGS317).

As a character effect effect pattern that can be determined in the process of 153 SGS317, as shown in FIG. 11-39 (C), a total of two effect patterns, pattern CS-1 and pattern CS-2, are provided. .. Among these effect patterns, pattern CS-1 is an effect pattern (big hit expectation: low) that suggests that the rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit by displaying the character A (not shown) on the image display device 5 is the lowest. Yes, the pattern CS-2 is an effect pattern (big hit expectation: medium) suggesting that the rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit by displaying the character B (not shown) on the image display device 5 is higher than that of the pattern CS-1. ).

Therefore, in the processing of the 153SGS317, as shown in FIG. 11-40 (A), when the variable display result is a big hit, the effect control CPU 120 changes the effect pattern of the character effect to the pattern CS-1 at a rate of 20%. The pattern CS-2 is determined at a rate of 80%. On the other hand, when the variable display result is out of alignment, the effect pattern of the character effect is determined to be pattern CS-1 at a rate of 80%, and to pattern CS-2 at a rate of 20%.

Further, when the execution of the timer effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the front variable display, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect pattern of the timer effect based on the effect determined to be executed as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display. Is determined and stored, and the suggestion effect determination process during the variable display of the unit is terminated (153SGS318).

As a timer effect effect pattern that can be determined in the processing of the 153 SGS 318, as shown in FIG. 11-39 (C), a total of two effect patterns, pattern TS-1 and pattern TS-2, are provided. Among these effect patterns, pattern TS-1 suggests that the rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit in the image display device 5 is higher than that of the character effect pattern CS-1 and pattern CS-2 (big hit expectation: high). ) And the effect that suggests the period until the start of execution of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display for 25 seconds together with the image of the character X. The pattern TS-2 is the ratio at which the variable display result becomes a big hit in the image display device 5. Is higher than the pattern CS-1 and pattern CS-2 of the character effect (big hit expectation: high), and the period until the execution of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display is started for 25 seconds together with the image of the character Y. (See FIGS. 11-40 (C), 11-42 (D), and 11-42 (E)).

Therefore, in the processing of the 153SGS318, as shown in FIG. 11-40 (B), when the rear variable display suggestion effect whose execution is determined is the jackpot suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 produces a timer effect. The pattern is determined to be pattern TS-1 at a rate of 80% and to pattern TS-2 at a rate of 20%. Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines the pattern TS-1 at a rate of 80% and the pattern TS- at a rate of 20% when the suggestion effect during the rear variable display whose execution is determined is a setting suggestion effect. Decide on 2.

That is, when the timer effect is executed as the suggestion effect during the front variable display, the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-2 rather than in the pattern TS-1 (that is, the timer). When the effect period of the effect is long and the character B is displayed on the image display device 5 rather than the character A), the ratio of the set suggestion effect being executed as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display is set higher. Therefore, in the feature unit 153SG of this embodiment, the player can be made to pay attention to the effect period of the timer effect and the character displayed on the image display device 5. Further, when the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-2, it is possible to expect the player to execute the setting suggestion effect as compared with the case where the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-1. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As described above, in the feature unit 153SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-39 (D), when the timer effect is executed as the front variable display suggestion effect, the front variable display suggestion effect is performed. The jackpot expectation is set higher than when the character effect is executed, and the setting suggestion is set as the rear variable display suggestion effect at a higher rate than when the character effect is executed as the front variable display suggestion effect. The production is to be executed.

As shown in FIGS. 11-33 to 11-41, when the execution of the front variable display suggestion effect during the variable display is determined, the effect control CPU 120 is determined in the variable display effect process (S172). Process data corresponding to the effect pattern of the suggestion effect during the front variable display may be set, and the effect device may be controlled according to the content of the process data according to the process timer in the subsequent variable display effect process (S172). Further, when it is determined to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect during the variable display, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the rear variable display suggestion effect start waiting timer by -1 each time the variable display process is executed. Then, based on the value of the timer for waiting for the suggestion effect during the rear variable display to become 0, the process data corresponding to the determined effect pattern of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display is set. Then, in the subsequent variable display effect processing (S172), the effect device may be controlled according to the contents of the process data according to the process timer.

As shown in FIGS. 11-41 (A) and 11-41 (B), the jackpot suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect as the rear variable display suggestion effect in the feature unit 153SG are during the execution period of the reach effect. In, it is executed for 7 seconds, which is a period longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the non-reach fluctuation pattern. Therefore, even if the player takes his eyes off the image display device 5 for a moment, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the jackpot suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect.

Next, an effect mode during variable display in the feature unit 153SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-42 to 11-44. First, as shown in FIGS. 11-42 (A) and 11-42 (B), a new start prize is generated during the variable display, and the hold memory display is displayed as a look-ahead notice effect based on the start prize. When the pattern is determined to be the display pattern γ or the display pattern δ, a new hold storage display is displayed in the mode of a blue or red camera in the first hold storage display area 153SG005D and the second hold storage display area 153SG005U. ..

Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-42 (C) to 11-42 (E), as a new variable display, when the variable display corresponding to the hold storage display, which is the mode of the camera, is started, the front part The timer effect as a suggestion effect is started during the variable display. At this time, when the effect pattern of the timer effect is the pattern TS-1, the image 153SG005X of the character X is displayed on the left side of the image display device 5 and the rear part is displayed as shown in FIG. 11-42 (D). The update display of the timer for 25 seconds, which is the period until the suggestion effect during the variable display, is started. When the effect pattern of the timer effect is the pattern TS-2, as shown in FIG. 11-42 (E), the image 153SG005Y of the character Y is displayed on the left side of the image display device 5, and the rear part is variable. The update display of the timer for 30 seconds, which is the period until the suggestion effect during display, is started.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 11-43 (F) to 11-43 (H), when the variable display progresses together with the update display of the timer up to the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, the super reach effect is started. Then, when the timer reaches 0 seconds during the execution of the super reach effect (the timer effect ends), the jackpot suggestion effect or the setting suggestion effect is started as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display.

Specifically, when the execution of the jackpot suggestion effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, and the determined effect pattern is pattern AS-1, as shown in FIGS. 11-43 (I). A message indicating that the jackpot expectation is low, such as "chance!", Is displayed on the image display device 5, and if the determined production pattern is pattern AS-2, it is shown in FIG. 11-43 (J). As described above, if a message indicating that the jackpot expectation such as “hot!” Is higher than that of the pattern AS-1 is displayed on the image display device 5, and the determined effect pattern is the pattern AS-3, FIG. As shown in −43 (K), a message indicating that the jackpot expectation such as “super hot!” Is higher than that of the pattern AS-2 is displayed on the image display device 5.

On the other hand, when the execution of the setting suggestion effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, the effect pattern of the setting suggestion effect is as shown in FIGS. 11-44 (L) to 11-44 (P). In the case of the pattern SS-1 to the pattern SS-4, the image display device 5 displays the setting value suggestion images 131SG005H, 131SG005I, 131SG005J, and 131SG005K of different characters, so that the pachinko machine 1 is set. The setting value is suggested. Further, when the effect pattern of the set value suggestion effect is the pattern SS-5, the set value suggestion image 131SGS005L, which is a collection of all the characters to be displayed on the image display device 5 in the patterns SS-1 to the pattern SS-4, is the image display device. It is displayed at 5.

As described above, in the feature unit 153SG of this embodiment, when the hold memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera as the look-ahead notice, the look-ahead notice is not executed or the hold memory display is displayed. The setting suggestion effect is executed at a higher rate than when is displayed as a white square or a star. For this reason, the player suggests the setting by a mobile terminal such as a smartphone, which is possessed in anticipation that the setting suggestion effect will be executed in advance when the hold memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera. You can now be ready to shoot the production. That is, the hold memory display of the blue or red camera mode in the feature unit 153SG of this embodiment is also an effect of urging the player to prepare for shooting the setting suggestion effect.

As described above, in the feature unit 153SG of this embodiment, it is possible to execute a character effect and a timer effect having a higher expectation of a big hit than the character effect as a suggestion effect during the front variable display that suggests the expectation of a big hit. As shown in −39 (D), when the timer effect is executed during the variable display, the setting suggestion effect is set as the rear variable display suggestion effect at a higher rate than when the character effect is executed during the variable display. Will be executed. That is, when the timer effect is executed, the player pays more attention to whether or not the variable display result becomes a big hit because the jackpot expectation is higher than when the character effect is executed. The setting suggestion effect is executed while the player is paying attention, and the player can prevent the setting suggestion effect from being overlooked.

Further, as the front variable display suggestion effect during variable display, in addition to the character effect, a timer effect that suggests the period until the start of the rear variable display suggestion effect can be executed, so that the setting suggestion effect can be performed. By executing the setting suggestion effect, the player can easily recognize the execution start timing of the setting suggestion effect.

In the feature unit 153SG of this embodiment, as a timer effect, the period until the execution start of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display is displayed as a numerical value (see FIGS. 11-42 (D) and 11-42 (E)). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a timer effect, for example, it is suggested that the rear variable display is performed by displaying an increase / decrease of a gauge, a meter, or the like. It is possible not to clearly notify the period until the start of execution of the effect (suggest only the approximate period).

Further, in the feature unit 153SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11-42 (D) and 11-42 (E), an embodiment in which the timer effect is executed by the image display on the image display device 5 is exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the image display on the image display device 5, the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the light emission of the game effect lamp 9, and the display means other than the image display device 5. Any one aspect of the display in (1) or a plurality of aspects may be combined and executed.

Further, in the feature unit 153SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11-43 (H) and 11-44 (L), the timer displayed on the image display device 5 as a timer effect is 0. Based on this, a jackpot suggestion effect may be executed in addition to the setting suggestion effect as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display. That is, even when the timer effect is executed, the jackpot suggestion effect may be executed instead of the setting suggestion effect, so that the unexpectedness can be produced and the game entertainment can be improved.

In addition, in the feature unit 153SG of this embodiment, based on the fact that the timer displayed on the image display device 5 becomes 0 as the timer effect, the setting suggestion effect and the jackpot suggestion effect are performed as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display. Although only one of them can be executed, the present invention is not limited to this, and is based on the fact that the timer displayed on the image display device 5 as a timer effect becomes 0. , Both the setting suggestion performance and the jackpot suggestion production may be executed as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display.

Further, the feature unit 153SG of this embodiment illustrates a mode in which the rear variable display suggestion effect is always executed when the timer effect is executed as the front variable display suggestion effect. The present invention is not limited to this, and a case may be provided in which the timer effect is executed as the front variable display suggestion effect but the rear variable display suggestion effect is not executed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-40 (B) and 11-40 (C), as the effect pattern of the timer effect, the pattern TS-1 having an effect period of 25 seconds and the pattern having an effect period of 30 seconds TS-2 is provided, and when the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-2, the setting suggestion effect is executed at a higher rate than when the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-1. That is, it is suggested that when the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-2, the setting suggestion effect is executed for a longer period of time than when the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-1. It is possible to further prevent the player from overlooking the setting suggestion effect.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-41, since the rear variable display suggestion effect including the setting suggestion effect is executed during the reach effect period, which is the latter half period in the variable display of the super reach, the player sets suggestion effect. Can be further prevented from being overlooked.

In the feature unit 153SG of this embodiment, a mode in which the setting suggestion effect is executed during the reach effect period, which is the latter half period in the variable display of the super reach, is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, there may be a case where the setting suggestion effect is executed in the first half period in the variable display of the super reach.

Further, in the feature unit 153SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11-31 and 11-35, the display mode of the hold storage display is changed to a white square or star shape, or a blue or red camera as a look-ahead notice. In the variable display corresponding to the hold storage display (the value of the hold display flag is 3 or 4), which is the mode of the camera whose display mode is blue or red, it is possible to execute the hold display notice effect that can be displayed by the mode or the like. It is possible to determine the execution of the setting suggestion effect at a higher rate than the variable display corresponding to the hold storage display (the value of the hold display flag is 1 or 2) whose display mode is a white square or a star. Therefore, in the variable display corresponding to the hold storage display (the value of the hold display flag is 3 or 4), which is the mode of the camera whose display mode is blue or red, the player decides whether or not the variable display result is a big hit. Since the setting suggestion effect is executed when the player is paying attention, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the setting suggestion effect.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-42 and 11-44, the feature unit 153SG of this embodiment corresponds to the hold storage display which is the target of the hold display notice effect when the hold display notice effect is executed. It is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect in the variable display (variable display immediately after the hold display notice effect is finished). For this reason, the setting suggestion effect is executed when the player is paying attention to the variable display corresponding to the hold memory display, which is the target of the hold display notice effect, so that the player can miss the setting suggestion effect. It can be further prevented.

In the feature unit 153SG of this embodiment, a mode in which the hold display notice effect can be executed as a lookahead notice is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the lookahead notice is a hold display notice. It may be possible to execute an effect other than the effect, and suggest that the setting suggestion effect is executed as the effect mode of the effect.

Further, in the feature unit 153SG of this embodiment, the setting suggestion effect can be executed in the variable display corresponding to the hold memory display which is the target of the hold display notice effect (variable display immediately after the hold display notice effect is finished). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is more than the start of the variable display corresponding to the hold storage display which is the target of the hold display notice effect during the execution period of the hold display notice effect. It may be possible to execute the setting suggestion effect from the previous timing).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-32, the ratio of displaying the hold memory display in the form of a blue or red camera as the look-ahead notice effect is such that the hold memory display is displayed as a white square or a star as the look-ahead notice effect. Since it is set lower than the display ratio, the hold memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera, so that the hold memory display is displayed in a white square or star shape. It is possible to draw attention to the person and further prevent the technician from overlooking the setting suggestion effect.

Further, in the feature unit 153SG of this embodiment, the ratio of displaying the hold memory display in the form of a blue or red camera as the look-ahead notice effect is the ratio of displaying the hold memory display as the look-ahead notice effect in a white square or star shape. Although the embodiment set to be lower than the display ratio in is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the hold storage display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera as a pre-reading notice effect. The ratio may be set higher than the ratio of displaying the hold memory display as a pre-reading notice effect with a white square or a star shape, or the hold memory display may be set as a pre-read notice effect of a blue or red camera. The ratio of displaying in the mode and the ratio of displaying the hold memory display as a white square or star as a pre-reading notice effect may be the same.

Further, in the feature unit 153SG of this embodiment, as a hold display notice effect, the hold memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera to prepare the player for shooting the setting suggestion effect. Since the player can prepare a form terminal such as a smartphone before the start of the setting suggestion effect, the success rate of shooting the setting suggestion effect by the player can be increased.

In the feature unit 153SG of this embodiment, as a hold display notice effect, the hold memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera to prepare the player for shooting the setting suggestion effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the hold storage display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera as a hold display notice effect, the speakers 8L and 8R are used. The player may be separately urged to prepare for shooting the setting suggestion effect by the sound output of the above, the display of the message image on the image display device 5, and the like.

Further, in the feature unit 153SG of this embodiment, the hold display notice effect is provided by the display pattern γ that displays the hold memory display in the form of a blue camera and the display pattern δ that displays the hold memory display in the form of a red camera. It is feasible, and as shown in FIG. 11-35 (A), when the hold memory display is displayed in the form of a blue camera (when the value of the hold display flag is 3), the hold memory display is red. The rate at which the setting suggestion effect is executed is different from the case where the display is performed in the mode of the camera (when the value of the hold display flag is 4). In particular, when the hold memory display is displayed in the mode of the red camera, the setting suggestion effect is executed at a higher rate than when the hold memory display is displayed in the mode of the blue camera. When the display is displayed in the mode of the red camera, the player pays more attention to whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed than when the hold memory display is displayed in the mode of the blue camera. It is possible to improve the game entertainment.

In the feature unit 153SG of this embodiment, when the hold storage display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera, the hold storage display is displayed until the variable display corresponding to the hold storage display starts. Although the embodiment in which the mode does not change has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and a case may be provided in which the display mode of the hold storage display changes from the mode of the blue camera to the mode of the red camera. In addition, a case is provided in which the hold storage display corresponding to the variable display during execution is continuously displayed as the active display, and the display mode of the active display is changed from the mode of the blue camera to the mode of the red camera. You may. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention as to whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed until the variable display is completed, so that the game interest can be improved.

Further, in the feature unit 153SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11-33, the suggestion effect during the rear variable display including the setting suggestion effect is only in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach having a long special figure fluctuation time. Since it is feasible and is not executed in the variable display of the normal reach and non-reach fluctuation patterns with a short special figure fluctuation time, it is possible to suppress the execution of the setting suggestion effect during the short variable display period, and to play the game. It is possible to prevent the person from overlooking the setting suggestion effect.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-41, the execution period of the setting suggestion effect is set to 7 seconds, which is longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the shortened non-reach fluctuation pattern, so that the super reach is variably displayed (reach effect). It is possible to further prevent the player from overlooking the setting suggestion effect during (during execution).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-32, when the hold memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera, the variable display corresponding to the hold memory display is a super reach capable of executing the setting suggestion effect. Since it is suggested that the display is variable, the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed by displaying the hold memory display in the form of a blue or red camera. Can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-32, when the fluctuation category is non-reach or other (normal reach or small hit), that is, when it is determined that the special figure fluctuation time is shorter than the super reach, the hold display is displayed. Since the hold memory display is not displayed in the form of a blue or red camera as a warning effect, the player was paying attention to the fact that the hold memory display was displayed in the form of a blue or red camera. Nevertheless, it is possible to prevent the setting suggestion effect from being not executed and the interest from being lowered because the variable display corresponding to the hold memory display is a variable display such as non-reach or normal reach.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-33 to 11-41, during the variable display of the super reach, the suggestion effect during the front variable display including the timer effect can be executed, but it is more special than the variable display of the super reach. Figure The timer effect is not executed during the variable display of non-reach or normal reach with a short fluctuation time, so the timer effect is not executed during the rear variable display including the setting suggestion effect. The timer effect is not executed during the variable display of non-reach or normal reach. It is possible to prevent inconsistency in the production due to the execution of.

(Modification example of feature unit 153SG)
Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and the present invention may be changed or added without departing from the gist of the present invention. include.

For example, in the feature unit 153SG of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-39 (D), when the timer effect is executed as the front variable display suggestion effect, the front variable display suggestion effect is used. The jackpot expectation is set higher than when the character effect is executed, and the suggestion effect is set as the rear variable display suggestion effect at a higher rate than when the character effect is executed as the front variable display suggestion effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 11-45 as a modified example 153SG-1, execution of a timer effect as a suggestion effect during front variable display. Is set lower than the ratio for determining the execution of the character effect as the front variable display suggestion effect, and the front variable when the timer effect is executed as the front variable display suggestion effect. It may be set to execute the setting suggestion effect as the rear variable display suggestion effect at a higher rate than when the character effect is executed as the display suggestion effect.

Further, in the feature unit 153SG of the above-described embodiment, as a pre-reading notice, the hold storage display is displayed in the first hold storage display area 153SG005D and the second hold storage display area 153SG005U of the image display device 5 in a white square, star shape, or blue. Although a mode in which a hold display notice effect to be displayed in the mode of a red camera or a red camera can be executed is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and FIG. 11-46 (A) and FIG. 11-46 (A) as a modified example 153SG-2. As shown in FIG. 11-46 (B), when the hold storage display is displayed in the first hold storage display area 153SG005D or the second hold storage display area 153SG005U, the first hold storage display area 153SG005D is displayed in the image display device 5. When the predetermined effect image 153SG005E overlaps with the second hold storage display area 153SG005U, at least the hold storage display in the form of a blue or red camera is displayed with priority over the effect image 153SG005E (blue or red camera). (Display so that the hold storage display of the embodiment is not concealed by the effect image 153SG005E). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the hold storage display of the blue or red camera mode due to the obstruction of the hold memory display of the blue or red camera mode by the effect image 153SG005E. be able to.

Further, the feature unit 153SG of the above-described embodiment illustrates a mode in which the setting suggestion effect can be executed for 7 seconds only during the variable display of the super reach, but the present invention is not limited to this. As a modification 153SG-3, as shown in FIGS. 11-47 (A) and 11-47 (B), the setting suggestion effect can be executed for 7 seconds during the variable display of normal reach and non-reach without shortening. May be good. Further, during the variable display of the shortened non-reach, the period dedicated to the variable display of the shortened non-reach (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-47 (C), is the special figure variation time of the variable display of the shortened non-reach. The setting suggestion effect may be executed for 3 seconds (3 seconds shorter than 3.75 seconds to 5.75 seconds).

Further, in the feature unit 153SG of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-35 (A), the hold storage display is displayed in the mode of the blue camera and the mode of the red camera as the hold display notice effect. Although the embodiment in which the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect is different from that in the case of being displayed in the above is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification 153SG-4, the mode of the camera in which the hold memory display is blue. The determination ratio of at least one effect pattern in the setting suggestion effect may be different depending on whether it is displayed in the mode of the red camera or in the mode of the red camera. By doing so, the player can pay attention to whether the hold storage display is displayed in the mode of the blue camera or the mode of the red camera as the hold display notice effect, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, in the feature unit 153SG of the above-described embodiment, two timings (25 seconds and 30 seconds after the start of the variable display) are provided as start timings of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display during the variable display of the super reach. Although a mode in which the setting suggestion effect is more easily executed as the rear variable display suggestion effect by executing the rear variable display suggestion effect from the timing, the present invention is not limited to this, and the modified example 153SG- As a value 5, when the start timing of the setting suggestion effect is 30 seconds after the start of the variable display, the setting suggestion effect is patterned at a higher rate than when the start timing of the setting suggestion effect is 25 seconds after the start of the variable display. It may be executed with an effect pattern suggesting a high set value such as SS-3 to pattern SS-5. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the timing at which the setting suggestion effect is executed, so that the game interest can be improved.

Further, in the feature unit 153SG of the embodiment, the setting suggestion effect is executed according to the effect executed as the suggestion effect during the front variable display and the display mode of the hold memory display displayed as the hold display notice effect. Although a form suggesting whether or not to be performed is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and is displayed as an effect executed as a suggestion effect during front variable display and a hold display notice effect. It may be suggested whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed only by one of the display mode of the hold storage display. Further, in the feature unit 153SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode in which the setting suggestion effect can be executed as the rear variable display inducing effect is illustrated in the variable display in which the timer effect as the front variable display suggestion effect is executed. The present invention is not limited to this, and when the variable display result of the variable display for executing the timer effect is a big hit, the setting suggestion effect is set during the big hit game (advantageous state in the present invention) based on the variable display. May be executed.

Further, in the feature unit 153SG of the above-described embodiment, when the hold display notice effect is already executed, the mode of restricting the execution of the new hold display notice effect is illustrated, but the present invention is limited to this. If the hold display notice effect is already executed, the execution of only a part of the new hold display notice effects may be restricted. For example, if the hold display notice effect is already executed in the display pattern γ or the display pattern δ (when the hold memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera), a new hold display notice effect is displayed. Only what is executed in the display pattern α or the display pattern β (the hold memory display is displayed as a white square or a star) is restricted. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming difficult to understand due to the simultaneous execution of a plurality of hold display notice effects having different suggested contents. Further, when the hold display notice effect is already executed in the display pattern γ or the display pattern δ in this way, it is restricted that the new hold display notice effect is executed in the display pattern α or the display pattern β. Therefore, the player can pay more attention to whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed. In addition, if the hold display notice effect has already been executed in the display pattern α or the display pattern β (when the hold memory display is displayed in a white square or star shape), a new hold display notice effect is displayed. Whether or not the variable display result is a big hit by limiting only what is executed in the display pattern γ or the display pattern δ (the hold memory display is displayed in the manner of a blue or red camera) The player can be even more noticed.

It should be noted that the feature unit 153SG of the above-described embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the hold display advance notice effect can be executed as the look-ahead effect in the present invention, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the look-ahead effect is not limited thereto. As long as the effect can be executed from the timing before the variable display of the target starts, the effect other than the hold display notice effect may be executed.

Further, in the feature unit 153SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode in which a character effect and a timer effect can be executed as a suggestion effect during the front variable display suggesting that the variable display result becomes a big hit has been illustrated. The present invention is not limited to this, and as the suggestion effect during the front variable display, an effect other than the character effect or the timer effect may be executed as long as the effect suggests that the variable display result is a big hit.

(Explanation related to association of feature parts)
The configuration relating to the feature portion 074AK, the configuration relating to the feature portion 075AK, and the configuration relating to the feature portion 153SG may be appropriately combined with a part or all of the configurations relating to the other feature portions, respectively. For example, in the feature unit 074AK and the feature unit 075AK, when the display mode is changed to a display mode with a high expectation of a big hit in the change effect during the monochrome effect, the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect is set to be high as in the feature unit 153SG. May be good. According to this, since the effect of being controlled to a relatively advantageous state is executed, the setting suggestion effect is executed when the player is paying attention to the subsequent development, so that the setting by the player is performed. It is possible to prevent overlooking the suggestion effect.

1 ... Pachinko game machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Game machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Winning ball device 6B ... Variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 ... Frame LED
10… General winning opening 11… Main board 12… Production control board 13… Voice control board 14… LED control board 15… Relay board 17… Special variable winning ball device 20… Ordinary symbol display 21… Gate switch 22A, 22B… Start Mouth switch 23 ... 1st count switch 24 ... 2nd count switch 30 ... Hitting ball operation handle 31A ... Stick controller 31B ... Push button 32 ... Movable body 41 ... Passing gate 100 ... Game control microcomputer 101, 121 ... ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... Random number circuit 105, 125 ... I / O
120 ... CPU for production control
123… Display control unit

Claims (1)

A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player, and
An advantageous state control means that can control an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player,
Production control means to control the production and
With display means,
The effect control means can execute the first setting suggestion effect regarding the setting suggestion in a specific display area in the display area of the display means, and the second setting suggestion effect regarding the setting suggestion can be performed in the display area of the display means. It can be executed in our predetermined display area,
In the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect, the execution ratios are different from each other.
The display means hides the first setting suggestion effect when the specific effect is executed.
further,
Specific display means that can display specific display related to variable display on display means,
A change effect execution means capable of executing a change effect that changes the display color of the specific display is provided.
The display color of the specific display differs depending on the degree of expectation controlled in the advantageous state.
There are a normal effect state and a specific effect state in which a transition from the normal effect state can be performed and the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than that of the normal effect state.
The specific effect state is an effect state in which at least a part of the number of colors of the display target including the specific display displayed by the display means is displayed less than the normal effect state.
When the change effect is executed by the change effect execution means in the normal effect state, the display color of the specific display is changed to a display color according to the degree of expectation controlled in the advantageous state. When the change effect is executed by the change effect means in the specific effect state, a common display color is used without changing the display color of the specific display regardless of the degree of expectation controlled by the advantageous state. age,
When shifting from the specific effect state to the normal effect state, the display color of the specific display is displayed in a display color according to the degree of expectation controlled in the advantageous state.
A game machine characterized by that.